Перевод: со всех языков на все языки

со всех языков на все языки

and whose army

  • 1 ♦ army

    ♦ army /ˈɑ:mɪ/
    n.
    1 (mil.) esercito: to join the army, arruolarsi nell'esercito; to raise an army, radunare un esercito; standing army, esercito permanente; army officer, ufficiale dell'esercito; conscript army, esercito di leva; regular army, esercito regolare
    2 (fig.) esercito; massa; schiera; stuolo: the army of the unemployed, la massa dei disoccupati
    ● (zool.) army ant, formica scacciatrice □ (fam. USA) army brat, figlio di militare □ ( USA) army center, base militare dell'esercito □ army corps, corpo d'armata □ army issue, fornitura militare □ (in GB) Army List, ruolo degli ufficiali in servizio e della riserva □ army surplus, residuati militari (o dell'esercito) □ (fam. spreg.) You and whose army?, figurarsi!; ma non farmi ridere!
    NOTA D'USO: - the army is o the army are?-

    English-Italian dictionary > ♦ army

  • 2 ♦ you

    ♦ you /ju:, jə/
    A pron. pers. 2a pers. pl. e sing.
    1 (sogg. e compl.) voi, ve, vi; tu, te, ti: How are you?, come stai?; come state?; You are my love, il mio amore sei tu; What do you want?, che cosa volete (voi)?; che cosa vuoi (tu)?; The letter is for you, la lettera è per te; I want to help you, voglio aiutarti (o aiutarvi); I'm not going to give it to you, non ve (o te) lo do; I choose you three, scelgo voi tre; You, there! What's your name?, ehi tu! come ti chiami?
    2 (form., sogg. e compl.) Lei, Ella, Loro (forme di cortesia di 3a persona): You're very kind, Sir, Lei è molto gentile, signore; Ladies and gentlemen, you know me quite well, Signori e Signore, Loro mi conoscono benissimo; Could I talk to you, later?, posso parlarle più tardi?
    3 (pred.) tu; voi: Was that you?, eri tu? (o eravate voi?)
    4 (idiom., escl.) Kiss her, you fool!, baciala, stupido!; You madman!, pazzo!; You darling!, tesoro!; caro!, cara!
    5 (colloquiale; unito alla forma in - ing, è idiom.) They don't mind you forgetting to call on them, non ci fan caso se ti sei scordato di passare da loro; I must insist on you paying your debts, devo insistere che tu paghi i tuoi debiti
    6 (arc., = yourself, yourselves): Sit you down!, siediti!; sedetevi!
    B pron. impers.
    si; sé: You never can tell!, non si sa mai!; You soon get used to it, ci si abitua presto; DIALOGO → - Asking about a house- You can see the garden from my room, si vede il giardino dalla mia camera
    ● ( slang USA) you-all, voi, voialtri (per distinguere da «you» = «tu, Lei») □ ( slang USA) You and who else (o and whose army)?, in quanti siete? ( fatevi sotto, ecc.) □ You asked for it!, te la sei cercata! □ you bet, certo; eccome; naturalmente □ (volg. USA) You bet your ass!, ci puoi scommettere il culo (volg.) □ ( slang) You bet your boots (o your sweet life), puoi scommetterci (o metterci) la testa! □ (pop.) You can say that again!, puoi ben dirlo!; davvero!; altroché! □ (fam.) You got it!, hai indovinato; ( anche) hai ragione; e va bene!, d'accordo! □ ( slang) You hear?, mi hai sentito?; hai capito?; va bene? □ ( slang USA) You heard the man, hai sentito ( quello che ha detto)?; vuoi dunque obbedire? □ (fam.) you-know-what, sai che cosa; quella cosa; il coso, la cosa ( un oggetto che non si vuole menzionare); (eufem.) rapporto sessuale: Petting often leads youngsters to you-know-what, i giovani, a furia di pomiciare, spesso finiscono per fare quella cosa □ (fam.) you-know-where, quel posto ( che non si vuole nominare); tu sai dove; (eufem.) al diavolo, all'inferno: You can just go you-know-where, puoi andare all'inferno! □ (fam.) you-know-who, chi dico io ( e non lo voglio nominare); tu sai chi: If you-know-who is there, I won't come, se c'è sai chi, io non ci vengo! □ If you say so!, se lo dici tu! □ You said it!, l'hai detto!; sono d'accordo!; è proprio vero □ all of you (fam. you all), voi tutti; tutti voi; voialtri; voi ( utile per distinguere «you», voi da «you», tu): You are all welcome, siete (tutti) i benvenuti; I don't want all of you to come, non voglio che veniate tutti; Sit down, all of you!, sedetevi! □ if I were you, se fossi in te □ the rest of you, gli altri: She may come, but the rest of you must stay behind, lei può venire, ma gli altri devono rimanere qui □ Thank you, grazie! □ There you go!, ecco a lei; prego! (quando si porge qc.) □ You see, it's like this, vedi (o capisci), le cose stanno così □ (fam.) You go away! (o Go away, you), vattene! □ (fam.) «You're an ass!» «You're another!», «sei un asino!» «asino sarai tu!» □ ( It's) very kind of you!, (è) molto gentile da parte tua (o da parte vostra)!
    NOTA D'USO: - you o one?-

    English-Italian dictionary > ♦ you

  • 3 Historical Portugal

       Before Romans described western Iberia or Hispania as "Lusitania," ancient Iberians inhabited the land. Phoenician and Greek trading settlements grew up in the Tagus estuary area and nearby coasts. Beginning around 202 BCE, Romans invaded what is today southern Portugal. With Rome's defeat of Carthage, Romans proceeded to conquer and rule the western region north of the Tagus, which they named Roman "Lusitania." In the fourth century CE, as Rome's rule weakened, the area experienced yet another invasion—Germanic tribes, principally the Suevi, who eventually were Christianized. During the sixth century CE, the Suevi kingdom was superseded by yet another Germanic tribe—the Christian Visigoths.
       A major turning point in Portugal's history came in 711, as Muslim armies from North Africa, consisting of both Arab and Berber elements, invaded the Iberian Peninsula from across the Straits of Gibraltar. They entered what is now Portugal in 714, and proceeded to conquer most of the country except for the far north. For the next half a millennium, Islam and Muslim presence in Portugal left a significant mark upon the politics, government, language, and culture of the country.
       Islam, Reconquest, and Portugal Created, 714-1140
       The long frontier struggle between Muslim invaders and Christian communities in the north of the Iberian peninsula was called the Reconquista (Reconquest). It was during this struggle that the first dynasty of Portuguese kings (Burgundian) emerged and the independent monarchy of Portugal was established. Christian forces moved south from what is now the extreme north of Portugal and gradually defeated Muslim forces, besieging and capturing towns under Muslim sway. In the ninth century, as Christian forces slowly made their way southward, Christian elements were dominant only in the area between Minho province and the Douro River; this region became known as "territorium Portu-calense."
       In the 11th century, the advance of the Reconquest quickened as local Christian armies were reinforced by crusading knights from what is now France and England. Christian forces took Montemor (1034), at the Mondego River; Lamego (1058); Viseu (1058); and Coimbra (1064). In 1095, the king of Castile and Léon granted the country of "Portu-cale," what became northern Portugal, to a Burgundian count who had emigrated from France. This was the foundation of Portugal. In 1139, a descendant of this count, Afonso Henriques, proclaimed himself "King of Portugal." He was Portugal's first monarch, the "Founder," and the first of the Burgundian dynasty, which ruled until 1385.
       The emergence of Portugal in the 12th century as a separate monarchy in Iberia occurred before the Christian Reconquest of the peninsula. In the 1140s, the pope in Rome recognized Afonso Henriques as king of Portugal. In 1147, after a long, bloody siege, Muslim-occupied Lisbon fell to Afonso Henriques's army. Lisbon was the greatest prize of the 500-year war. Assisting this effort were English crusaders on their way to the Holy Land; the first bishop of Lisbon was an Englishman. When the Portuguese captured Faro and Silves in the Algarve province in 1248-50, the Reconquest of the extreme western portion of the Iberian peninsula was complete—significantly, more than two centuries before the Spanish crown completed the Reconquest of the eastern portion by capturing Granada in 1492.
       Consolidation and Independence of Burgundian Portugal, 1140-1385
       Two main themes of Portugal's early existence as a monarchy are the consolidation of control over the realm and the defeat of a Castil-ian threat from the east to its independence. At the end of this period came the birth of a new royal dynasty (Aviz), which prepared to carry the Christian Reconquest beyond continental Portugal across the straits of Gibraltar to North Africa. There was a variety of motives behind these developments. Portugal's independent existence was imperiled by threats from neighboring Iberian kingdoms to the north and east. Politics were dominated not only by efforts against the Muslims in
       Portugal (until 1250) and in nearby southern Spain (until 1492), but also by internecine warfare among the kingdoms of Castile, Léon, Aragon, and Portugal. A final comeback of Muslim forces was defeated at the battle of Salado (1340) by allied Castilian and Portuguese forces. In the emerging Kingdom of Portugal, the monarch gradually gained power over and neutralized the nobility and the Church.
       The historic and commonplace Portuguese saying "From Spain, neither a good wind nor a good marriage" was literally played out in diplomacy and war in the late 14th-century struggles for mastery in the peninsula. Larger, more populous Castile was pitted against smaller Portugal. Castile's Juan I intended to force a union between Castile and Portugal during this era of confusion and conflict. In late 1383, Portugal's King Fernando, the last king of the Burgundian dynasty, suddenly died prematurely at age 38, and the Master of Aviz, Portugal's most powerful nobleman, took up the cause of independence and resistance against Castile's invasion. The Master of Aviz, who became King João I of Portugal, was able to obtain foreign assistance. With the aid of English archers, Joao's armies defeated the Castilians in the crucial battle of Aljubarrota, on 14 August 1385, a victory that assured the independence of the Portuguese monarchy from its Castilian nemesis for several centuries.
       Aviz Dynasty and Portugal's First Overseas Empire, 1385-1580
       The results of the victory at Aljubarrota, much celebrated in Portugal's art and monuments, and the rise of the Aviz dynasty also helped to establish a new merchant class in Lisbon and Oporto, Portugal's second city. This group supported King João I's program of carrying the Reconquest to North Africa, since it was interested in expanding Portugal's foreign commerce and tapping into Muslim trade routes and resources in Africa. With the Reconquest against the Muslims completed in Portugal and the threat from Castile thwarted for the moment, the Aviz dynasty launched an era of overseas conquest, exploration, and trade. These efforts dominated Portugal's 15th and 16th centuries.
       The overseas empire and age of Discoveries began with Portugal's bold conquest in 1415 of the Moroccan city of Ceuta. One royal member of the 1415 expedition was young, 21-year-old Prince Henry, later known in history as "Prince Henry the Navigator." His part in the capture of Ceuta won Henry his knighthood and began Portugal's "Marvelous Century," during which the small kingdom was counted as a European and world power of consequence. Henry was the son of King João I and his English queen, Philippa of Lancaster, but he did not inherit the throne. Instead, he spent most of his life and his fortune, and that of the wealthy military Order of Christ, on various imperial ventures and on voyages of exploration down the African coast and into the Atlantic. While mythology has surrounded Henry's controversial role in the Discoveries, and this role has been exaggerated, there is no doubt that he played a vital part in the initiation of Portugal's first overseas empire and in encouraging exploration. He was naturally curious, had a sense of mission for Portugal, and was a strong leader. He also had wealth to expend; at least a third of the African voyages of the time were under his sponsorship. If Prince Henry himself knew little science, significant scientific advances in navigation were made in his day.
       What were Portugal's motives for this new imperial effort? The well-worn historical cliche of "God, Glory, and Gold" can only partly explain the motivation of a small kingdom with few natural resources and barely 1 million people, which was greatly outnumbered by the other powers it confronted. Among Portuguese objectives were the desire to exploit known North African trade routes and resources (gold, wheat, leather, weaponry, and other goods that were scarce in Iberia); the need to outflank the Muslim world in the Mediterranean by sailing around Africa, attacking Muslims en route; and the wish to ally with Christian kingdoms beyond Africa. This enterprise also involved a strategy of breaking the Venetian spice monopoly by trading directly with the East by means of discovering and exploiting a sea route around Africa to Asia. Besides the commercial motives, Portugal nurtured a strong crusading sense of Christian mission, and various classes in the kingdom saw an opportunity for fame and gain.
       By the time of Prince Henry's death in 1460, Portugal had gained control of the Atlantic archipelagos of the Azores and Madeiras, begun to colonize the Cape Verde Islands, failed to conquer the Canary Islands from Castile, captured various cities on Morocco's coast, and explored as far as Senegal, West Africa, down the African coast. By 1488, Bar-tolomeu Dias had rounded the Cape of Good Hope in South Africa and thereby discovered the way to the Indian Ocean.
       Portugal's largely coastal African empire and later its fragile Asian empire brought unexpected wealth but were purchased at a high price. Costs included wars of conquest and defense against rival powers, manning the far-flung navel and trade fleets and scattered castle-fortresses, and staffing its small but fierce armies, all of which entailed a loss of skills and population to maintain a scattered empire. Always short of capital, the monarchy became indebted to bankers. There were many defeats beginning in the 16th century at the hands of the larger imperial European monarchies (Spain, France, England, and Holland) and many attacks on Portugal and its strung-out empire. Typically, there was also the conflict that arose when a tenuously held world empire that rarely if ever paid its way demanded finance and manpower Portugal itself lacked.
       The first 80 years of the glorious imperial era, the golden age of Portugal's imperial power and world influence, was an African phase. During 1415-88, Portuguese navigators and explorers in small ships, some of them caravelas (caravels), explored the treacherous, disease-ridden coasts of Africa from Morocco to South Africa beyond the Cape of Good Hope. By the 1470s, the Portuguese had reached the Gulf of Guinea and, in the early 1480s, what is now Angola. Bartolomeu Dias's extraordinary voyage of 1487-88 to South Africa's coast and the edge of the Indian Ocean convinced Portugal that the best route to Asia's spices and Christians lay south, around the tip of southern Africa. Between 1488 and 1495, there was a hiatus caused in part by domestic conflict in Portugal, discussion of resources available for further conquests beyond Africa in Asia, and serious questions as to Portugal's capacity to reach beyond Africa. In 1495, King Manuel and his council decided to strike for Asia, whatever the consequences. In 1497-99, Vasco da Gama, under royal orders, made the epic two-year voyage that discovered the sea route to western India (Asia), outflanked Islam and Venice, and began Portugal's Asian empire. Within 50 years, Portugal had discovered and begun the exploitation of its largest colony, Brazil, and set up forts and trading posts from the Middle East (Aden and Ormuz), India (Calicut, Goa, etc.), Malacca, and Indonesia to Macau in China.
       By the 1550s, parts of its largely coastal, maritime trading post empire from Morocco to the Moluccas were under siege from various hostile forces, including Muslims, Christians, and Hindi. Although Moroccan forces expelled the Portuguese from the major coastal cities by 1550, the rival European monarchies of Castile (Spain), England, France, and later Holland began to seize portions of her undermanned, outgunned maritime empire.
       In 1580, Phillip II of Spain, whose mother was a Portuguese princess and who had a strong claim to the Portuguese throne, invaded Portugal, claimed the throne, and assumed control over the realm and, by extension, its African, Asian, and American empires. Phillip II filled the power vacuum that appeared in Portugal following the loss of most of Portugal's army and its young, headstrong King Sebastião in a disastrous war in Morocco. Sebastiao's death in battle (1578) and the lack of a natural heir to succeed him, as well as the weak leadership of the cardinal who briefly assumed control in Lisbon, led to a crisis that Spain's strong monarch exploited. As a result, Portugal lost its independence to Spain for a period of 60 years.
       Portugal under Spanish Rule, 1580-1640
       Despite the disastrous nature of Portugal's experience under Spanish rule, "The Babylonian Captivity" gave birth to modern Portuguese nationalism, its second overseas empire, and its modern alliance system with England. Although Spain allowed Portugal's weakened empire some autonomy, Spanish rule in Portugal became increasingly burdensome and unacceptable. Spain's ambitious imperial efforts in Europe and overseas had an impact on the Portuguese as Spain made greater and greater demands on its smaller neighbor for manpower and money. Portugal's culture underwent a controversial Castilianization, while its empire became hostage to Spain's fortunes. New rival powers England, France, and Holland attacked and took parts of Spain's empire and at the same time attacked Portugal's empire, as well as the mother country.
       Portugal's empire bore the consequences of being attacked by Spain's bitter enemies in what was a form of world war. Portuguese losses were heavy. By 1640, Portugal had lost most of its Moroccan cities as well as Ceylon, the Moluccas, and sections of India. With this, Portugal's Asian empire was gravely weakened. Only Goa, Damão, Diu, Bombay, Timor, and Macau remained and, in Brazil, Dutch forces occupied the northeast.
       On 1 December 1640, long commemorated as a national holiday, Portuguese rebels led by the duke of Braganza overthrew Spanish domination and took advantage of Spanish weakness following a more serious rebellion in Catalonia. Portugal regained independence from Spain, but at a price: dependence on foreign assistance to maintain its independence in the form of the renewal of the alliance with England.
       Restoration and Second Empire, 1640-1822
       Foreign affairs and empire dominated the restoration era and aftermath, and Portugal again briefly enjoyed greater European power and prestige. The Anglo-Portuguese Alliance was renewed and strengthened in treaties of 1642, 1654, and 1661, and Portugal's independence from Spain was underwritten by English pledges and armed assistance. In a Luso-Spanish treaty of 1668, Spain recognized Portugal's independence. Portugal's alliance with England was a marriage of convenience and necessity between two monarchies with important religious, cultural, and social differences. In return for legal, diplomatic, and trade privileges, as well as the use during war and peace of Portugal's great Lisbon harbor and colonial ports for England's navy, England pledged to protect Portugal and its scattered empire from any attack. The previously cited 17th-century alliance treaties were renewed later in the Treaty of Windsor, signed in London in 1899. On at least 10 different occasions after 1640, and during the next two centuries, England was central in helping prevent or repel foreign invasions of its ally, Portugal.
       Portugal's second empire (1640-1822) was largely Brazil-oriented. Portuguese colonization, exploitation of wealth, and emigration focused on Portuguese America, and imperial revenues came chiefly from Brazil. Between 1670 and 1740, Portugal's royalty and nobility grew wealthier on funds derived from Brazilian gold, diamonds, sugar, tobacco, and other crops, an enterprise supported by the Atlantic slave trade and the supply of African slave labor from West Africa and Angola. Visitors today can see where much of that wealth was invested: Portugal's rich legacy of monumental architecture. Meanwhile, the African slave trade took a toll in Angola and West Africa.
       In continental Portugal, absolutist monarchy dominated politics and government, and there was a struggle for position and power between the monarchy and other institutions, such as the Church and nobility. King José I's chief minister, usually known in history as the marquis of Pombal (ruled 1750-77), sharply suppressed the nobility and the
       Church (including the Inquisition, now a weak institution) and expelled the Jesuits. Pombal also made an effort to reduce economic dependence on England, Portugal's oldest ally. But his successes did not last much beyond his disputed time in office.
       Beginning in the late 18th century, the European-wide impact of the French Revolution and the rise of Napoleon placed Portugal in a vulnerable position. With the monarchy ineffectively led by an insane queen (Maria I) and her indecisive regent son (João VI), Portugal again became the focus of foreign ambition and aggression. With England unable to provide decisive assistance in time, France—with Spain's consent—invaded Portugal in 1807. As Napoleon's army under General Junot entered Lisbon meeting no resistance, Portugal's royal family fled on a British fleet to Brazil, where it remained in exile until 1821. In the meantime, Portugal's overseas empire was again under threat. There was a power vacuum as the monarch was absent, foreign armies were present, and new political notions of liberalism and constitutional monarchy were exciting various groups of citizens.
       Again England came to the rescue, this time in the form of the armies of the duke of Wellington. Three successive French invasions of Portugal were defeated and expelled, and Wellington succeeded in carrying the war against Napoleon across the Portuguese frontier into Spain. The presence of the English army, the new French-born liberal ideas, and the political vacuum combined to create revolutionary conditions. The French invasions and the peninsular wars, where Portuguese armed forces played a key role, marked the beginning of a new era in politics.
       Liberalism and Constitutional Monarchy, 1822-1910
       During 1807-22, foreign invasions, war, and civil strife over conflicting political ideas gravely damaged Portugal's commerce, economy, and novice industry. The next terrible blow was the loss of Brazil in 1822, the jewel in the imperial crown. Portugal's very independence seemed to be at risk. In vain, Portugal sought to resist Brazilian independence by force, but in 1825 it formally acknowledged Brazilian independence by treaty.
       Portugal's slow recovery from the destructive French invasions and the "war of independence" was complicated by civil strife over the form of constitutional monarchy that best suited Portugal. After struggles over these issues between 1820 and 1834, Portugal settled somewhat uncertainly into a moderate constitutional monarchy whose constitution (Charter of 1826) lent it strong political powers to exert a moderating influence between the executive and legislative branches of the government. It also featured a new upper middle class based on land ownership and commerce; a Catholic Church that, although still important, lived with reduced privileges and property; a largely African (third) empire to which Lisbon and Oporto devoted increasing spiritual and material resources, starting with the liberal imperial plans of 1836 and 1851, and continuing with the work of institutions like the Lisbon Society of Geography (established 1875); and a mass of rural peasants whose bonds to the land weakened after 1850 and who began to immigrate in increasing numbers to Brazil and North America.
       Chronic military intervention in national politics began in 19th-century Portugal. Such intervention, usually commencing with coups or pronunciamentos (military revolts), was a shortcut to the spoils of political office and could reflect popular discontent as well as the power of personalities. An early example of this was the 1817 golpe (coup) attempt of General Gomes Freire against British military rule in Portugal before the return of King João VI from Brazil. Except for a more stable period from 1851 to 1880, military intervention in politics, or the threat thereof, became a feature of the constitutional monarchy's political life, and it continued into the First Republic and the subsequent Estado Novo.
       Beginning with the Regeneration period (1851-80), Portugal experienced greater political stability and economic progress. Military intervention in politics virtually ceased; industrialization and construction of railroads, roads, and bridges proceeded; two political parties (Regenerators and Historicals) worked out a system of rotation in power; and leading intellectuals sparked a cultural revival in several fields. In 19th-century literature, there was a new golden age led by such figures as Alexandre Herculano (historian), Eça de Queirós (novelist), Almeida Garrett (playwright and essayist), Antero de Quental (poet), and Joaquim Oliveira Martins (historian and social scientist). In its third overseas empire, Portugal attempted to replace the slave trade and slavery with legitimate economic activities; to reform the administration; and to expand Portuguese holdings beyond coastal footholds deep into the African hinterlands in West, West Central, and East Africa. After 1841, to some extent, and especially after 1870, colonial affairs, combined with intense nationalism, pressures for economic profit in Africa, sentiment for national revival, and the drift of European affairs would make or break Lisbon governments.
       Beginning with the political crisis that arose out of the "English Ultimatum" affair of January 1890, the monarchy became discredtted and identified with the poorly functioning government, political parties splintered, and republicanism found more supporters. Portugal participated in the "Scramble for Africa," expanding its African holdings, but failed to annex territory connecting Angola and Mozambique. A growing foreign debt and state bankruptcy as of the early 1890s damaged the constitutional monarchy's reputation, despite the efforts of King Carlos in diplomacy, the renewal of the alliance in the Windsor Treaty of 1899, and the successful if bloody colonial wars in the empire (1880-97). Republicanism proclaimed that Portugal's weak economy and poor society were due to two historic institutions: the monarchy and the Catholic Church. A republic, its stalwarts claimed, would bring greater individual liberty; efficient, if more decentralized government; and a stronger colonial program while stripping the Church of its role in both society and education.
       As the monarchy lost support and republicans became more aggressive, violence increased in politics. King Carlos I and his heir Luís were murdered in Lisbon by anarchist-republicans on 1 February 1908. Following a military and civil insurrection and fighting between monarchist and republican forces, on 5 October 1910, King Manuel II fled Portugal and a republic was proclaimed.
       First Parliamentary Republic, 1910-26
       Portugal's first attempt at republican government was the most unstable, turbulent parliamentary republic in the history of 20th-century Western Europe. During a little under 16 years of the republic, there were 45 governments, a number of legislatures that did not complete normal terms, military coups, and only one president who completed his four-year term in office. Portuguese society was poorly prepared for this political experiment. Among the deadly legacies of the monarchy were a huge public debt; a largely rural, apolitical, and illiterate peasant population; conflict over the causes of the country's misfortunes; and lack of experience with a pluralist, democratic system.
       The republic had some talented leadership but lacked popular, institutional, and economic support. The 1911 republican constitution established only a limited democracy, as only a small portion of the adult male citizenry was eligible to vote. In a country where the majority was Catholic, the republic passed harshly anticlerical laws, and its institutions and supporters persecuted both the Church and its adherents. During its brief disjointed life, the First Republic drafted important reform plans in economic, social, and educational affairs; actively promoted development in the empire; and pursued a liberal, generous foreign policy. Following British requests for Portugal's assistance in World War I, Portugal entered the war on the Allied side in March 1916 and sent armies to Flanders and Portuguese Africa. Portugal's intervention in that conflict, however, was too costly in many respects, and the ultimate failure of the republic in part may be ascribed to Portugal's World War I activities.
       Unfortunately for the republic, its time coincided with new threats to Portugal's African possessions: World War I, social and political demands from various classes that could not be reconciled, excessive military intervention in politics, and, in particular, the worst economic and financial crisis Portugal had experienced since the 16th and 17th centuries. After the original Portuguese Republican Party (PRP, also known as the "Democrats") splintered into three warring groups in 1912, no true multiparty system emerged. The Democrats, except for only one or two elections, held an iron monopoly of electoral power, and political corruption became a major issue. As extreme right-wing dictatorships elsewhere in Europe began to take power in Italy (1922), neighboring Spain (1923), and Greece (1925), what scant popular support remained for the republic collapsed. Backed by a right-wing coalition of landowners from Alentejo, clergy, Coimbra University faculty and students, Catholic organizations, and big business, career military officers led by General Gomes da Costa executed a coup on 28 May 1926, turned out the last republican government, and established a military government.
       The Estado Novo (New State), 1926-74
       During the military phase (1926-32) of the Estado Novo, professional military officers, largely from the army, governed and administered Portugal and held key cabinet posts, but soon discovered that the military possessed no magic formula that could readily solve the problems inherited from the First Republic. Especially during the years 1926-31, the military dictatorship, even with its political repression of republican activities and institutions (military censorship of the press, political police action, and closure of the republic's rowdy parliament), was characterized by similar weaknesses: personalism and factionalism; military coups and political instability, including civil strife and loss of life; state debt and bankruptcy; and a weak economy. "Barracks parliamentarism" was not an acceptable alternative even to the "Nightmare Republic."
       Led by General Óscar Carmona, who had replaced and sent into exile General Gomes da Costa, the military dictatorship turned to a civilian expert in finance and economics to break the budget impasse and bring coherence to the disorganized system. Appointed minister of finance on 27 April 1928, the Coimbra University Law School professor of economics Antônio de Oliveira Salazar (1889-1970) first reformed finance, helped balance the budget, and then turned to other concerns as he garnered extraordinary governing powers. In 1930, he was appointed interim head of another key ministry (Colonies) and within a few years had become, in effect, a civilian dictator who, with the military hierarchy's support, provided the government with coherence, a program, and a set of policies.
       For nearly 40 years after he was appointed the first civilian prime minister in 1932, Salazar's personality dominated the government. Unlike extreme right-wing dictators elsewhere in Europe, Salazar was directly appointed by the army but was never endorsed by a popular political party, street militia, or voter base. The scholarly, reclusive former Coimbra University professor built up what became known after 1932 as the Estado Novo ("New State"), which at the time of its overthrow by another military coup in 1974, was the longest surviving authoritarian regime in Western Europe. The system of Salazar and the largely academic and technocratic ruling group he gathered in his cabinets was based on the central bureaucracy of the state, which was supported by the president of the republic—always a senior career military officer, General Óscar Carmona (1928-51), General Craveiro Lopes (1951-58), and Admiral Américo Tómaz (1958-74)—and the complicity of various institutions. These included a rubber-stamp legislature called the National Assembly (1935-74) and a political police known under various names: PVDE (1932-45), PIDE (1945-69),
       and DGS (1969-74). Other defenders of the Estado Novo security were paramilitary organizations such as the National Republican Guard (GNR); the Portuguese Legion (PL); and the Portuguese Youth [Movement]. In addition to censorship of the media, theater, and books, there was political repression and a deliberate policy of depoliticization. All political parties except for the approved movement of regime loyalists, the União Nacional or (National Union), were banned.
       The most vigorous and more popular period of the New State was 1932-44, when the basic structures were established. Never monolithic or entirely the work of one person (Salazar), the New State was constructed with the assistance of several dozen top associates who were mainly academics from law schools, some technocrats with specialized skills, and a handful of trusted career military officers. The 1933 Constitution declared Portugal to be a "unitary, corporative Republic," and pressures to restore the monarchy were resisted. Although some of the regime's followers were fascists and pseudofascists, many more were conservative Catholics, integralists, nationalists, and monarchists of different varieties, and even some reactionary republicans. If the New State was authoritarian, it was not totalitarian and, unlike fascism in Benito Mussolini's Italy or Adolf Hitler's Germany, it usually employed the minimum of violence necessary to defeat what remained a largely fractious, incoherent opposition.
       With the tumultuous Second Republic and the subsequent civil war in nearby Spain, the regime felt threatened and reinforced its defenses. During what Salazar rightly perceived as a time of foreign policy crisis for Portugal (1936-45), he assumed control of the Ministry of Foreign Affairs. From there, he pursued four basic foreign policy objectives: supporting the Nationalist rebels of General Francisco Franco in the Spanish Civil War (1936-39) and concluding defense treaties with a triumphant Franco; ensuring that General Franco in an exhausted Spain did not enter World War II on the Axis side; maintaining Portuguese neutrality in World War II with a post-1942 tilt toward the Allies, including granting Britain and the United States use of bases in the Azores Islands; and preserving and protecting Portugal's Atlantic Islands and its extensive, if poor, overseas empire in Africa and Asia.
       During the middle years of the New State (1944-58), many key Salazar associates in government either died or resigned, and there was greater social unrest in the form of unprecedented strikes and clandestine Communist activities, intensified opposition, and new threatening international pressures on Portugal's overseas empire. During the earlier phase of the Cold War (1947-60), Portugal became a steadfast, if weak, member of the US-dominated North Atlantic Treaty Organization alliance and, in 1955, with American support, Portugal joined the United Nations (UN). Colonial affairs remained a central concern of the regime. As of 1939, Portugal was the third largest colonial power in the world and possessed territories in tropical Africa (Angola, Mozambique, Guinea-Bissau, and São Tomé and Príncipe Islands) and the remnants of its 16th-century empire in Asia (Goa, Damão, Diu, East Timor, and Macau). Beginning in the early 1950s, following the independence of India in 1947, Portugal resisted Indian pressures to decolonize Portuguese India and used police forces to discourage internal opposition in its Asian and African colonies.
       The later years of the New State (1958-68) witnessed the aging of the increasingly isolated but feared Salazar and new threats both at home and overseas. Although the regime easily overcame the brief oppositionist threat from rival presidential candidate General Humberto Delgado in the spring of 1958, new developments in the African and Asian empires imperiled the authoritarian system. In February 1961, oppositionists hijacked the Portuguese ocean liner Santa Maria and, in following weeks, African insurgents in northern Angola, although they failed to expel the Portuguese, gained worldwide media attention, discredited the New State, and began the 13-year colonial war. After thwarting a dissident military coup against his continued leadership, Salazar and his ruling group mobilized military repression in Angola and attempted to develop the African colonies at a faster pace in order to ensure Portuguese control. Meanwhile, the other European colonial powers (Britain, France, Belgium, and Spain) rapidly granted political independence to their African territories.
       At the time of Salazar's removal from power in September 1968, following a stroke, Portugal's efforts to maintain control over its colonies appeared to be successful. President Americo Tomás appointed Dr. Marcello Caetano as Salazar's successor as prime minister. While maintaining the New State's basic structures, and continuing the regime's essential colonial policy, Caetano attempted wider reforms in colonial administration and some devolution of power from Lisbon, as well as more freedom of expression in Lisbon. Still, a great deal of the budget was devoted to supporting the wars against the insurgencies in Africa. Meanwhile in Asia, Portuguese India had fallen when the Indian army invaded in December 1961. The loss of Goa was a psychological blow to the leadership of the New State, and of the Asian empire only East Timor and Macau remained.
       The Caetano years (1968-74) were but a hiatus between the waning Salazar era and a new regime. There was greater political freedom and rapid economic growth (5-6 percent annually to late 1973), but Caetano's government was unable to reform the old system thoroughly and refused to consider new methods either at home or in the empire. In the end, regime change came from junior officers of the professional military who organized the Armed Forces Movement (MFA) against the Caetano government. It was this group of several hundred officers, mainly in the army and navy, which engineered a largely bloodless coup in Lisbon on 25 April 1974. Their unexpected action brought down the 48-year-old New State and made possible the eventual establishment and consolidation of democratic governance in Portugal, as well as a reorientation of the country away from the Atlantic toward Europe.
       Revolution of Carnations, 1974-76
       Following successful military operations of the Armed Forces Movement against the Caetano government, Portugal experienced what became known as the "Revolution of Carnations." It so happened that during the rainy week of the military golpe, Lisbon flower shops were featuring carnations, and the revolutionaries and their supporters adopted the red carnation as the common symbol of the event, as well as of the new freedom from dictatorship. The MFA, whose leaders at first were mostly little-known majors and captains, proclaimed a three-fold program of change for the new Portugal: democracy; decolonization of the overseas empire, after ending the colonial wars; and developing a backward economy in the spirit of opportunity and equality. During the first 24 months after the coup, there was civil strife, some anarchy, and a power struggle. With the passing of the Estado Novo, public euphoria burst forth as the new provisional military government proclaimed the freedoms of speech, press, and assembly, and abolished censorship, the political police, the Portuguese Legion, Portuguese Youth, and other New State organizations, including the National Union. Scores of political parties were born and joined the senior political party, the Portuguese Community Party (PCP), and the Socialist Party (PS), founded shortly before the coup.
       Portugal's Revolution of Carnations went through several phases. There was an attempt to take control by radical leftists, including the PCP and its allies. This was thwarted by moderate officers in the army, as well as by the efforts of two political parties: the PS and the Social Democrats (PPD, later PSD). The first phase was from April to September 1974. Provisional president General Antonio Spínola, whose 1974 book Portugal and the Future had helped prepare public opinion for the coup, met irresistible leftist pressures. After Spinola's efforts to avoid rapid decolonization of the African empire failed, he resigned in September 1974. During the second phase, from September 1974 to March 1975, radical military officers gained control, but a coup attempt by General Spínola and his supporters in Lisbon in March 1975 failed and Spínola fled to Spain.
       In the third phase of the Revolution, March-November 1975, a strong leftist reaction followed. Farm workers occupied and "nationalized" 1.1 million hectares of farmland in the Alentejo province, and radical military officers in the provisional government ordered the nationalization of Portuguese banks (foreign banks were exempted), utilities, and major industries, or about 60 percent of the economic system. There were power struggles among various political parties — a total of 50 emerged—and in the streets there was civil strife among labor, military, and law enforcement groups. A constituent assembly, elected on 25 April 1975, in Portugal's first free elections since 1926, drafted a democratic constitution. The Council of the Revolution (CR), briefly a revolutionary military watchdog committee, was entrenched as part of the government under the constitution, until a later revision. During the chaotic year of 1975, about 30 persons were killed in political frays while unstable provisional governments came and went. On 25 November 1975, moderate military forces led by Colonel Ramalho Eanes, who later was twice elected president of the republic (1976 and 1981), defeated radical, leftist military groups' revolutionary conspiracies.
       In the meantime, Portugal's scattered overseas empire experienced a precipitous and unprepared decolonization. One by one, the former colonies were granted and accepted independence—Guinea-Bissau (September 1974), Cape Verde Islands (July 1975), and Mozambique (July 1975). Portugal offered to turn over Macau to the People's Republic of China, but the offer was refused then and later negotiations led to the establishment of a formal decolonization or hand-over date of 1999. But in two former colonies, the process of decolonization had tragic results.
       In Angola, decolonization negotiations were greatly complicated by the fact that there were three rival nationalist movements in a struggle for power. The January 1975 Alvor Agreement signed by Portugal and these three parties was not effectively implemented. A bloody civil war broke out in Angola in the spring of 1975 and, when Portuguese armed forces withdrew and declared that Angola was independent on 11 November 1975, the bloodshed only increased. Meanwhile, most of the white Portuguese settlers from Angola and Mozambique fled during the course of 1975. Together with African refugees, more than 600,000 of these retornados ("returned ones") went by ship and air to Portugal and thousands more to Namibia, South Africa, Brazil, Canada, and the United States.
       The second major decolonization disaster was in Portugal's colony of East Timor in the Indonesian archipelago. Portugal's capacity to supervise and control a peaceful transition to independence in this isolated, neglected colony was limited by the strength of giant Indonesia, distance from Lisbon, and Portugal's revolutionary disorder and inability to defend Timor. In early December 1975, before Portugal granted formal independence and as one party, FRETILIN, unilaterally declared East Timor's independence, Indonesia's armed forces invaded, conquered, and annexed East Timor. Indonesian occupation encountered East Timorese resistance, and a heavy loss of life followed. The East Timor question remained a contentious international issue in the UN, as well as in Lisbon and Jakarta, for more than 20 years following Indonesia's invasion and annexation of the former colony of Portugal. Major changes occurred, beginning in 1998, after Indonesia underwent a political revolution and allowed a referendum in East Timor to decide that territory's political future in August 1999. Most East Timorese chose independence, but Indonesian forces resisted that verdict until
       UN intervention in September 1999. Following UN rule for several years, East Timor attained full independence on 20 May 2002.
       Consolidation of Democracy, 1976-2000
       After several free elections and record voter turnouts between 25 April 1975 and June 1976, civil war was averted and Portugal's second democratic republic began to stabilize. The MFA was dissolved, the military were returned to the barracks, and increasingly elected civilians took over the government of the country. The 1976 Constitution was revised several times beginning in 1982 and 1989, in order to reempha-size the principle of free enterprise in the economy while much of the large, nationalized sector was privatized. In June 1976, General Ram-alho Eanes was elected the first constitutional president of the republic (five-year term), and he appointed socialist leader Dr. Mário Soares as prime minister of the first constitutional government.
       From 1976 to 1985, Portugal's new system featured a weak economy and finances, labor unrest, and administrative and political instability. The difficult consolidation of democratic governance was eased in part by the strong currency and gold reserves inherited from the Estado Novo, but Lisbon seemed unable to cope with high unemployment, new debt, the complex impact of the refugees from Africa, world recession, and the agitation of political parties. Four major parties emerged from the maelstrom of 1974-75, except for the Communist Party, all newly founded. They were, from left to right, the Communists (PCP); the Socialists (PS), who managed to dominate governments and the legislature but not win a majority in the Assembly of the Republic; the Social Democrats (PSD); and the Christian Democrats (CDS). During this period, the annual growth rate was low (l-2 percent), and the nationalized sector of the economy stagnated.
       Enhanced economic growth, greater political stability, and more effective central government as of 1985, and especially 1987, were due to several developments. In 1977, Portugal applied for membership in the European Economic Community (EEC), now the European Union (EU) since 1993. In January 1986, with Spain, Portugal was granted membership, and economic and financial progress in the intervening years has been significantly influenced by the comparatively large investment, loans, technology, advice, and other assistance from the EEC. Low unemployment, high annual growth rates (5 percent), and moderate inflation have also been induced by the new political and administrative stability in Lisbon. Led by Prime Minister Cavaco Silva, an economist who was trained abroad, the PSD's strong organization, management, and electoral support since 1985 have assisted in encouraging economic recovery and development. In 1985, the PSD turned the PS out of office and won the general election, although they did not have an absolute majority of assembly seats. In 1986, Mário Soares was elected president of the republic, the first civilian to hold that office since the First Republic. In the elections of 1987 and 1991, however, the PSD was returned to power with clear majorities of over 50 percent of the vote.
       Although the PSD received 50.4 percent of the vote in the 1991 parliamentary elections and held a 42-seat majority in the Assembly of the Republic, the party began to lose public support following media revelations regarding corruption and complaints about Prime Minister Cavaco Silva's perceived arrogant leadership style. President Mário Soares voiced criticism of the PSD's seemingly untouchable majority and described a "tyranny of the majority." Economic growth slowed down. In the parliamentary elections of 1995 and the presidential election of 1996, the PSD's dominance ended for the time being. Prime Minister Antônio Guterres came to office when the PS won the October 1995 elections, and in the subsequent presidential contest, in January 1996, socialist Jorge Sampaio, the former mayor of Lisbon, was elected president of the republic, thus defeating Cavaco Silva's bid. Young and popular, Guterres moved the PS toward the center of the political spectrum. Under Guterres, the PS won the October 1999 parliamentary elections. The PS defeated the PSD but did not manage to win a clear, working majority of seats, and this made the PS dependent upon alliances with smaller parties, including the PCP.
       In the local elections in December 2001, the PSD's criticism of PS's heavy public spending allowed the PSD to take control of the key cities of Lisbon, Oporto, and Coimbra. Guterres resigned, and parliamentary elections were brought forward from 2004 to March 2002. The PSD won a narrow victory with 40 percent of the votes, and Jose Durão Barroso became prime minister. Having failed to win a majority of the seats in parliament forced the PSD to govern in coalition with the right-wing Popular Party (PP) led by Paulo Portas. Durão Barroso set about reducing government spending by cutting the budgets of local authorities, freezing civil service hiring, and reviving the economy by accelerating privatization of state-owned enterprises. These measures provoked a 24-hour strike by public-sector workers. Durão Barroso reacted with vows to press ahead with budget-cutting measures and imposed a wage freeze on all employees earning more than €1,000, which affected more than one-half of Portugal's work force.
       In June 2004, Durão Barroso was invited by Romano Prodi to succeed him as president of the European Commission. Durão Barroso accepted and resigned the prime ministership in July. Pedro Santana Lopes, the leader of the PSD, became prime minister. Already unpopular at the time of Durão Barroso's resignation, the PSD-led government became increasingly unpopular under Santana Lopes. A month-long delay in the start of the school year and confusion over his plan to cut taxes and raise public-sector salaries, eroded confidence even more. By November, Santana Lopes's government was so unpopular that President Jorge Sampaio was obliged to dissolve parliament and hold new elections, two years ahead of schedule.
       Parliamentary elections were held on 20 February 2005. The PS, which had promised the electorate disciplined and transparent governance, educational reform, the alleviation of poverty, and a boost in employment, won 45 percent of the vote and the majority of the seats in parliament. The leader of the PS, José Sôcrates became prime minister on 12 March 2005. In the regularly scheduled presidential elections held on 6 January 2006, the former leader of the PSD and prime minister, Aníbal Cavaco Silva, won a narrow victory and became president on 9 March 2006. With a mass protest, public teachers' strike, and street demonstrations in March 2008, Portugal's media, educational, and social systems experienced more severe pressures. With the spreading global recession beginning in September 2008, Portugal's economic and financial systems became more troubled.
       Owing to its geographic location on the southwestern most edge of continental Europe, Portugal has been historically in but not of Europe. Almost from the beginning of its existence in the 12th century as an independent monarchy, Portugal turned its back on Europe and oriented itself toward the Atlantic Ocean. After carving out a Christian kingdom on the western portion of the Iberian peninsula, Portuguese kings gradually built and maintained a vast seaborne global empire that became central to the way Portugal understood its individuality as a nation-state. While the creation of this empire allows Portugal to claim an unusual number of "firsts" or distinctions in world and Western history, it also retarded Portugal's economic, social, and political development. It can be reasonably argued that the Revolution of 25 April 1974 was the most decisive event in Portugal's long history because it finally ended Portugal's oceanic mission and view of itself as an imperial power. After the 1974 Revolution, Portugal turned away from its global mission and vigorously reoriented itself toward Europe. Contemporary Portugal is now both in and of Europe.
       The turn toward Europe began immediately after 25 April 1974. Portugal granted independence to its African colonies in 1975. It was admitted to the European Council and took the first steps toward accession to the European Economic Community (EEC) in 1976. On 28 March 1977, the Portuguese government officially applied for EEC membership. Because of Portugal's economic and social backwardness, which would require vast sums of EEC money to overcome, negotiations for membership were long and difficult. Finally, a treaty of accession was signed on 12 June 1985. Portugal officially joined the EEC (the European Union [EU] since 1993) on 1 January 1986. Since becoming a full-fledged member of the EU, Portugal has been steadily overcoming the economic and social underdevelopment caused by its imperial past and is becoming more like the rest of Europe.
       Membership in the EU has speeded up the structural transformation of Portugal's economy, which actually began during the Estado Novo. Investments made by the Estado Novo in Portugal's economy began to shift employment out of the agricultural sector, which, in 1950, accounted for 50 percent of Portugal's economically active population. Today, only 10 percent of the economically active population is employed in the agricultural sector (the highest among EU member states); 30 percent in the industrial sector (also the highest among EU member states); and 60 percent in the service sector (the lowest among EU member states). The economically active population numbers about 5,000,000 employed, 56 percent of whom are women. Women workers are the majority of the workforce in the agricultural and service sectors (the highest among the EU member states). The expansion of the service sector has been primarily in health care and education. Portugal has had the lowest unemployment rates among EU member states, with the overall rate never being more than 10 percent of the active population. Since joining the EU, the number of employers increased from 2.6 percent to 5.8 percent of the active population; self-employed from 16 to 19 percent; and employees from 65 to 70 percent. Twenty-six percent of the employers are women. Unemployment tends to hit younger workers in industry and transportation, women employed in domestic service, workers on short-term contracts, and poorly educated workers. Salaried workers earn only 63 percent of the EU average, and hourly workers only one-third to one-half of that earned by their EU counterparts. Despite having had the second highest growth of gross national product (GNP) per inhabitant (after Ireland) among EU member states, the above data suggest that while much has been accomplished in terms of modernizing the Portuguese economy, much remains to be done to bring Portugal's economy up to the level of the "average" EU member state.
       Membership in the EU has also speeded up changes in Portuguese society. Over the last 30 years, coastalization and urbanization have intensified. Fully 50 percent of Portuguese live in the coastal urban conurbations of Lisbon, Oporto, Braga, Aveiro, Coimbra, Viseu, Évora, and Faro. The Portuguese population is one of the oldest among EU member states (17.3 percent are 65 years of age or older) thanks to a considerable increase in life expectancy at birth (77.87 years for the total population, 74.6 years for men, 81.36 years for women) and one of the lowest birthrates (10.59 births/1,000) in Europe. Family size averages 2.8 persons per household, with the strict nuclear family (one or two generations) in which both parents work being typical. Common law marriages, cohabitating couples, and single-parent households are more and more common. The divorce rate has also increased. "Youth Culture" has developed. The young have their own meeting places, leisure-time activities, and nightlife (bars, clubs, and discos).
       All Portuguese citizens, whether they have contributed or not, have a right to an old-age pension, invalidity benefits, widowed persons' pension, as well as payments for disabilities, children, unemployment, and large families. There is a national minimum wage (€385 per month), which is low by EU standards. The rapid aging of Portugal's population has changed the ratio of contributors to pensioners to 1.7, the lowest in the EU. This has created deficits in Portugal's social security fund.
       The adult literacy rate is about 92 percent. Illiteracy is still found among the elderly. Although universal compulsory education up to grade 9 was achieved in 1980, only 21.2 percent of the population aged 25-64 had undergone secondary education, compared to an EU average of 65.7 percent. Portugal's higher education system currently consists of 14 state universities and 14 private universities, 15 state polytechnic institutions, one Catholic university, and one military academy. All in all, Portugal spends a greater percentage of its state budget on education than most EU member states. Despite this high level of expenditure, the troubled Portuguese education system does not perform well. Early leaving and repetition rates are among the highest among EU member states.
       After the Revolution of 25 April 1974, Portugal created a National Health Service, which today consists of 221 hospitals and 512 medical centers employing 33,751 doctors and 41,799 nurses. Like its education system, Portugal's medical system is inefficient. There are long waiting lists for appointments with specialists and for surgical procedures.
       Structural changes in Portugal's economy and society mean that social life in Portugal is not too different from that in other EU member states. A mass consumption society has been created. Televisions, telephones, refrigerators, cars, music equipment, mobile phones, and personal computers are commonplace. Sixty percent of Portuguese households possess at least one automobile, and 65 percent of Portuguese own their own home. Portuguese citizens are more aware of their legal rights than ever before. This has resulted in a trebling of the number of legal proceeding since 1960 and an eight-fold increase in the number of lawyers. In general, Portuguese society has become more permissive and secular; the Catholic Church and the armed forces are much less influential than in the past. Portugal's population is also much more culturally, religiously, and ethnically diverse, a consequence of the coming to Portugal of hundreds of thousands of immigrants, mainly from former African colonies.
       Portuguese are becoming more cosmopolitan and sophisticated through the impact of world media, the Internet, and the World Wide Web. A prime case in point came in the summer and early fall of 1999, with the extraordinary events in East Timor and the massive Portuguese popular responses. An internationally monitored referendum in East Timor, Portugal's former colony in the Indonesian archipelago and under Indonesian occupation from late 1975 to summer 1999, resulted in a vote of 78.5 percent for rejecting integration with Indonesia and for independence. When Indonesian prointegration gangs, aided by the Indonesian military, responded to the referendum with widespread brutality and threatened to reverse the verdict of the referendum, there was a spontaneous popular outpouring of protest in the cities and towns of Portugal. An avalanche of Portuguese e-mail fell on leaders and groups in the UN and in certain countries around the world as Portugal's diplomats, perhaps to compensate for the weak initial response to Indonesian armed aggression in 1975, called for the protection of East Timor as an independent state and for UN intervention to thwart Indonesian action. Using global communications networks, the Portuguese were able to mobilize UN and world public opinion against Indonesian actions and aided the eventual independence of East Timor on 20 May 2002.
       From the Revolution of 25 April 1974 until the 1990s, Portugal had a large number of political parties, one of the largest Communist parties in western Europe, frequent elections, and endemic cabinet instability. Since the 1990s, the number of political parties has been dramatically reduced and cabinet stability increased. Gradually, the Portuguese electorate has concentrated around two larger parties, the right-of-center Social Democrats (PSD) and the left-of-center Socialist (PS). In the 1980s, these two parties together garnered 65 percent of the vote and 70 percent of the seats in parliament. In 2005, these percentages had risen to 74 percent and 85 percent, respectively. In effect, Portugal is currently a two-party dominant system in which the two largest parties — PS and PSD—alternate in and out of power, not unlike the rotation of the two main political parties (the Regenerators and the Historicals) during the last decades (1850s to 1880s) of the liberal constitutional monarchy. As Portugal's democracy has consolidated, turnout rates for the eligible electorate have declined. In the 1970s, turnout was 85 percent. In Portugal's most recent parliamentary election (2005), turnout had fallen to 65 percent of the eligible electorate.
       Portugal has benefited greatly from membership in the EU, and whatever doubts remain about the price paid for membership, no Portuguese government in the near future can afford to sever this connection. The vast majority of Portuguese citizens see membership in the EU as a "good thing" and strongly believe that Portugal has benefited from membership. Only the Communist Party opposed membership because it reduces national sovereignty, serves the interests of capitalists not workers, and suffers from a democratic deficit. Despite the high level of support for the EU, Portuguese voters are increasingly not voting in elections for the European Parliament, however. Turnout for European Parliament elections fell from 40 percent of the eligible electorate in the 1999 elections to 38 percent in the 2004 elections.
       In sum, Portugal's turn toward Europe has done much to overcome its backwardness. However, despite the economic, social, and political progress made since 1986, Portugal has a long way to go before it can claim to be on a par with the level found even in Spain, much less the rest of western Europe. As Portugal struggles to move from underde-velopment, especially in the rural areas away from the coast, it must keep in mind the perils of too rapid modern development, which could damage two of its most precious assets: its scenery and environment. The growth and future prosperity of the economy will depend on the degree to which the government and the private sector will remain stewards of clean air, soil, water, and other finite resources on which the tourism industry depends and on which Portugal's world image as a unique place to visit rests. Currently, Portugal is investing heavily in renewable energy from solar, wind, and wave power in order to account for about 50 percent of its electricity needs by 2010. Portugal opened the world's largest solar power plant and the world's first commercial wave power farm in 2006.
       An American documentary film on Portugal produced in the 1970s described this little country as having "a Past in Search of a Future." In the years after the Revolution of 25 April 1974, it could be said that Portugal is now living in "a Present in Search of a Future." Increasingly, that future lies in Europe as an active and productive member of the EU.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Historical Portugal

  • 4 turn

    tə:n
    1. verb
    1) (to (make something) move or go round; to revolve: The wheels turned; He turned the handle.) girar
    2) (to face or go in another direction: He turned and walked away; She turned towards him.) dar media vuelta, girarse
    3) (to change direction: The road turned to the left.) girar
    4) (to direct; to aim or point: He turned his attention to his work.) dirigir; desviar
    5) (to go round: They turned the corner.) doblar
    6) (to (cause something to) become or change to: You can't turn lead into gold; At what temperature does water turn into ice?) volverse, convertirse, transformarse
    7) (to (cause to) change colour to: Her hair turned white; The shock turned his hair white.) volverse

    2. noun
    1) (an act of turning: He gave the handle a turn.) giro
    2) (a winding or coil: There are eighty turns of wire on this aerial.) vuelta
    3) ((also turning) a point where one can change direction, eg where one road joins another: Take the third turn(ing) on/to the left.) curva, recodo
    4) (one's chance or duty (to do, have etc something shared by several people): It's your turn to choose a record; You'll have to wait your turn in the bathroom.) turno
    5) (one of a series of short circus or variety acts, or the person or persons who perform it: The show opened with a comedy turn.) número
    •
    - turnover
    - turnstile
    - turntable
    - turn-up
    - by turns
    - do someone a good turn
    - do a good turn
    - in turn
    - by turns
    - out of turn
    - speak out of turn
    - take a turn for the better
    - worse
    - take turns
    - turn a blind eye
    - turn against
    - turn away
    - turn back
    - turn down
    - turn in
    - turn loose
    - turn off
    - turn on
    - turn out
    - turn over
    - turn up
    turn1 n
    1. turno
    2. calle
    turn2 vb
    1. girar / dar vueltas
    2. girar / torcer
    turn right at the traffic lights en el semáforo, gira a la derecha
    3. dar la vuelta
    4. pasar / volver
    5. volverse / darse la vuelta
    6. volverse / ponerse
    tr[tɜːn]
    2 (change of direction) giro, vuelta; (bend) curva, recodo
    3 (chance, go) turno
    ■ whose turn is it? ¿a quién le toca?
    4 (change) cambio, giro
    5 (short walk) vuelta, paseo
    7 (act of kindness, favour) favor nombre masculino
    8 SMALLTHEATRE/SMALL (act) número
    1 (rotate) girar, hacer girar, dar la vuelta a
    2 (page) pasar, volver; (soil) revolver; (ankle) torcer
    3 (cause to change direction) girar, dar la vuelta a
    ■ about turn! ¡media vuelta!
    4 (invert) darle la vuelta a
    5 (change) convertir, transformar, volver; (milk) agriar; (stomach) revolver
    ■ it turned her into a different person la convirtió en una persona diferente, la convirtió en otra persona
    6 (pass) pasar
    ■ it's turned twelve pasan de las doce, son más de las doce, son las doce pasadas
    7 (fold) doblar
    8 (shape) tornear, labrar en un torno
    1 (revolve) girar, dar vueltas
    2 (change direction - person) girarse, dar la vuelta, volverse; (- car) girar, torcer; (- plane, ship) virar; (- tide) repuntar
    3 (become) hacerse, ponerse, volverse; (milk) agriarse, cortarse
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    at every turn a cada paso, a cada momento
    by turns / in turns por turnos, sucesivamente
    in turn a su vez, por su parte
    on the turn a punto de cambiar
    one good turn deserves another favor con favor se paga
    out of turn fuera de lugar
    to be badly turned out ir mal vestido,-a
    to be done to a turn / be cooked to a turn estar en su punto
    to be well turned out ir bien vestido,-a
    to do somebody a good turn hacerle un favor a alguien
    to do somebody a bad turn hacer un mala pasada a alguien
    to turn free dejar en libertad, soltar
    to turn somebody's head afectar mucho a alguien
    ■ they turned the house inside out, but they couldn't find it revolvieron toda la casa, pero no lo encontraron
    turn of phrase manera de expresarse
    turn of the screw vuelta del tornillo
    turn ['tərn] vt
    1) : girar, voltear, volver
    to turn one's head: voltear la cabeza
    she turned her chair toward the fire: giró su asiento hacia la hoguera
    2) rotate: darle vuelta a, hacer girar
    turn the handle: dale vuelta a la manivela
    3) sprain, wrench: dislocar, torcer
    4) upset: revolver (el estómago)
    5) transform: convertir
    to turn water into wine: convertir el agua en vino
    6) shape: tornear (en carpintería)
    turn vi
    1) rotate: girar, dar vueltas
    2) : girar, doblar, dar una vuelta
    turn left: doble a la izquierda
    to turn around: dar la media vuelta
    3) become: hacerse, volverse, ponerse
    4) sour: agriarse, cortarse (dícese de la leche)
    5)
    to turn to : recurrir a
    they have no one to turn to: no tienen quien les ayude
    turn n
    1) : vuelta f, giro m
    a sudden turn: una vuelta repentina
    2) change: cambio m
    3) curve: curva f (en un camino)
    4) : turno m
    they're awaiting their turn: están esperando su turno
    whose turn is it?: ¿a quién le toca?
    v.
    • tornear v. (sth.) up
    expr.
    • descubrir (algo) v.
    v.
    • cambiar v.
    • dar vueltas a v.
    • doblar v.
    • girar v.
    • recurrir v.
    • torcer v.
    • tornar v.
    • virar v.
    • volver v.
    n.
    • cambio s.m.
    • curva s.f.
    • giro s.m.
    • lance s.m.
    • recodo s.m.
    • retortero s.m.
    • revuelto s.m.
    • sesgo s.m.
    • torneado s.m.
    • torno s.m.
    • turno s.m.
    • vez s.f.
    • viraje s.m.
    • vuelta s.f.
    tɜːrn, tɜːn
    I
    1)
    a) ( rotation) vuelta f

    to a turn: the meat was done to a turn — la carne estaba hecha a la perfección, la carne estaba en su punto justo

    b) ( change of direction) vuelta f, giro m

    no left turn — prohibido girar or doblar or torcer a la izquierda

    c) ( bend) curva f; ( turning)

    take the next left/right turn — tome or (esp Esp) coja or (esp AmL) agarre la próxima a la izquierda/derecha

    at every turn — a cada paso, a cada momento

    d) (change, alteration)

    to take a turn for the better — empezar* a mejorar

    to take a turn for the worse — empeorar, ponerse* peor

    to be on the turn — \<\<events/tide\>\> estar* cambiando; \<\<leaves\>\> estar* cambiando de color; \<\<milk/food\>\> (BrE) estar* echándose a perder

    2)

    whose turn is it? — ¿a quién le toca?

    to take turns o to take it in turn(s) — turnarse

    we'll take turns o we'll take it in turn(s) to do the cooking — nos vamos a turnar para cocinar, vamos a cocinar por turnos

    in turn: each in turn was asked the same question a cada uno de ellos se le hizo la misma pregunta; out of turn: she realized she'd spoken out of turn — se dio cuenta de que su comentario (or interrupción etc) había estado fuera de lugar

    3) ( service)

    to do somebody a good turn — hacerle* un favor a alguien

    4) (form, style)

    she has a logical/practical turn of mind — es muy lógica/práctica

    5)
    a) (bout of illness, disability)
    b) ( nervous shock) susto m
    6) ( act) (esp BrE) número m

    II
    1.
    1)
    a) ( rotate) \<\<knob/handle/wheel\>\> (hacer*) girar
    b) (set, regulate)

    to turn something to something: turn the knob to `hot' ponga el indicador en `caliente'; he turned the oven to a lower temperature — bajó la temperatura del horno

    2)
    a) (change position, direction of) \<\<head\>\> volver*, voltear (AmL exc RPl)

    she turned her back on them — les volvió or les dio la espalda, les volteó la espalda (AmL exc RPl)

    can you turn the TV this way a bit? — ¿puedes poner el televisor más para este lado?

    b) (direct, apply)

    to turn something to something: I turned my mind to more pleasant thoughts me puse a pensar en cosas más agradables; the administration has turned its efforts to... la administración ha dirigido sus esfuerzos a...; they turned the situation to their own profit — utilizaron la situación para su propio provecho; advantage b)

    3)
    a) ( reverse) \<\<mattress/omelette\>\> darle* la vuelta a, voltear (AmL exc CS), dar* vuelta (CS); \<\<page\>\> pasar, volver*, dar* vuelta (CS); \<\<soil\>\> remover*, voltear (AmL exc CS), dar* vuelta (CS)

    he turned the card face down — puso or volvió la carta boca abajo

    b) ( upset)
    4)
    a) ( go around) \<\<corner\>\> dar* la vuelta a, dar* vuelta (CS)
    b) ( pass)
    5) ( send)

    I couldn't simply turn him from my door — no le podía negar ayuda, no le podía volver la espalda; loose I 2)

    6)
    a) (change, transform) volver*

    to turn something to/into something — transformar or convertir* algo en algo

    they've turned the place into a pigsty! — han puesto la casa (or la habitación etc) como una pocilga!

    b) ( make sour) \<\<milk\>\> agriar
    c) ( confuse) \<\<mind\>\> trastornar
    7)
    a) ( shape - on lathe) tornear; (- on potter's wheel) hacer*
    b) ( formulate)
    8) ( make) \<\<profit\>\> sacar*

    2.
    vi
    1) ( rotate) \<\<handle/wheel\>\> girar, dar* vuelta(s)
    2)
    a) ( to face in different direction) \<\<person\>\> volverse*, darse* la vuelta, voltearse (AmL exc CS), darse* vuelta (CS); \<\<car\>\> dar* la vuelta, dar* vuelta (CS)

    she turned to me with a smile — me miró sonriéndome, se volvió hacia mí con una sonrisa

    he turned onto his side — se volvió or se puso de lado

    left/right turn! — (BrE Mil) media vuelta a la izquierda/derecha!

    b) (change course, direction)

    the army then turned north — entonces el ejército cambió de rumbo, dirigiéndose al norte

    to turn left/right — girar or doblar or torcer* a la izquierda/derecha

    c) ( curve) \<\<road/river\>\> torcer*
    3)
    a) ( focus on)

    to turn to another subject — pasar a otro tema, cambiar de tema

    b) (resort, have recourse to)

    to turn to violence/a friend — recurrir a la violencia/un amigo

    to turn to drink — darse* a la bebida

    to turn to somebody/something for something: she turned to her parents for support recurrió or acudió a sus padres en busca de apoyo; he turned to nature for inspiration — buscó inspiración en la naturaleza

    4)
    a) ( become)

    Ed Wright, naturalist turned politician — Ed Wright, naturalista convertido en or vuelto político

    to turn into something — convertirse* en algo

    water turns into steam — el agua se convierte or se transforma en vapor

    to turn to something — (liter) convertirse* en algo

    c) ( change) \<\<luck/weather/tide\>\> cambiar
    d) ( change color) \<\<leaves\>\> cambiar de color
    e) ( go sour) \<\<milk\>\> agriarse

    turn to page 19 — abran el libro en la página 19, vayan a la página 19

    6) (AmE Busn) \<\<merchandise\>\> venderse
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:
    [tɜːn]
    1. N
    1) (=rotation) vuelta f, revolución f; [of spiral] espira f

    • with a quick turn of the hand — con un movimiento rápido de la mano

    • he gave the handle a turn — dio vuelta a la palanca

    • to give a screw another turn — apretar un tornillo una vuelta más

    2) (Aut) (in road) vuelta f, curva f

    to do a left turn — (Aut) doblar or girar a la izquierda

    3) (Aut) (=turn-off) salida f
    4) (Naut) viraje m
    5) (Swimming) vuelta f
    6) (=change of direction)

    • at the turn of the century — a finales del siglo

    • at every turn — (fig) a cada paso

    • to be on the turn, the tide is on the turn — la marea está cambiando

    • turn of the tide — (lit, fig) cambio m or vuelta f de la marea

    • things took a new turn — las cosas tomaron otro cariz or aspecto

    • at the turn of the year — a fin de año

    7) (in series etc) turno m, vez f

    whose turn is it? — ¿a quién le toca?

    it's her turn next — le toca a ella después, ella es la primera en turno

    • turn and turn about — cada uno por turno, ahora esto y luego aquello

    • by turns — por turnos, sucesivamente

    • to give up one's turn — ceder la vez

    • in turn — por turnos, sucesivamente

    and they, in turn, said... — y ellos a su vez dijeron...

    • to miss one's turn — perder la vez or el turno

    • to go out of turn — (in game) jugar fuera de orden

    to speak out of turn — (fig) hablar fuera de lugar

    • to take one's turn — llegarle (a algn) su turno

    to take turns at doing sth — alternar or turnarse para hacer algo

    • to wait one's turn — esperar (algn) su turno

    8) (=short walk) vuelta f
    9) (Med) (=fainting fit etc) vahído m, desmayo m; (=crisis) crisis f inv, ataque m
    10) * (=fright) susto m
    11) (esp Brit) (Theat) número m, turno m
    12) (=deed)

    • to do sb a bad turn — hacer una mala pasada a algn

    • to do sb a good turn — hacerle un favor a algn

    13) (Culin)
    14) (=inclination)

    an odd turn of mind — una manera retorcida or (LAm) chueca de pensar

    to be of or have a scientific turn of mind — ser más dado a las ciencias

    15) (=expression)

    turn of phrase — forma f de hablar, giro m

    2. VT
    1) (=rotate) [+ wheel, handle] girar, dar vueltas a; [+ screw] atornillar, destornillar

    • you can turn it through 90° — se puede girarlo hasta 90 grados

    • turn it to the left — dale una vuelta hacia la izquierda

    2) (also: turn over) [+ record, mattress, steak] dar la vuelta a, voltear (LAm); [+ page] pasar; [+ soil] revolver; [+ hay] volver al revés

    • to turn one's ankle — torcerse el tobillo

    • to turn a dress inside out — volver un vestido del revés

    • it turns my stomach — me revuelve el estómago

    - turn the page
    3) (=direct) dirigir, volver

    • they turned him against us — le pusieron en contra nuestra

    • to turn one's attention to sth — concentrar su atención en algo

    • to turn one's back on sb/sth — (also fig) volver or dar la espalda a algn/algo

    • to turn one's eyes in sb's direction — volver la mirada hacia donde está algn

    • to turn a gun on sb — apuntar una pistola a algn

    • to turn one's head — volver la cabeza

    • the fireman turned the hose on the building — el bombero dirigió la manguera hacia el edificio

    • to turn the lights (down) low — poner la luz más baja

    • to turn one's steps homeward — dirigirse a casa, volver los pasos hacia casa

    • to turn one's thoughts to sth — concentrarse en algo

    - turn the other cheek

    to turn one's hand to sth —

    - turn sb's head: earning all that money has turned his/her head
    - turn the tables
    4) (=pass) doblar, dar la vuelta a

    it's turned four o'clock — son las cuatro y pico or (esp LAm) las cuatro pasadas

    - have turned the corner
    5) (=change)

    the heat turned the walls black — el calor volvió negras las paredes, el calor ennegreció las paredes

    the shock turned her hair white — del susto, el pelo se le puso blanco

    his goal turned the game — (Brit) su gol le dio un vuelco al partido

    • to turn sth into sth — convertir algo en algo

    • she turned her dreams to reality — hizo sus sueños realidad, realizó sus sueños

    6) (=deflect) [+ blow] desviar
    7) (=shape) [+ wood, metal] tornear
    well-turned
    8) (Culin)
    9)

    to turn a profit — (esp US) sacar un beneficio, tener ganancias

    3. VI
    1) (=rotate) [wheel etc] girar, dar vueltas

    • the object turned on a stand — el objeto giraba en un pedestal

    • his stomach turned at the sight — al verlo se le revolvió el estómago, se le revolvieron las tripas al verlo *

    to turn in one's grave —

    toss 3., 1)
    2) (=change direction) [person] dar la vuelta, voltearse (LAm); [tide] repuntar

    to turn and go back — volverse or dar la vuelta y regresar

    right turn! — (Mil) derecha... ¡ar!

    the game turned after half-time — (Brit) el partido dio un vuelco tras el descanso

    • to turn against sb — volverse contra algn

    • to turn for home — volver hacia casa

    • farmers are turning from cows to pigs — los granjeros cambian de vacas a cerdos

    • then our luck turned — luego mejoramos de suerte

    • to turn to sb/sth, he turned to me and smiled — se volvió hacia mí y sonrió

    our thoughts turn to those who... — pensamos ahora en los que...

    he turned to drink — se dio a la bebida, le dio por el alcohol

    • I don't know which way to turn — (fig) no sé qué hacer

    • I don't know where to turn for money — no sé en qué parte ir a buscar dinero

    • the wind has turned — el viento ha cambiado de dirección

    3) (Aut) torcer, girar; (Aer, Naut) virar

    to turn left — (Aut) torcer or girar or doblar a la izquierda

    • the car turned into a lane — el coche se metió en una bocacalle

    • to turn to port — (Naut) virar a babor

    4) (=change)

    • to turn into sth — convertirse or transformarse en algo

    the princess turned into a toad — la princesa se transformó en sapo, la princesa quedó transformada en sapo

    • the leaves were turning — se estaban descolorando or dorando las hojas

    • the milk has turned — la leche se ha cortado

    • it turned to stone — se convirtió en piedra

    his admiration turned to scorn — su admiración se tornó or se transformó en desprecio

    • to wait for the weather to turn — esperar a que cambie el tiempo

    5) (=become)

    • the weather or it has turned cold — el tiempo se ha puesto frío, se ha echado el frío

    • to turn nasty — [person] ponerse or volverse antipático

    • to turn red — ponerse rojo

    • matters are turning serious — las cosas se ponen graves

    6) (=depend)

    • everything turns on his decision — todo depende de su decisión

    everything turns on whether... — todo depende de si...

    4.
    CPD

    turn signal N — (US) (Aut) indicador m (de dirección)

    * * *
    [tɜːrn, tɜːn]
    I
    1)
    a) ( rotation) vuelta f

    to a turn: the meat was done to a turn — la carne estaba hecha a la perfección, la carne estaba en su punto justo

    b) ( change of direction) vuelta f, giro m

    no left turn — prohibido girar or doblar or torcer a la izquierda

    c) ( bend) curva f; ( turning)

    take the next left/right turn — tome or (esp Esp) coja or (esp AmL) agarre la próxima a la izquierda/derecha

    at every turn — a cada paso, a cada momento

    d) (change, alteration)

    to take a turn for the better — empezar* a mejorar

    to take a turn for the worse — empeorar, ponerse* peor

    to be on the turn — \<\<events/tide\>\> estar* cambiando; \<\<leaves\>\> estar* cambiando de color; \<\<milk/food\>\> (BrE) estar* echándose a perder

    2)

    whose turn is it? — ¿a quién le toca?

    to take turns o to take it in turn(s) — turnarse

    we'll take turns o we'll take it in turn(s) to do the cooking — nos vamos a turnar para cocinar, vamos a cocinar por turnos

    in turn: each in turn was asked the same question a cada uno de ellos se le hizo la misma pregunta; out of turn: she realized she'd spoken out of turn — se dio cuenta de que su comentario (or interrupción etc) había estado fuera de lugar

    3) ( service)

    to do somebody a good turn — hacerle* un favor a alguien

    4) (form, style)

    she has a logical/practical turn of mind — es muy lógica/práctica

    5)
    a) (bout of illness, disability)
    b) ( nervous shock) susto m
    6) ( act) (esp BrE) número m

    II
    1.
    1)
    a) ( rotate) \<\<knob/handle/wheel\>\> (hacer*) girar
    b) (set, regulate)

    to turn something to something: turn the knob to `hot' ponga el indicador en `caliente'; he turned the oven to a lower temperature — bajó la temperatura del horno

    2)
    a) (change position, direction of) \<\<head\>\> volver*, voltear (AmL exc RPl)

    she turned her back on them — les volvió or les dio la espalda, les volteó la espalda (AmL exc RPl)

    can you turn the TV this way a bit? — ¿puedes poner el televisor más para este lado?

    b) (direct, apply)

    to turn something to something: I turned my mind to more pleasant thoughts me puse a pensar en cosas más agradables; the administration has turned its efforts to... la administración ha dirigido sus esfuerzos a...; they turned the situation to their own profit — utilizaron la situación para su propio provecho; advantage b)

    3)
    a) ( reverse) \<\<mattress/omelette\>\> darle* la vuelta a, voltear (AmL exc CS), dar* vuelta (CS); \<\<page\>\> pasar, volver*, dar* vuelta (CS); \<\<soil\>\> remover*, voltear (AmL exc CS), dar* vuelta (CS)

    he turned the card face down — puso or volvió la carta boca abajo

    b) ( upset)
    4)
    a) ( go around) \<\<corner\>\> dar* la vuelta a, dar* vuelta (CS)
    b) ( pass)
    5) ( send)

    I couldn't simply turn him from my door — no le podía negar ayuda, no le podía volver la espalda; loose I 2)

    6)
    a) (change, transform) volver*

    to turn something to/into something — transformar or convertir* algo en algo

    they've turned the place into a pigsty! — han puesto la casa (or la habitación etc) como una pocilga!

    b) ( make sour) \<\<milk\>\> agriar
    c) ( confuse) \<\<mind\>\> trastornar
    7)
    a) ( shape - on lathe) tornear; (- on potter's wheel) hacer*
    b) ( formulate)
    8) ( make) \<\<profit\>\> sacar*

    2.
    vi
    1) ( rotate) \<\<handle/wheel\>\> girar, dar* vuelta(s)
    2)
    a) ( to face in different direction) \<\<person\>\> volverse*, darse* la vuelta, voltearse (AmL exc CS), darse* vuelta (CS); \<\<car\>\> dar* la vuelta, dar* vuelta (CS)

    she turned to me with a smile — me miró sonriéndome, se volvió hacia mí con una sonrisa

    he turned onto his side — se volvió or se puso de lado

    left/right turn! — (BrE Mil) media vuelta a la izquierda/derecha!

    b) (change course, direction)

    the army then turned north — entonces el ejército cambió de rumbo, dirigiéndose al norte

    to turn left/right — girar or doblar or torcer* a la izquierda/derecha

    c) ( curve) \<\<road/river\>\> torcer*
    3)
    a) ( focus on)

    to turn to another subject — pasar a otro tema, cambiar de tema

    b) (resort, have recourse to)

    to turn to violence/a friend — recurrir a la violencia/un amigo

    to turn to drink — darse* a la bebida

    to turn to somebody/something for something: she turned to her parents for support recurrió or acudió a sus padres en busca de apoyo; he turned to nature for inspiration — buscó inspiración en la naturaleza

    4)
    a) ( become)

    Ed Wright, naturalist turned politician — Ed Wright, naturalista convertido en or vuelto político

    to turn into something — convertirse* en algo

    water turns into steam — el agua se convierte or se transforma en vapor

    to turn to something — (liter) convertirse* en algo

    c) ( change) \<\<luck/weather/tide\>\> cambiar
    d) ( change color) \<\<leaves\>\> cambiar de color
    e) ( go sour) \<\<milk\>\> agriarse

    turn to page 19 — abran el libro en la página 19, vayan a la página 19

    6) (AmE Busn) \<\<merchandise\>\> venderse
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:

    English-spanish dictionary > turn

  • 5 apud

    ăpŭd ( apud down to the time of Caesar, Corp. Inscr. I. 30; I. 196; and after 45 B. C. both apud, Inscr. Orell. 206; 818, and aput, ib. 206; 15; 34; another form of apud was apor, Paul. ex Fest. p. 26 Mull. apud, Ritschl, Rib. in Trag. et Com. Rel., Mull. in Lucil., and Dietsch in Sall.; aput, Lachm., Fleck. in Plaut.; both apud and aput, Mull. in Cat. and Rib. in Verg.) [Corssen once regarded apud as connected with apisci, as juxta with jungo, Ausspr. I. p. 335, 1st ed., but afterwards, ib. 2d ed. I. p. 197, he adopted Pott's view, that it was comp. of Sanscr. api, = to, toward, near (Gr. epi), and ad, old form ar, which view the form apor favors, and thus its strict meaning would be on to, unto; v. infra, IV.]; prep. gov. acc., with, at, by, near (regularly with words denoting rest, and primarily of persons, while ad properly designates only direction, motion, extension, etc., and is chiefly used of places; the diff. between apud and penes is given in Paul. ex Fest. p. 22 Mull.: apud et penes in hoc differunt, quod alterum personam cum loco significat, alterum personam et dominium ac potestatem; v. penes, and cf. Nep. Them. 7, 2: ad ephoros Lacedaemoniorum accessit, penes quos summum imperium erat, atque apud eos (v. infra, I. B. 2. a.) contendit, etc.; and for the difference between ad and apud, cf. Lucil. 9, 58 sq. Mull.: apud se longe alid est, neque idem valet ad se: Intro nos vocat ad sese, tenet intus apud se; syn.: ad, prope, coram, inter, in with abl.; rare in early Lat.; very freq. in Plaut., less freq. in Ter., seven times in Verg., five times in Juv., three times in Catull., twice in Ov, and once in Hor. and Prop.; never in Tib. or Pers.; very freq. in Cic., the historians, and the Vulg.).
    I.
    A.. In designating nearness in respect of persons, with, near: apud ipsum adstas, Att. ap. Non. p. 522, 25:

    adsum apud te, genitor,

    id. ib. p. 522, 32:

    alteram (partem) apud me adponito,

    Plaut. Trin. 4, 3, 60:

    nunc hic apud te servio,

    id. Capt. 2, 2, 62:

    scriptorum non magnast copia apud me,

    Cat. 68, 33 Mull.:

    mane apud me,

    Vulg. Gen. 29, 19:

    Advocatum habemus apud Patrem,

    ib. 1 Joan. 2, 1:

    cum in lecto Crassus esset et apud eum Sulpicius sederet,

    Cic. de Or. 2, 3, 12; so id. Pis. 26, and id. Rep. 3, 28.—
    B.
    Esp.
    1.
    a.. With a pron. or subst., apud me, te, se, aliquem, etc., with me, in my house, etc., in one's house, at the house of a person; Fr. chez moi, chez vous, chez soi, etc.:

    Quis heri apud te? Naev., Com. Rel. p. 9 Rib.: dico eum esse apud me,

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 2, 15; 4, 2, 73:

    hic apud me hortum confodere jussi,

    id. Aul. 2, 2, 66:

    si commodumst, apud me, sis, volo,

    Ter. Heaut. 1, 1, 110:

    condixerant cenam apud me, Turp., Com. Rel. p. 108 Rib.: quid nunc virgo? Nempe apud test?

    Plaut. Trin. 1, 2, 159:

    Quid sibi volunt homines isti apud te?

    Vulg. Num. 22, 9; ib. Matt. 26, 18:

    cenabis bene apud me,

    Cat. 13, 1:

    apud me habitavit,

    Cic. Clu. 33; id. Verr. 4, 111; 5, 77:

    apud te cenavit,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 58; id. Verr. 4, 49; id. Cael. 26; id. Deiot. 32:

    in curia posita potius quam rure apud te, Titin., Com. Rel. p. 142 Rib.: mane apud me etiam hodie,

    Vulg. Jud. 19, 9:

    tenet intus apud se,

    Lucil. 9, 59 Mull.:

    Pompeius petiit, ut secum et apud se essem cotidie,

    Cic. Att. 5, 6:

    apud se fecit manere,

    Vulg. Jud. 19, 7; ib. Luc. 11, 37:

    de gladiis, quae apud ipsum erant deprehensa,

    Cic. Cat. 3, 10:

    Cum postridie apud eundem ventum exspectans manerem,

    id. Phil. 1, 8:

    mansit apud eum quattuor mensibus,

    Vulg. Jud. 19, 2; ib. Act. 28, 14:

    apud quem deversatus es,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 37: apud nympham Calypsonem, Liv. And. ap. Prisc. p. 685 (cf. Hom. Od. 4, 557: Numphês en megaroisi Kalupsous):

    habitasti apud Heium Messanae,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 18; id. Cael. 51:

    Fuisti apud Laecam illa nocte,

    id. Cat. 1, 4, 9; id. de Or. 1, 22, 104; id. Att. 1, 8:

    apud Ostorium Scapulam epulatur,

    Tac. A. 14, 48:

    apud Cornelium Primum juxta Velabrum delituit,

    id. H. 3, 74; 1, 14:

    Factum est, ut moraretur apud Simonem quendam,

    Vulg. Act. 9, 43:

    invenient hominem apud sororem tuam occultantem se,

    Cic. Dom. 83:

    qui apud te esset eductus,

    id. Quinct. 69:

    apud quem erat educatus,

    id. Lael. 20, 75:

    cum alter ejus filius apud matrem educaretur,

    id. Clu. 27:

    disciplina C. Cassii, apud quem educatus erat,

    Tac. A. 15, 52:

    se apud Q. Mucium jus civile didicisse,

    id. Or. 30:

    apud eosdem magistratus institutus,

    Suet. Calig. 24:

    servorum manus tamquam apud senem festinantes,

    Tac. H. 1, 7:

    in convivio apud regem,

    id. A. 2, 57: Bene vale;

    apud Orcum te videbo,

    in the abode of Orcus, Plaut. As. 3, 3, 16:

    sacrificasse apud deos, i. e. in templis deorum,

    Tac. A. 11, 27:

    frater apud Othonem militans,

    in the army of Otho, id. H. 2, 26; so,

    nec solum apud Caecinam (cognoscebatur id damnum composuisse),

    id. ib. 2, 27:

    quorum sint legati apud se,

    in his camp, Caes. B. G. 4, 8; cf.:

    Quos cum apud se in castris Ariovistus conspexisset,

    id. ib. 1, 47:

    dici hoc potest, Apud portitores eas (litteras) resignatas sibi,

    at the custom-house, Plaut. Trin. 3, 3, 64; 3, 3, 80:

    Quantillum argenti mihi apud trapezitam siet,

    at the banker's, id. Capt. 1, 2, 90:

    duo genera materiarum apud rhetoras tractantur, i. e. in scholis rhetorum, as he says just before,

    Tac. Or. 35.—Apud me etc. is sometimes added to domi or in aedibus, or interchanges with domi: Me. Ubi namst, quaeso? Ch. Apud me domi, Ter. Heaut. 3, 1, 21:

    a me insidias apud me domi positas esse dixerunt,

    Cic. Sest. 41:

    domi esse apud sese archipiratas dixit duos,

    id. Verr. 5, 73; so Vulg. Gen. 27, 15:

    quae (signa) cognovi apud istum in aedibus,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 50:

    esse illa signa domi suae, non esse apud Verrem,

    id. ib. 4, 16:

    nihil apud hanc lautum, pistor domi nullus,

    id. Pis. 67; id. Clu. 165.—Hence,
    b.
    Trop.: apud se esse, to be at home, i. e. to be in one's senses, be one's self, be sane (only in conversational lang.; most freq. in Ter.; cf. Gr. en heautôi einai, Ar. Vesp. 642; opp. vecors, amens esse, to be out of one's wits, beside one's self; so Gr. phrenôn exestanai, Eur. Or. 1021):

    Sumne ego apud me?

    Plaut. Mil. 4, 8, 36:

    Non sum apud me,

    Ter. Phorm. 1, 4, 26, and Afran., Com. Rel, p. 170 Rib.:

    Prae iracundia, Menedeme, non sum apud me,

    Ter. Heaut. 5, 1, 48:

    Vix sum apud me: ita animus commotust metu, spe, gaudio,

    id. And. 5, 4, 34:

    Num tibi videtur esse apud sese?

    id. Hec. 4, 4, 85 (quasi ob amorem meretricis insanus, Don.):

    proin tu fac, apud te ut sies,

    id. And. 2, 4, 5 (= ut praeparatus sis, Don.); Petr. 129.—
    2.
    In respect of persons, in whose presence or before whom any thing is done or takes place, esp. of discussions or debates in which the persons have the right of decision (Web. Uebungsch. p. 33), before, in the presence of, = coram, ad.
    a.
    Of civil or military affairs, before:

    cum res agatur apud praetorem populi Romani et apud severissimos judices,

    Cic. Arch. 3:

    apud eosdem judices reus est factus,

    id. Clu. 22, 59:

    vis de his judicari apud me?

    Vulg. Act. 25, 9:

    accusavit fratres suos apud patrem,

    ib. Gen. 37, 2; ib. 1 Macc. 7, 6; ib. Joan. 5, 45:

    hoc, quod nunc apud pontifices agis,

    Cic. Dom. 51; 117:

    istud ne apud eum quidem dictatorem quisquam egit isto modo,

    id. Lig. 12:

    qui hanc causam aliquotiens apud te egit,

    id. Quinct. 30; so id. Verr. 2, 100; 3, 114; id. Caecin. 69; id. Sest. 120:

    (populus Romanus) mihi potestatem apud se agendi dedit,

    id. Verr. 5, 173: Repulsior secunda collatione dixit Cato in ea, quae est contra Cornelium apud populum, Paul. ex Fest. p. 286 Mull.:

    tutoresne defendent apud istius modi praetorem?

    Cic. Verr. 1, 153; id. Clu. 126: apud te cum sim defensurus me, Vulg. Act. [p. 146] 26, 2:

    omnia apud praetores gererentur,

    Tac. Or. 38:

    causam nescio quam apud judicem defendebat,

    Cic. Clu. 74; so Tac. A. 3, 12; id. Or. 19:

    apud te defendit alium in ea voluntate non fuisse, in qua te,

    Cic. Lig. 6:

    apud judicem causam dicere,

    id. Quinct. 43; id. Verr. 1, 26; id. Sex. Rosc. 85:

    apud aliquem dicere,

    id. Lig. 6; id. Deiot. 4:

    verba apud senatum fecit,

    id. Verr. 2, 2, 20:

    habita apud senatum oratione,

    Tac. A. 12, 25; 6, 8:

    haec apud patres disseruit,

    id. ib. 2, 43; 4, 2;

    4, 6: modeste apud vos socius populi Romani questus est,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 18:

    Quae est ergo apud Caesarem querella?

    id. Lig. 25:

    isne apud vos obtinebit causam, qui etc.,

    id. Caecin. 38:

    petita multa est apud eum praetorem,

    id. Verr. 1, 155:

    causam contra aliquem apud centumviros dicere,

    id. de Or. 2, 23, 98; Tac. Or. 38:

    numerus oratorum quot annis apud magistratus publice subscribitur,

    Cic. Verr. 3, 120:

    apud eorum quem qui manumitteretur,

    Liv. 41, 9: apud proconsules aliquem manumittere, Marcian. ap. Dig. 1, 162.—
    b.
    In extra judicial cases, before:

    apud hunc confessus es et genus etc.,

    Plaut. Capt. 2, 3, 52:

    nullam causam dico, quin mihi Et parentum et libertatis apud te deliquio siet,

    id. ib. 3, 4, 93:

    apud erum qui (servos) vera loquitur,

    id. Am. 2, 1, 43:

    apud novercam querere,

    id. Ps. 1, 3, 80:

    ego apud parentem loquor,

    Cic. Lig. 30:

    plura fateri apud amicos,

    Tac. A. 14, 62:

    aliquid apud aliquem laudare,

    Cic. Att. 2, 25; Tac. A. 13, 46; so Vulg. Gen. 12, 15:

    aliquem apud aliquos vituperare,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 11:

    apud quem tu etiam nos criminari soles,

    id. Vatin. 29.—
    c.
    Of one's feelings, views, judgment, with, in the view or sight of, before.
    (α).
    With verbs:

    apud Tenedios sanctissimus deus habetur,

    Cic. Fl. 61; id. Verr. 1, 49:

    quod apud illos amplissimum sacerdotium putatur,

    id. ib. 2, 126;

    1, 69: si tutoris auctoritas apud te ponderis nihil habebat,

    id. ib. 2, 55; id. Planc. 4:

    apud judicem grave et sanctum esse ducetur,

    id. Q. Rosc. 6:

    Quae omnia apud nos partim infamia... ponuntur, Nep. praef. 5: justificatur apud Deum,

    Vulg. Gal. 3, 11:

    haec apud illos barbatos ridicula videbantur,

    Cic. Mur. 26; id. Dom. 101:

    unus dies apud Dominum (est) sicut mille anni, et mille anni sicut dies unus,

    Vulg. 2 Pet. 3, 8.—
    (β).
    With adjj.:

    fuisti apud pontifices superior,

    Cic. Dom. 4:

    qui honos est apud Syracusanos amplissimus,

    id. Verr. 4, 137; id. Font. 36:

    quam clara (expugnatio) apud omnes,

    id. Verr. 1, 50; 2, 50:

    Satis clarus est apud timentem quisquis timetur,

    Tac. H. 2, 76; id. Or. 7:

    hoc est apud Graecos prope gloriosius quam Romae triumphasse,

    Cic. Fl. 31; Tac. H. 5, 17:

    quod aeque apud bonos miserum est,

    id. ib. 1, 29:

    quae justa sunt apud nos,

    Vulg. 1 Macc. 11, 33; ib. Rom. 2, 13:

    tunc eritis inculpabiles apud Dominum,

    ib. Num. 32, 22:

    si is pretio apud istum idoneus esset,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 121.—
    (γ).
    With substt.:

    est tanta apud eos ejus fani religio atque antiquitas, ut etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 46:

    tanta nominis Romani dignitas est apud omnes nationes, ut etc.,

    id. ib. 5, 150:

    qua (hic) apud omnes Siculos dignitate atque existimatione sit,

    id. ib. 2, 111:

    Dymnus modicae apud regem auctoritatis et gratiae,

    Curt. 6, 72:

    abominatio est uterque apud Deum,

    Vulg. Prov. 17, 15.—Apud animum, apud animum meum, etc. sometimes stand for mihi, mecum, etc., or simply animo: Ea tute tibi subice et apud animum propone, before your mind, before you, Sulp. ap. Cic. Fam. 4, 5:

    ipsi primum statuerint apud animos, quid vellent,

    Liv. 6, 39, 11:

    Sic apud animum meum statuo,

    Sall. de Ord. Rep. 2:

    sic statuere apud animum meum possum,

    Liv. 34, 2, 4.—So with pers. pron. in Vulg. after the Greek: haec apud se (pros heauton) oravit, within himself, to himself, Luc. 18, 11: Sciens apud semet ipsum (en heautôi), in himself, Joan. 6, 62: statui hoc ipsum apud me (emautôi), ne etc., with myself, 2 Cor. 2, 1; so, hoc cogitet apud se (eph heautou), ib. 10, 7.—
    d.
    And simply before, in the presence of:

    id apud vos proloquar,

    Plaut. Capt. prol. 6:

    nemo est meorum amicorum, apud quem expromere omnia mea occulta audeam,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 3, 14:

    se jactant apud eos, quos inviti vident,

    Cic. Fl. 61:

    licet mihi, Marce fili, apud te gloriari, ad quem etc.,

    id. Off. 1, 22, 78: de vobis glorior apud Macedones, Vulg. 2 Cor. 9, 2:

    plus quam apud vos commemorari velitis,

    Cic. Caecin. 77:

    non apud indoctos loquor,

    id. Pis. 68:

    ostendit, quae quisque de eo apud se dixerit,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 19:

    quid apud magnum loquerentur Achillem,

    Ov. M. 12, 163:

    neque raro neque apud paucos talia jaciebat,

    Tac. A. 4, 7:

    loqui de se apud aliquem,

    Cic. Att. 1, 3:

    mentiri apud aliquem,

    Plaut. Poen. 1, 1, 24:

    apud aliquem profiteri,

    Curt. 7, 7, 24:

    Non est nobis haec oratio habenda apud imperitam multitudinem,

    Cic. Mur. 61:

    Caesar apud milites contionatur,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 7:

    gratias agere alicui apud aliquem,

    Cic. Sest. 4; so Tac. A. 15, 22:

    si quid (in me) auctoritatis est, apud eos utar, qui etc.,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 2; so id. Lig. 16, and id. Red. in Sen. 24:

    Quae fundebat apud Samson lacrimas,

    Vulg. Jud. 14, 16.—
    3.
    Of a person with whom, in whose case something is, exists, is done, with, in the case of, often = in with abl.:

    quom apud te parum stet fides,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 5, 62:

    Et bene apud memores veteris stat gratia facti,

    Verg. A. 4, 539:

    At fides mihi apud hunc est,

    Ter. Heaut. 3, 3, 10: De. Quid est? Ch. Itan parvam mihi fidem esse apud te? id. Phorm. 5, 3, 27:

    ut apud me praemium esse positum pietati scias,

    id. Hec. 4, 2, 8:

    alioqui mercedem non habebitis apud Patrem vestrum,

    Vulg. Matt. 6, 1:

    illa res quantam declarat ejusdem hominis apud hostes populi Romani auctoritatem,

    Cic. Imp. Pomp. 46:

    (eum) Aeduorum auctoritatem apud omnes Belgas amplificaturum,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 14:

    si M. Petrei non summa auctoritas apud milites exstitisset,

    Cic. Sest. 12:

    Pompei auctoritas apud omnes tanta est. quanta etc.,

    id. Fl. 14; id. Phil. 13, 7:

    ecquid auctoritatis apud vos socii populi Romani habere debeant,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 17; so id. Verr. 2, 14; id. Mur 38:

    (servi) apud eum sunt in honore et pretio,

    id. Sex. Rosc. 77; id. Verr. 5, 157; id. Cat. 3, 2:

    videmus quanta sit in invidia quantoque in odio apud quosdam virtus et industria,

    id. Verr. 5, 181:

    quo majore apud vos odio esse debet quam etc.,

    id. ib. 1, 42:

    domi splendor, apud exteras nationes nomen et gratia,

    id. Clu. 154; id. Mur. 38:

    Dumnorigem, magna apud plebem gratia,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    tanti ejus apud se gratiam esse ostendit, uti etc.,

    id. ib. 1, 20:

    certe apud te et hos, qui tibi adsunt, veritas valebit,

    Cic. Quinct. 5; id. Div. in Caecil. 17; id. Lig. 30; id. Marcell. 14; id. Mil. 34:

    utrum apud eos pudor atque officium aut timor valeret,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 40:

    apud quem ut multum gratia valeret,

    Nep. Con. 2, 1:

    video apud te causas valere plus quam preces,

    Cic. Lig. 31; so id. Lael. 4, 13, and Tac. H. 3, 36:

    quod apud vos plurimum debebit valere,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 11; so Caes. B. G. 1, 17, and Tac. H. 4, 73:

    qui tantum auctoritate apud suos cives potuit, ut etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 113:

    speravit sese apud tales viros aliquid posse ad etc.,

    id. Sex. Rosc. 141:

    (eum) apud finitimas civitates largiter posse,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 18:

    quae (pecunia) apud me contra fidem meam nihil potuisset,

    Cic. Verr. 1, 19:

    quae (memoria) plus apud eum possit quam salus civitatis,

    id. Phil. 5, 51; id. Verr. 3, 131:

    qui apud eum plurimum poterat,

    id. ib. 3, 130:

    qui apud me et amicitia et beneficiis et dignitate plurimum possunt,

    id. Sex. Rosc. 4; so Caes. B. G. 1, 9.—So very rarely with adjj.:

    faciles sunt preces apud eos, qui etc.,

    Cic. Har. Resp. 63:

    nihil me turpius apud homines fuisset,

    id. Att. 2, 19:

    apud quos miserum auxilium tolerabile miserius malum fecit,

    Cels. 3, 23.—
    4.
    Of persons, of inhabitants of cities or countries, among whom one is, or something is, is done or happens, among = inter:

    CONSOL. QVEI. FVIT. APVD. VOS., Epit. Scip. ap. Grotef. Gr. II. p. 296: homines apud nos noti, inter suos nobiles,

    Cic. Fl. 52:

    Ut vos hic, itidem ille apud vos meus servatur filius,

    Plaut. Capt. 2, 2, 11; 2, 2, 62:

    qui (colonus) perigrinatur apud vos,

    Vulg. Exod. 12, 49:

    qui regnabat apud vos,

    ib. 1 Macc. 12, 7; ib. Matt. 13, 56; ib. Luc. 9, 41:

    si iste apud eos quaestor non fuisset,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 4; 65:

    Apud eos fuisse regem Divitiacum,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 4; 2, 2:

    qui (praetores) apud illos a populo creantur,

    Cic. Fl. 44:

    apud quos consul fuerat,

    id. Div. in Caecil. 66; id. Verr. 2, 5; 4, 108:

    apud inferos illi antiqui supplicia impiis constituta esse voluerunt,

    id. Cat. 4, 8; id. Tusc. 1, 5, 10; so Vulg. Eccli. 14, 17: Sunt apud infernos tot milia formosarum, Prop. 3, 2, 63:

    fateri quae quis apud superos distulit in seram commissa piacula mortem,

    Verg. A. 6, 568;

    Vel. 2, 48, 2: studiis militaribus apud juventutem obsoletis,

    Cic. Font. 42:

    qui apud socios nominis Latini censi essent,

    Liv. 41, 9:

    qui apud gentes solus praestat, Naev., Com. Rel. p. 25 Rib.: quae sacra apud omnes gentes nationesque fiunt,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 109:

    id (simulacrum) apud Segestanos positum fuisse,

    id. ib. 4, 80:

    si apud Athenienses non deerant qui rem publicam defenderent,

    id. Sest. 141, and Nep. Milt. 6, 2:

    ille est magistratus apud Siculos, qui etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 131:

    si tu apud Persas deprehensus etc.,

    id. ib. 5, 166:

    Apud Helvetios longe nobilissimus fuit Orgetorix,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 2:

    apud omnes Graecos hic mos est, ut etc.,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 158, and id. Fragm. B. 7, 18 B. and K.:

    quod apud Germanos ea consuetudo esset, ut etc.,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 50:

    aliis Germanorum populis usurpatum raro apud Chattos in consensum vertit,

    Tac. G. 31:

    Cui (mihi) neque apud Danaos usquam locus (est),

    Verg. A. 2, 71:

    apud Nahanarvalos antiquae religionis lucus ostenditur,

    Tac. G. 43; 32; 38; 44; id. H. 4, 56; 4, 61; id. A. 2, 1; 2, 45: apud Graecos magis quam in ceteris nationibus exculta est medicina, Cels. praef. 3, 9.—So of an army, in, with, where in with abl. is commonly used:

    qui apud exercitum cum Lucio Lucullo est,

    in the army under L. Lucullus, Cic. Verr. 4, 49; so id. Arch. 11:

    apud exercitum mihi fueris tot annos,

    id. Mur. 45:

    quod Hannibalem etiam nunc cum imperio apud exercitum haberent,

    in the army with a command, Nep. Hann. 7, 3:

    simul manere apud exercitus Titum utile videbatur,

    Tac. H. 5, 10:

    quod XII. pondo argenti habuisset apud exercitum,

    with his troops, Plin. 33, 4, 50, § 143.—
    5.
    In designating the author of a work or of an assertion, apud aliquem, in, by, in the writings of, any one (the work itself being designated by in with abl.; as, de qua in Catone majore satis multa diximus, Cic. Off. 1, 42, 151:

    Socraiem illum, qui est in Phaedro Platonis,

    id. de Or. 1, 7, 28:

    quo in libro,

    id. ib. 1, 11, 47):

    ut scriptum apud eundem Caelium est,

    Cic. Div. 1, 26, 55:

    apud Xenophontem autem moriens Cyrus major haec dicit,

    id. Sen. 22, 79:

    quod apud Platonem est in philosophos dictum, quod etc.,

    id. Off. 1, 9, 28:

    apud Agathoclem scriptum in historia est,

    id. Div. 1, 24, 50:

    ut est apud poetam nescio quem,

    id. Phil. 2, 65:

    Quod enim est apud Ennium, etc.,

    id. Off. 1, 8, 26:

    de qua (ambitione) praeclare apud eundem est Platonem, simile etc.,

    id. ib. 1, 25, 87:

    Apud Varronem ita est, etc.,

    Plin. 18, 35, 79, § 348:

    ut video scriptum apud Graecos,

    Cic. Scaur. 4:

    invenio apud quosdam auctores,

    Tac. H. 2, 37; so id. A. 1, 81; 3, 3:

    reperio apud scriptores,

    id. ib. 2, 88:

    apud Solonem,

    i. e. in his laws, Cic. Leg. 2, 26, 64:

    cui bono est, si apud te Agamemnon diserte loquitur, i. e. in tragoediis tuis,

    Tac. Or. 9. —Also of speakers:

    apud quosdam acerbior in conviciis narrabatur,

    Tac. Agr. 22.—
    6.
    a.. Est aliquid apud aliquem = est alicui aliquid, apud aliquem being equivalent to dat. of possessor:

    quae (scientia auguralis) mihi videtur apud majores fuisse dupliciter, ut etc.,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 13, 33:

    juris civilis magnum usum apud multos fuisse,

    id. Brut. 41, 152:

    cum apud eum summum esset imperium populi,

    Nep. Phoc. 2, 4:

    omnis gratia, potentia, honos, divitiae apud illos sunt,

    Sall. C. 20, 8:

    par gloria apud Hannibalem hostesque Poenos erat,

    Liv. 22, 30, 8:

    apud quos nulla loricarum galearumve tegmina (erant),

    Tac. A. 12, 35:

    pecuniam ac dona majora apud Romanos (esse),

    id. H. 4, 76:

    minorem esse apud victos animum,

    id. ib. 3, 1;

    2, 75: quando quidem est apud te virtuti honos,

    Liv. 2, 1, 15: Phoebo sua semper apud me Munera sunt, Phoebus has his gifts with me, i. e. I have his gifts for Phoebus, Verg. E. 3, 62; so Hor. C. 3, 29, 5:

    apud te est fons vitae,

    Vulg. Psa. 35, 10:

    apud Dominum (est) misericordia,

    ib. ib. 129, 7.—
    b.
    Est aliquid apud aliquem also simply denotes that something is in one's hands, in his power, at his disposal:

    erat ei apud me pauxillulum Nummorum,

    Ter. Phorm. 1, 1, 3:

    negasse habere se (phaleras): apud alium quoque eas habuisse depositas,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 29:

    multa (signa) deposita apud amicos,

    id. ib. 4, 36:

    apud quem inventus est scyphus,

    Vulg. Gen. 44, 16; ib. [p. 147] Exod. 22, 4; ib. Deut. 24, 12.—So also of persons:

    te pix atra agitet apud carnuficem,

    in the hands of, Plaut. Capt. 3, 4, 65:

    qui (obsides) apud eum sint,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 31; 1, 33.—
    c.
    Apud aliquem = alicui, the dat. of indir. obj.:

    remanet gloria apud me, Att., Trag. Rel. p. 194 Rib.: nihil apud Siculum, nihil apud civem Romanum tota in Sicilia reliquisse,

    Cic. Verr. 4, 2:

    si (cura rei publicae) apud Othonem relinqueretur,

    Tac. H. 1, 13; 1, 20:

    qui judicia manere apud ordinem Senatorium volunt,

    Cic. Div. in Caecil. 8:

    neque praemia caedis apud interfectorem mansura,

    Tac. H. 2, 70; id. A. 15, 7:

    fidens apud aliquem obligare,

    Dig. 16, 1, 27.—So rarely with adjj.:

    Essetne apud te is servos acceptissimus?

    Plaut. Capt. 3, 5, 56:

    non dicam amicum tuum, quod apud homines carissimum est,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 110:

    apud publicanos gratiosus fuisti,

    id. ib. 2, 169; 4, 38; id. Fl. 76; id. Lig. 31: Apud homines hoc impossibile est;

    apud Deum autem omnia possibilia sunt,

    Vulg. Matt. 19, 26; ib. Marc. 10, 27.
    II.
    Transf. In designations of place,
    A.
    At, near, about, around, before (esp. freq. in the post-Aug. histt.) = ad, prope, circum, ante: tibi servi multi apud mensam adstant, Naev. ap. Prisc. p. 893 P. (Com. Rel. p. 10 Rib.):

    verecundari neminem apud mensam decet,

    Plaut. Trin. 2, 4, 77:

    Quid apud hasce aedis negotii est tibi?

    id. Am. 1, 1, 194:

    Quid illisce homines quaerunt apud aedis meas?

    id. Most. 4, 2, 26; id. Trin. 4, 2, 25: apud ignem adsidere, Turp. ap. Non. p. 522, 26 (Com. Rel. p. 100 Rib.); Sisenn. ap. Non. p. 86, 16:

    navem is fregit apud Andrum insulam,

    Ter. And. 1, 3, 17:

    apud Tenedum pugna illa navalis,

    Cic. Arch. 21:

    ut apud Salamina classem suam constituerent,

    Nep. Them. 3, 4:

    apud oppidum morati,

    Caes. B. G. 2, 7:

    agri in Hispania apud Karthaginem Novam,

    Cic. Agr. 1, 5:

    bellatum apud Actium,

    Tac. H. 1, 1; 1, 72; 3, 76:

    Pugnabant alii tardis apud Ilion armis,

    Ov. R. Am. 163:

    morabatur in castris apud Galgalam,

    Vulg. Jos. 10, 6:

    quidquid apud durae cessatum est moenia Trojae,

    Verg. A. 11, 288:

    apud vetustam turrem, Att., Trag. Rel. p. 189 Rib.: apud castellum consedisse,

    Tac. A. 4, 25:

    Vitellianos, sua quemque apud signa, componunt,

    id. H. 3, 35:

    apud vexillum tendentes,

    id. A. 1, 17:

    trepidatur apud naves,

    id. H. 2, 15:

    hostis est non apud Anienem, sed in urbe,

    Cic. Mur. 84; id. Fam. 2, 10, 5:

    quam detraxerat apud rapidum Simoenta sub Ilio alto,

    Verg. A. 5, 261:

    apud abunaantem amnem et rapidas undas Inachi, Att., Trag. Rel. p. 175 Rib.: apud gelidi flumina Hebri,

    Verg. A. 12, 331:

    octo apud Rhenum legiones,

    Tac. A. 1, 3:

    apud ripam Rheni,

    id. ib. 2, 83:

    probavi te apud Aquam Contradictionis,

    Vulg. Psa. 80, 8:

    repertus apud fretum Siciliae,

    Tac. A. 6, 14:

    propitiata Juno apud proximum mare,

    id. ib. 15, 44:

    apud promunturium Miseni consedit in villa,

    id. ib. 6, 50:

    Ut aput nivem et ferarum gelida stabula forem, for in nive etc.,

    Cat. 63, 53 Mull.:

    apud altaria deum pepigere,

    before, Tac. A. 11, 9:

    decernuntur supplicationes apud omnia pulvinaria,

    id. ib. 14, 12 (cf.:

    unum diem circa omnia pulvinaria supplicatio fuit,

    Liv. 41, 9):

    apud Caesaris effigiem procubuit,

    Tac. A. 12, 17; 13, 23:

    quartum apud lapidem substiterat,

    id. ib. 15, 60:

    laudavit ipse apud rostra (for pro rostris),

    Tac. A. 16, 6; so, apud forum (cf.: ad forum under ad, I. A. 3., and in Gr. Sophocl. Trach. 371, pros mesêi agorai;

    on the other hand,

    id. ib. 423, en mesêi agorai; id. ib. 524, têlaugei par ochthôi): Quidam apud forum mihi vendidit, Pomp., Com. Rel. p. 250 Rib.: Ch. Qui scis? By. Apud forum modo e Davo audivi, Ter. And. 2, 1, 2; 1, 5, 18:

    Capuae multa apud forum aedificia de caelo tacta,

    Liv. 41, 9 (Weissenb., in foro):

    quod (templum) apud forum holitorium C. Duilius struxerat,

    Tac. A. 2, 49.—
    B.
    At, in = in with abl. or gen. or abl. of place: CONSVLES SENATVM CONSOLVERVNT N. OCTOB. APVD AEDEM DVELONAI, S. C. de Bacch. I.; so,

    ejus statuam majores apud aedem matris deum consecravisse,

    Tac. A. 4, 64:

    apud villam est,

    Ter. Ad. 4, 1, 1; so Cic. Verr. 4, 22, 48:

    Eum argentum sumpsisse apud Thebas ab danista fenore,

    Plaut. Ep. 2, 2, 67:

    deponere apud Solos in delubro pecuniam,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 16, 40:

    ut rationes apud duas civitates possim relinquere,

    id. Att. 6, 7, 2: qui mense Aprili apud Baias essent, id. Fragm. B. 13, 4, 1 B. and K.;

    13, 4, 4 iid.: seditio militum coepta apud Sucronem,

    Liv. 28, 29:

    donum apud Antium statuitur,

    Tac. A. 3, 71:

    bellis civilibus Maecenatem equestris ordinis cunctis apud Romam atque Italiam praeposuit,

    id. ib. 6, 11:

    Titus in consecrando apud Memphim bove Apide diadema gestavit,

    Suet. Tit. 5:

    quod Judaeam praeterveniens apud Hierosolymam non supplicasset,

    id. Aug. 93:

    apud Mediolanum,

    Lact. Mort. Persec. 48:

    eum pugionem apud Capitolium consecravit,

    Tac. A. 15, 74:

    Equitum Romanorum locos sedilibus plebis anteposuit apud Circum,

    id. ib. 15, 32:

    quae (effigies) apud theatrum Pompei locaretur,

    id. ib. 3, 72:

    qui (rei) apud aerarium pependissent,

    Suet. Dom. 9 Roth:

    cujus (scientiae) apiscendae otium apud Rhodum magistrum Thrasullum habuit,

    Tac. A. 6, 20; 4, 14; so Suet. Aug. 92; Eutr. 7, 13:

    ut civitati Cibyraticae apud Asiam subveniretur,

    Tac. A. 4, 13; 4, 18; 16, 15:

    apud Pharsaliam,

    Liv. Epit. 111:

    apud Palaestinam,

    Eutr. 7, 13:

    qui erant apud Helladam,

    Vulg. 1 Macc. 8, 9. —
    III.
    Of time.
    A.
    With words denoting time or occasion, in, at (rare):

    apud saeclum prius,

    Ter. Eun. 2, 2, 15:

    aliquem apud judicium persequi,

    at the trial, Cic. Verr. 4, 104.—
    B.
    With words designating persons, with, among, in the time of:

    hostis apud majores nostros is dicebatur, quem nunc etc.,

    Cic. Off. 1, 12, 36:

    fecerunt hoc multi apud majores nostros,

    id. Verr. 2, 118; 5, 148:

    Fuit eodem ex studio vir eruditus apud patres nostros,

    id. Mur. 36; id. Off. 2, 24, 85; id. Lael. 2, 6:

    Apud antiquos fuit Petron quidam, Cels. praef. 3, 9: aliam apud Fabricios, aliam apud Scipiones pecuniam (fuisse),

    Tac. A. 2, 33.—
    IV.
    For ad with words implying motion (very rare):

    APVT EVM PERVENIRE,

    Inscr. Grut. 786, 5:

    atque apud hunc eo vicinum,

    Plaut. Mil. 2, 5, 70:

    Bito apud aurificem,

    Lucil. 30, 66 Mull.: apud legiones venit, Sall. Fragm. ap. Pomp. Commod. Don. p. 395 Lind.:

    (naves) apud insulas longius sitas ejectae,

    Tac. A. 2, 24:

    qui apud Romanos de societate functus est legatione,

    Vulg. 2 Macc. 4, 11.
    ► Apud has some peculiarities of position, chiefly in Tac.
    (cf. ad, I. fin. b.)
    a.
    It is sometimes placed after its subst.:

    quae fiunt apud fabros, fictores, item alios apud,

    Varr. L. L. 6, 78, p. 104 Mull.:

    Is locus est Cumas aput,

    Lucr. 6, 747 Lachm.:

    montem apud Erycum,

    Tac. A. 4, 43:

    ripam apud Euphratis,

    id. ib. 6, 31:

    Misenum apud et Ravennam,

    id. ib. 4, 5 (in Suet. Dom. 9 the editt. vary between aerarium apud and apud aerarium; the latter seems preferable, and is adopted by Oudend., Bremi, Baumg.-Crus., and Roth).—
    b.
    It is sometimes placed between the subst. and adj.:

    barbaras apud gentes,

    Tac. A. 2, 88, 3, 26; 15, 60:

    non modo Graecis in urbibus, sed Romana apud templa,

    id. ib. 14, 14.—
    c.
    Twice in Verg. it stands before the secondary adjunct of its subst.:

    apud durae moenia Trojae, A. 11, 288: apud gelidi flumina Hebri,

    ib. 12, 331. Apud is never found in compound words. V. more on this word in Hand, Turs. I. pp. 405-416.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > apud

  • 6 move

    mu:v
    1. verb
    1) (to (cause to) change position or go from one place to another: He moved his arm; Don't move!; Please move your car.) mover
    2) (to change houses: We're moving on Saturday.) trasladar
    3) (to affect the feelings or emotions of: I was deeply moved by the film.) conmover

    2. noun
    1) ((in board games) an act of moving a piece: You can win this game in three moves.) jugada, turno
    2) (an act of changing homes: How did your move go?) mudanza, traslado
    •
    - moveable
    - movement
    - movie
    - moving
    - movingly
    - get a move on
    - make a move
    - move along
    - move heaven and earth
    - move house
    - move in
    - move off
    - move out
    - move up
    - on the move
    move1 n
    1. traslado / mudanza
    2. jugada / turno
    it's your move es tu turno / te toca jugar a ti
    move2 vb
    1. mover / cambiar de sitio / apartar
    please move your car, it's in the way por favor, aparta tu coche, que está estorbando
    2. trasladar
    tr[mʊːv]
    1 (act of moving, movement) movimiento
    ■ one move and you're dead! ¡cómo te muevas, te mato!
    2 (to new home) mudanza; (to new job) traslado
    3 (in game) jugada; (turn) turno
    ■ whose move is it? ¿a quién le toca jugar?
    4 (action, step) paso, acción nombre femenino, medida; (decision) decisión nombre femenino; (attempt) intento
    1 (gen) mover; (furniture etc) cambiar de sitio, trasladar; (transfer) trasladar; (out of the way) apartar
    ■ you've moved the furniture! ¡habéis cambiado los muebles de sitio!
    ■ can we move the date of the meeting? ¿podemos cambiar la fecha de la reunión?
    ■ the car's badly parked, so I have to move it el coche está mal aparcado, así que tengo que cambiarlo de sitio
    ■ move your trolley, I can't get past aparta tu carrito, que no paso
    3 (in games) mover, jugar
    4 (prompt) inducir, mover; (persuade) convencer, persuadir; (change mind) hacer cambiar de opinión
    ■ what moved you to leave your job? ¿qué te convenció para dejar el trabajo?
    ■ when the spirit moves him cuando se le antoje, cuando le dé la gana, cuando esté de humor
    5 (resolution, motion, etc) proponer
    6 SMALLMEDICINE/SMALL (bowels) evacuar
    1 (gen) moverse; (change - position) trasladarse, desplazarse; (- house) mudarse; (- post, department) trasladarse
    2 (travel, go) ir
    3 (be moving) estar en marcha, estar en movimiento
    4 (leave) irse, marcharse
    ■ have you moved? ¿has jugado?
    6 (take action) tomar medidas, actuar
    ■ when is the government going to move? ¿cuándo piensa el gobierno tomar medidas?
    7 (advance) progresar, avanzar
    8 (change mind) cambiar de opinión; (yield) ceder
    ■ I've tried to persuade her, but she won't move he intentado persuadirla, pero no cede
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    to be on the move (travel - gen) viajar, desplazarse 2 (- army etc) estar en marcha 3 (be busy) no parar
    to get a move on darse prisa, moverse
    to get moving (leave) irse, marcharse
    to get something moving poner algo en marcha
    to make a move (leave) irse, marcharse 2 (act) dar un paso, actuar
    to make the first move dar el primer paso
    to move house mudarse de casa, trasladarse
    to move heaven and earth remover cielo y tierra
    to move with the times mantenerse al día
    not to move a muscle no inmutarse
    move ['mu:v] v, moved ; moving vi
    1) go: ir
    2) relocate: mudarse, trasladarse
    3) stir: moverse
    don't move!: ¡no te muevas!
    4) act: actuar
    move vt
    1) : mover
    move it over there: ponlo allí
    he kept moving his feet: no dejaba de mover los pies
    2) induce, persuade: inducir, persuadir, mover
    3) touch: conmover
    it moved him to tears: lo hizo llorar
    4) propose: proponer
    move n
    1) movement: movimiento m
    2) relocation: mudanza f (de casa), traslado m
    3) step: paso m
    a good move: un paso acertado
    n.
    • acción s.f.
    • jugada s.f.
    • lance s.m.
    • maniobra s.f.
    • movimiento s.m.
    • mudanza s.f.
    • paso s.m.
    • transposición s.f.
    v.
    • conmover v.
    • desalojar v.
    • desplazar v.
    • emocionar v.
    • impresionar v.
    • moverse v.
    • mudar v.
    • mudar de v.
    • remover v.
    • trasladar v.
    • traspasar v.
    muːv
    I
    1) ( movement) movimiento m

    she made a move to get up/for the door — hizo ademán de levantarse/ir hacia la puerta

    on the move: she's always on the move siempre está de un lado para otro; to get a move on — (colloq) darse* prisa, apurarse (AmL)

    2) ( change - of residence) mudanza f, trasteo m (Col); (- of premises) traslado m, mudanza f
    3)
    a) (action, step) paso m; ( measure) medida f

    what's the next move? — ¿cuál es el siguiente paso?, ¿ahora qué hay que hacer?

    to make the first move — dar* el primer paso

    b) (in profession, occupation)
    4) ( Games) movimiento m, jugada f

    whose move is it? — ¿a quién le toca mover or jugar?


    II
    1.
    1)

    he moved nearer the fire — se acercó or se arrimó al fuego

    to move to a new job/school — cambiar de trabajo/colegio

    b) (change location, residence) mudarse, cambiarse; see also move in, move out
    2) ( change position) moverse*

    don't you move, I'll answer the door — tú tranquilo, que voy yo a abrir la puerta

    3) (proceed, go)

    the procession/vehicle began to move — la procesión/el vehículo se puso en marcha

    we moved aside o to one side — nos apartamos, nos hicimos a un lado

    4) (advance, develop)

    to move with the times — mantenerse* al día

    5) ( carry oneself) moverse*
    6) ( go fast) (colloq) correr
    7) (take steps, act)
    8) ( Games) mover*, jugar*
    9) ( circulate socially) moverse*

    2.
    vt
    1) (transfer, shift position of)

    why have you moved the television? — ¿por qué has cambiado la televisión de sitio or de lugar?

    I can't move my leg/neck — no puedo mover la pierna/el cuello

    2)
    a) ( transport) transportar, trasladar
    b) (relocate, transfer) trasladar
    c) (change residence, location)

    to move house — (BrE) mudarse de casa

    3)
    a) ( arouse emotionally) conmover*, emocionar

    to move somebody to tears — hacer* llorar a alguien de la emoción

    b) ( prompt)

    to move somebody to + inf: this moved her to remonstrate — esto la indujo a protestar

    4) ( propose) (Adm, Govt) proponer*
    5) ( Games) mover*
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:
    [muːv]
    1. N
    1) (=movement) movimiento m

    • to watch sb's every move — observar a algn sin perder detalle, acechar a algn cada movimiento

    • to get a move on (with sth) * — (=hurry up) darse prisa or (LAm) apurarse (con algo)

    get a move on! * — ¡date prisa!, ¡apúrate! (LAm)

    • to make a move — (=start to leave, go) ponerse en marcha

    • to be on the move — (=travelling) estar de viaje; [troops, army] estar avanzando

    to be always on the move — [nomads, circus] andar siempre de aquí para allá; [animal, child] no saber estar quieto

    2) (in game) (=turn) jugada f

    whose move is it? — ¿a quién le toca jugar?

    it's my move — es mi turno, me toca a mí

    3) (fig) (=step, action)

    what's the next move? — ¿qué hacemos ahora?, y ahora ¿qué?

    • to make a move/the first move — dar un/el primer paso

    without making the least move to — + infin sin hacer la menor intención de + infin

    4) (=house removal) mudanza f ; (to different job) traslado m
    2. VT
    1) (=change place of) cambiar de lugar, cambiar de sitio; [+ part of body] mover; [+ chess piece etc] jugar, mover; (=transport) transportar, trasladar

    you've moved all my things! — ¡has cambiado de sitio todas mis cosas!

    can you move your fingers? — ¿puedes mover los dedos?

    • to move house — mudarse

    • move your chair nearer the fire — acerca or arrima la silla al fuego

    • move the cupboard out of the corner — saca el armario del rincón

    • he asked to be moved to London/to a new department — pidió el traslado a Londres/a otro departamento

    2) (=cause sth to move) mover

    the breeze moved the leaves gently — la brisa movía or agitaba dulcemente las hojas

    • to move one's bowels — hacer de vientre, evacuar

    • move those children off the grass! — ¡quite esos niños del césped!

    heaven
    3) (=change timing of)

    to move sth forward/back — [+ event, date] adelantar/aplazar algo

    4) (fig) (=sway)

    "we shall not be moved" — "no nos moverán"

    5) (=motivate)

    to move sb to do sth — mover or inducir a algn a hacer algo

    I'll do it when the spirit moves me — hum lo haré cuando sienta la revelación divina hum

    6) (emotionally) conmover, emocionar

    to be easily moved — ser impresionable, ser sensible

    to move sb to tears/anger — hacer llorar/enfadar a algn

    7) frm (=propose)

    to move that... — proponer que...

    8) (Comm) [+ merchandise] colocar, vender
    3. VI
    1) (gen) moverse

    move! — ¡muévete!, ¡menéate!

    don't move! — ¡no te muevas!

    • to move freely — [piece of machinery] tener juego; [person, traffic] circular libremente

    • I won't move from here — no me muevo de aquí

    • to move in high society — frecuentar la buena sociedad

    • let's move into the garden — vamos al jardín

    • keep moving! — ¡no te pares!; (order from traffic policeman) ¡circulen!

    • the procession moved slowly out of sight — la procesión avanzaba lentamente hasta que desapareció en la distancia

    • it's time we were moving — es hora de irnos

    • she moved to the next room — pasó a la habitación de al lado

    • he moved slowly towards the door — avanzó or se acercó lentamente hacia la puerta

    to move to or towards independence — avanzar or encaminarse hacia la independencia

    2) (=move house) mudarse, trasladarse

    • the family moved to a new house — la familia se mudó or se trasladó a una casa nueva

    to move to the country — mudarse or trasladarse al campo

    3) (=travel) ir; (=be in motion) estar en movimiento

    he was certainly moving! * — ¡iba como el demonio!

    4) (Comm) [goods] venderse
    5) (=progress)
    6) (in games) jugar, hacer una jugada

    who moves next? — ¿a quién le toca jugar?

    white moves — (Chess) blanco juega

    7) (=take steps) dar un paso, tomar medidas
    * * *
    [muːv]
    I
    1) ( movement) movimiento m

    she made a move to get up/for the door — hizo ademán de levantarse/ir hacia la puerta

    on the move: she's always on the move siempre está de un lado para otro; to get a move on — (colloq) darse* prisa, apurarse (AmL)

    2) ( change - of residence) mudanza f, trasteo m (Col); (- of premises) traslado m, mudanza f
    3)
    a) (action, step) paso m; ( measure) medida f

    what's the next move? — ¿cuál es el siguiente paso?, ¿ahora qué hay que hacer?

    to make the first move — dar* el primer paso

    b) (in profession, occupation)
    4) ( Games) movimiento m, jugada f

    whose move is it? — ¿a quién le toca mover or jugar?


    II
    1.
    1)

    he moved nearer the fire — se acercó or se arrimó al fuego

    to move to a new job/school — cambiar de trabajo/colegio

    b) (change location, residence) mudarse, cambiarse; see also move in, move out
    2) ( change position) moverse*

    don't you move, I'll answer the door — tú tranquilo, que voy yo a abrir la puerta

    3) (proceed, go)

    the procession/vehicle began to move — la procesión/el vehículo se puso en marcha

    we moved aside o to one side — nos apartamos, nos hicimos a un lado

    4) (advance, develop)

    to move with the times — mantenerse* al día

    5) ( carry oneself) moverse*
    6) ( go fast) (colloq) correr
    7) (take steps, act)
    8) ( Games) mover*, jugar*
    9) ( circulate socially) moverse*

    2.
    vt
    1) (transfer, shift position of)

    why have you moved the television? — ¿por qué has cambiado la televisión de sitio or de lugar?

    I can't move my leg/neck — no puedo mover la pierna/el cuello

    2)
    a) ( transport) transportar, trasladar
    b) (relocate, transfer) trasladar
    c) (change residence, location)

    to move house — (BrE) mudarse de casa

    3)
    a) ( arouse emotionally) conmover*, emocionar

    to move somebody to tears — hacer* llorar a alguien de la emoción

    b) ( prompt)

    to move somebody to + inf: this moved her to remonstrate — esto la indujo a protestar

    4) ( propose) (Adm, Govt) proponer*
    5) ( Games) mover*
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:

    English-spanish dictionary > move

  • 7 serve

    sə:v
    1. verb
    1) (to work for a person etc eg as a servant: He served his master for forty years.) servir
    2) (to distribute food etc or supply goods: She served the soup to the guests; Which shop assistant served you (with these goods)?) servir
    3) (to be suitable for a purpose: This upturned bucket will serve as a seat.) servir (de)
    4) (to perform duties, eg as a member of the armed forces: He served (his country) as a soldier for twenty years; I served on the committee for five years.) servir, prestar servicio
    5) (to undergo (a prison sentence): He served (a sentence of) six years for armed robbery.) cumplir
    6) (in tennis and similar games, to start the play by throwing up the ball etc and hitting it: He served the ball into the net; Is it your turn to serve?) sacar

    2. noun
    (act of serving (a ball).) servicio
    - serving
    - it serves you right
    - serve an apprenticeship
    - serve out
    - serve up
    serve1 n saque
    whose serve is it? ¿a quién le toca sacar?
    serve2 vb
    1. servir
    eat what you want, serve yourselves comed lo que queráis, servíos vosotros mismos
    2. atender
    3. sacar
    tr[sɜːv]
    1 (work for) servir (as, de)
    2 (customer) servir, atender; (food, drink) servir
    ■ are you being served? ¿le atienden?
    ■ dinner is served at 8.00 pm se sirve la cena a les 8.00
    ■ we can't serve alcohol after 11.00 pm no podemos servir alcohol después de las 11.00
    3 (be useful to) servir, ser útil
    4 (provide with service) prestar servicio a
    6 SMALLLAW/SMALL (summons, writ, court order, etc) entregar, hacer entrega de
    ■ he was served with a summons fue citado para comparecer ante del juez, recibió una citación judicial
    7 (tennis) sacar, servir
    1 (work for) servir
    2 (in shop) atender; (food, drink) servir
    ■ who wants to serve? ¿quién quiere servir?
    3 (be useful to) servir (as, de)
    4 (tennis) servir, sacar
    \
    SMALLIDIOMATIC EXPRESSION/SMALL
    if my memory serves me right/well si no me falla la memoria, si mal no recuerdo
    to serve at mass ayudar en misa
    to serve somebody right tenerlo bien merecido alguien
    to serve time cumplir una condena
    serve ['sərv] v, served ; serving vi
    1) : servir
    to serve in the navy: servir en la armada
    to serve on a jury: ser miembro de un jurado
    2) do, function: servir
    to serve as: servir de, servir como
    3) : sacar (en deportes)
    serve vt
    1) : servir
    to serve God: servir a Dios
    2) help: servir
    it serves no purpose: no sirve para nada
    3) : servir (comida o bebida)
    dinner is served: la cena está servida
    4) supply: abastecer
    5) carry out: cumplir, hacer
    to serve time: servir una pena
    6)
    to serve a summons : entregar una citación
    n.
    • servicio (Tenis) (•Deporte•) s.m.
    n.
    • saco s.m.
    • saque s.m.
    • saque en el tenis s.m. (Tennis)
    v.
    • sacar (Tenis) (•Deporte•) v.
    v.
    • abastecer v.
    • asistir v.
    • ayudar v.
    • escanciar v.
    • estar al servicio de v.
    • ser útil a v.
    • servir v.

    I
    1. sɜːrv, sɜːv
    1) ( work for) \<\<God/monarch/party\>\> servir* a
    2) (help, be useful to) servir*

    if (my) memory serves me correctly — si la memoria me es fiel, si la memoria no me falla

    it serves her right! — se lo merece!, lo tiene bien merecido!, le está bien empleado! (Esp)

    3)
    a) ( Culin) \<\<food/drink\>\> servir*

    serves four — ( in recipe) para cuatro personas; ( on packet) cuatro raciones or porciones

    dinner is served — (frml) la cena está servida

    b) ( in shop) (BrE) atender*

    are you being served? — ¿lo atienden?

    4) ( Transp)

    the bus route serving Newtown — el servicio or la línea de autobuses que va a Newtown

    5) ( Law) \<\<summons/notice/order\>\> entregar*, hacer* entrega de

    to serve something on somebody to serve somebody with something: they served a summons on all the directors todos los directivos recibieron una citación judicial; she was served with divorce papers — recibió notificación de la demanda de divorcio

    6) ( complete) \<\<apprenticeship\>\> hacer*; \<\<sentence\>\> cumplir

    2.
    vi
    1)
    a) ( be servant) (liter) servir*
    b) ( in shop) (BrE) atender*
    c) ( distribute food) servir*
    2) (spend time, do duty)

    to serve in the army — servir* en el ejército

    to serve on a committee — integrar una comisión, ser* miembro de una comisión

    3) (have effect, function)

    to serve to + INF — servir* para + inf

    let this serve as a warning — que esto te (or les etc) sirva de advertencia

    4) ( Sport) sacar*, servir*
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:

    II
    noun servicio m, saque m
    [sɜːv]
    1. VT
    1) (=work for) [+ employer, God, country] servir a

    he served his country well — sirvió dignamente a la patria, prestó valiosos servicios a la patria

    2) (=be used for, be useful as) servir

    that serves to explain... — eso sirve para explicar...

    • it serves its/my purpose — viene al caso

    • it serves you right — te lo mereces, te lo tienes merecido, te está bien empleado

    it served him right for being so greedy — se lo mereció por ser tan glotón, le está bien empleado por glotón

    3) (in shop, restaurant) [+ customer] servir, atender; [+ food, meal] servir

    are you being served, madam? — ¿le están atendiendo, señora?

    4) (=complete) cumplir, hacer

    • to serve ten years in the army — servir diez años en el ejército

    • to serve a prison sentence, serve time (in prison) — cumplir una condena or una pena de cárcel

    5) (Jur) [+ writ, summons] entregar
    6) (Travel)
    7) (Culin) (=be enough for)
    8) (Tennis etc)

    to serve the ball — servir (la bola), sacar

    2. VI
    1) [servant, soldier] servir

    to serve on a committee/jury — ser miembro de una comisión/un jurado

    2) (at mealtime) servir

    shall I serve? — ¿sirvo?

    3) (in shop) atender
    4) (=be useful)

    to serve for or as — servir de

    it serves to show that... — sirve para demostrar que...

    5) (Tennis) sacar
    3.
    N (Tennis etc) servicio m, saque m

    whose serve is it? — ¿quién saca?, ¿de quién es el servicio?

    he has a strong serve — tiene un servicio or saque muy fuerte

    * * *

    I
    1. [sɜːrv, sɜːv]
    1) ( work for) \<\<God/monarch/party\>\> servir* a
    2) (help, be useful to) servir*

    if (my) memory serves me correctly — si la memoria me es fiel, si la memoria no me falla

    it serves her right! — se lo merece!, lo tiene bien merecido!, le está bien empleado! (Esp)

    3)
    a) ( Culin) \<\<food/drink\>\> servir*

    serves four — ( in recipe) para cuatro personas; ( on packet) cuatro raciones or porciones

    dinner is served — (frml) la cena está servida

    b) ( in shop) (BrE) atender*

    are you being served? — ¿lo atienden?

    4) ( Transp)

    the bus route serving Newtown — el servicio or la línea de autobuses que va a Newtown

    5) ( Law) \<\<summons/notice/order\>\> entregar*, hacer* entrega de

    to serve something on somebody to serve somebody with something: they served a summons on all the directors todos los directivos recibieron una citación judicial; she was served with divorce papers — recibió notificación de la demanda de divorcio

    6) ( complete) \<\<apprenticeship\>\> hacer*; \<\<sentence\>\> cumplir

    2.
    vi
    1)
    a) ( be servant) (liter) servir*
    b) ( in shop) (BrE) atender*
    c) ( distribute food) servir*
    2) (spend time, do duty)

    to serve in the army — servir* en el ejército

    to serve on a committee — integrar una comisión, ser* miembro de una comisión

    3) (have effect, function)

    to serve to + INF — servir* para + inf

    let this serve as a warning — que esto te (or les etc) sirva de advertencia

    4) ( Sport) sacar*, servir*
    •
    Phrasal Verbs:

    II
    noun servicio m, saque m

    English-spanish dictionary > serve

  • 8 buscar

    v.
    1 to look.
    2 to look for.
    estoy buscando trabajo I'm looking for work
    se fue a buscar fortuna a América he went to seek his fortune in America
    María busca su bolso Mary looks for her purse.
    3 to look up.
    Busca esa palabra en el diccionario Look up that word in the dictionary.
    4 to search for (computing).
    El detective buscó incansablemente The detective searched tirelessly.
    5 to push, to try the patience of (informal) (provocar).
    buscar bronca/camorra to look for trouble
    6 to pick up.
    voy a buscar el periódico I'm going for the paper o to get the paper
    ir a buscar a alguien to pick somebody up
    pasará a buscarnos a las nueve she'll pick us up at nine
    7 to seek to, to attempt to, to try to, to try how to.
    Ese plan busca destruirnos That plan seeks to destroy us.
    * * *
    Conjugation model [ SACAR], like link=sacar sacar
    1 (gen) to look for, search for
    2 (en lista, índice etc) to look up
    3 (ir a coger) to go and get, fetch
    ■ busca un médico, ¡rápido! fetch a doctor, quick!
    4 (recoger) to pick up
    ■ iré a buscarte a la estación I'll pick you up at the station, I'll meet you at the station
    5 (intentar conseguir) to try to achieve
    1 (mirar) to look
    \
    buscársela familiar to be looking for trouble
    buscarse la vida familiar to try and earn one's living
    'Se busca...' "... wanted"
    * * *
    verb
    1) to look for, seek
    * * *
    1. VT
    1) (=tratar de encontrar)
    a) [+ persona, objeto perdido, trabajo] to look for

    llevo meses buscando trabajo — I've been job-hunting for months, I've been looking for a job for months

    el ejército busca a un comando enemigo — the army is searching for o looking for an enemy commando unit

    "se busca piso" — "flat wanted"

    "chico busca chica" — "boy seeks girl"

    b) [en diccionario, enciclopedia] to look up
    c) [con la vista] to try to spot, look for

    lo busqué entre el público pero no lo vi — I tried to spot him o looked for him in the crowd but I didn't see him

    2) (=tratar de conseguir) [+ solución] to try to find

    • buscar excusas — to make excuses

    • buscar hacer algo — to seek to do sth, try to do sth

    siempre buscaba hacerlo lo mejor posible — she always sought o tried to do the best possible thing

    • ir a buscar algo/a algn, ha ido a buscar una servilleta — she's gone to fetch o get a napkin

    ve a buscar a tu madre — go and fetch o get your mother

    vino buscando pelea — he was looking for trouble o a fight, he was spoiling for a fight *

    3) (=recoger) to pick up, fetch

    ¿vais a ir a buscarme a la estación? — are you going to pick me up o fetch me from the station?

    4) (Inform) to search
    5) (=preguntar por) to ask for

    ¿quién me busca? — who is asking for me?

    2.

    ya puedes dejar de buscar, aquí tienes las llaves — you can stop looking, here are the keys

    ¿has buscado bien? — have you looked properly?

    ¡busca! — [al perro] fetch!

    3.
    See:
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) <persona/objeto> to look for; <fama/fortuna> to seek; <trabajo/apartamento/solución> to look for, try to find

    la policía lo está buscando — the police are looking for him, he's wanted by the police

    b) (en libro, lista) to look up
    2)
    a) ( recoger) to collect, pick up
    b) ( conseguir y traer) to get

    fue a buscar un médico/un taxi — he went to get a doctor/a taxi

    3)

    ¿qué buscas con eso? — what are you trying to achieve by that?

    buscar + inf — to try to + inf, set out to + inf

    el libro busca destruir ese mito — the book sets out o tries o attempts to explode that myth

    b) ( provocar) <bronca/camorra> to look for
    2.
    buscar vi to look

    busca en el cajón — look o have a look in the drawer

    ¿has buscado bien? — have you looked properly?

    el que busca encuentra or busca y encontrarás — seek and ye shall find

    3.
    buscarse v pron
    1) ( intentar encontrar) to look for
    2) < problemas>

    no quiero buscarme complicaciones/problemas — I don't want any trouble

    tú te lo has buscado — you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right

    buscársela(s) — (fam)

    te la estás buscando — you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it (colloq)

    * * *
    = chase, dig out, dig up, find, hunt, investigate, locate, look for, look out, look under, look up, probe for, prowl through, search (for), seek (after), seek out, trace, track, trawl, burrow through, woo, root out, look out for, go for, look (a)round, fish (for), track down, jockey for, search out, line up, check for, forage, perform + search.
    Ex. Also, in controlled indexing language data bases, there is often an assumption that a user will be prepared to chase strings of references or to consult a sometimes complex thesaurus.
    Ex. I would also have dug out information references to which readers can be directed who want to know more about the setting.
    Ex. The list of changed headings is almost literally endless if you have the patience to dig them all up.
    Ex. The command function ' FIND' is used to input a search term.
    Ex. Nonetheless, we would still not wish to hunt through the file in order to change all subdivisions of that heading.
    Ex. Kaiser also investigated the effect of grouping subheadings of a subject.
    Ex. This order suffices for a list whose purpose is to identify and locate documents, whose bibliographic details are already known.
    Ex. A user might start by looking for a map of London, when he really wants a map of Camden.
    Ex. Discovering these tales, looking out printed versions and comparing them with the oral tradition would have introduced us step by step into the rich lode of folklore.
    Ex. In a printed catalogue or index a user is constrained to look under the headings in the catalogue.
    Ex. If so, the call number of the document is looked up and displayed.
    Ex. No one complained about Duff to her, and she decided not to probe for discontents.
    Ex. A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.
    Ex. This access is achieved by organising the tools so that a user may search under a specific access point or heading or index term, for example, subject term, author, name, title, date.
    Ex. A popular book will always be sought after by public librarians.
    Ex. Her article urges librarians not to buy inferior biographies simply to fill gaps in their collections but to seek out the best of the genre.
    Ex. The author approach remains an important means of tracing a specific document.
    Ex. The index fields are used for tracking annual indexes.
    Ex. The Internet search engines, such as AltaVista and Excite, send out robots or Web crawlers to trawl the Internet and automatically index the files that they find.
    Ex. This article explains how to use gophers to burrow through the Internet.
    Ex. Rumour had it that he was being wooed by Technicomm, Inc.
    Ex. The article has the title ' Rooting out journals on the Net'.
    Ex. Panellists presented the criteria they adopted and features they looked out for when selecting a library automation system.
    Ex. In an exclusive conversation Gates reveals where he goes for information knowledge, insights and ideas.
    Ex. One has only to look around in bookshops to see how many paperbacks on show have film or TV links.
    Ex. The article 'Catfish ain't ugly' reviews the range of Web sites providing information about the catfish in the USA and places to go to fish for catfish.
    Ex. In stepping away from the genre's glamorous robberies and flashy lifestyle, this stealthy, potent movie tracks down the British gangster icon to its inevitable end.
    Ex. Librarians are not yet very successful in jockeying for position and power in the political world.
    Ex. On any one occasion there will always be children who do not want to borrow or buy, but they are still learning to live with books and how to search out the ones that interest them.
    Ex. The actress flaked out again and the director is trying to line up a replacement.
    Ex. This was important before computers were invented, when calculations were all done by hand, and also were done repeatedly to check for calculation errors.
    Ex. We both woke up bright and early to forage for food nearby, which was a breeze.
    Ex. When viewing a record, you can also display its references and perform citation searches directly from the reference display.
    ----
    * buscando = in search of.
    * buscando como loco = in hot pursuit of.
    * buscar amparo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar apoyo = line up + support.
    * buscar a tientas = grope (for/toward).
    * buscar a través de los índices = browse.
    * buscar ayuda = seek + assistance, seek + help.
    * buscar cobijo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar con ahínco = look + hard.
    * buscar detenidamente = look + hard.
    * buscar el apoyo de = woo.
    * buscar el camino = wind + Posesivo + way.
    * buscar el modo de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar el origen de = trace + the origin of.
    * buscar el origen de la relación entre = trace + the relationship between.
    * buscar el peligro = court + danger, flirt with + danger.
    * buscar empleo = seek + employment.
    * buscar en = sift through, search through.
    * buscar en Google = google.
    * buscar en las posas entre las rocas de la orilla = rock-pool.
    * buscar en otro sitio = go + elsewhere.
    * buscar entre la basura = scavenge.
    * buscar en varios + Nombre + a la vez = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar información = mine + information, seek + information.
    * buscar interiormente = probe + Reflexivo + for.
    * buscar la controversia = court + controversy.
    * buscar la fama = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la forma de = look for + ways to.
    * buscar la forma de + Infinitivo = develop + way of + Gerundio.
    * buscar la identidad de uno = trace + Posesivo + identity.
    * buscar la manera de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar la noticia = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la oportunidad = make + an opportunity.
    * buscar la protección de = burrow back into.
    * buscarle cinco pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscarle los tres pies al gato = nitpick.
    * buscarle tres pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscar los servicios de = engage.
    * buscar material = pursue + material.
    * buscar oro = pan for + gold.
    * buscar placer = seek + pleasure.
    * buscar por autor y título = search by + name-title key.
    * buscar por título = search by + title key.
    * buscar por todas partes = scour + Nombre + for.
    * buscar por todo el mundo = search + the world (over).
    * buscar por todo + Nombre = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar problemas = ask for + trouble, court + disaster, make + trouble.
    * buscar razones que expliquen Algo = ascribe + reasons to.
    * buscar refugio = seek + shelter.
    * buscar satisfacción = seek + satisfaction.
    * buscárselo = have it + coming.
    * buscar simultáneamente en varios sitios = cross-search [cross search].
    * buscar solución = seek + solution.
    * buscar trabajo = seek + employment.
    * buscar trabajo en la calle = work + the streets.
    * buscar una forma de hacer Algo = develop + way + to make + Nombre, develop + way + to make + Nombre.
    * buscar una oportunidad = look for + an opportunity.
    * buscar una respuesta = pursue + answer.
    * buscar una solución = contrive + solution.
    * buscar y encontrar = match.
    * en busca de quimeras = in pursuit of + windmills.
    * encargado de buscar a los alumnos que hacen novillos = truant officer.
    * en el que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * estar siempre buscando = be on the lookout for.
    * hallar lo buscado = achieve + match.
    * mandar a buscar = send for.
    * no buscarle las pulgas al perro = let + sleeping dogs lie.
    * no poderse buscar = be unsearchable.
    * peinar en busca de = scour + Nombre + for.
    * que busca el beneficio propio = self-serving.
    * que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * respuesta + buscar = answer + lie.
    * saber buscar con inteligencia = be search-savvy.
    * * *
    1.
    verbo transitivo
    a) <persona/objeto> to look for; <fama/fortuna> to seek; <trabajo/apartamento/solución> to look for, try to find

    la policía lo está buscando — the police are looking for him, he's wanted by the police

    b) (en libro, lista) to look up
    2)
    a) ( recoger) to collect, pick up
    b) ( conseguir y traer) to get

    fue a buscar un médico/un taxi — he went to get a doctor/a taxi

    3)

    ¿qué buscas con eso? — what are you trying to achieve by that?

    buscar + inf — to try to + inf, set out to + inf

    el libro busca destruir ese mito — the book sets out o tries o attempts to explode that myth

    b) ( provocar) <bronca/camorra> to look for
    2.
    buscar vi to look

    busca en el cajón — look o have a look in the drawer

    ¿has buscado bien? — have you looked properly?

    el que busca encuentra or busca y encontrarás — seek and ye shall find

    3.
    buscarse v pron
    1) ( intentar encontrar) to look for
    2) < problemas>

    no quiero buscarme complicaciones/problemas — I don't want any trouble

    tú te lo has buscado — you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right

    buscársela(s) — (fam)

    te la estás buscando — you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it (colloq)

    * * *
    = chase, dig out, dig up, find, hunt, investigate, locate, look for, look out, look under, look up, probe for, prowl through, search (for), seek (after), seek out, trace, track, trawl, burrow through, woo, root out, look out for, go for, look (a)round, fish (for), track down, jockey for, search out, line up, check for, forage, perform + search.

    Ex: Also, in controlled indexing language data bases, there is often an assumption that a user will be prepared to chase strings of references or to consult a sometimes complex thesaurus.

    Ex: I would also have dug out information references to which readers can be directed who want to know more about the setting.
    Ex: The list of changed headings is almost literally endless if you have the patience to dig them all up.
    Ex: The command function ' FIND' is used to input a search term.
    Ex: Nonetheless, we would still not wish to hunt through the file in order to change all subdivisions of that heading.
    Ex: Kaiser also investigated the effect of grouping subheadings of a subject.
    Ex: This order suffices for a list whose purpose is to identify and locate documents, whose bibliographic details are already known.
    Ex: A user might start by looking for a map of London, when he really wants a map of Camden.
    Ex: Discovering these tales, looking out printed versions and comparing them with the oral tradition would have introduced us step by step into the rich lode of folklore.
    Ex: In a printed catalogue or index a user is constrained to look under the headings in the catalogue.
    Ex: If so, the call number of the document is looked up and displayed.
    Ex: No one complained about Duff to her, and she decided not to probe for discontents.
    Ex: A user searching for Smith's 'History as Argument' who was not sure under which subject it would be entered, would have to prowl through a huge number of cards in a card catalog to find the entry under SMITH.
    Ex: This access is achieved by organising the tools so that a user may search under a specific access point or heading or index term, for example, subject term, author, name, title, date.
    Ex: A popular book will always be sought after by public librarians.
    Ex: Her article urges librarians not to buy inferior biographies simply to fill gaps in their collections but to seek out the best of the genre.
    Ex: The author approach remains an important means of tracing a specific document.
    Ex: The index fields are used for tracking annual indexes.
    Ex: The Internet search engines, such as AltaVista and Excite, send out robots or Web crawlers to trawl the Internet and automatically index the files that they find.
    Ex: This article explains how to use gophers to burrow through the Internet.
    Ex: Rumour had it that he was being wooed by Technicomm, Inc.
    Ex: The article has the title ' Rooting out journals on the Net'.
    Ex: Panellists presented the criteria they adopted and features they looked out for when selecting a library automation system.
    Ex: In an exclusive conversation Gates reveals where he goes for information knowledge, insights and ideas.
    Ex: One has only to look around in bookshops to see how many paperbacks on show have film or TV links.
    Ex: The article 'Catfish ain't ugly' reviews the range of Web sites providing information about the catfish in the USA and places to go to fish for catfish.
    Ex: In stepping away from the genre's glamorous robberies and flashy lifestyle, this stealthy, potent movie tracks down the British gangster icon to its inevitable end.
    Ex: Librarians are not yet very successful in jockeying for position and power in the political world.
    Ex: On any one occasion there will always be children who do not want to borrow or buy, but they are still learning to live with books and how to search out the ones that interest them.
    Ex: The actress flaked out again and the director is trying to line up a replacement.
    Ex: This was important before computers were invented, when calculations were all done by hand, and also were done repeatedly to check for calculation errors.
    Ex: We both woke up bright and early to forage for food nearby, which was a breeze.
    Ex: When viewing a record, you can also display its references and perform citation searches directly from the reference display.
    * buscando = in search of.
    * buscando como loco = in hot pursuit of.
    * buscar amparo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar apoyo = line up + support.
    * buscar a tientas = grope (for/toward).
    * buscar a través de los índices = browse.
    * buscar ayuda = seek + assistance, seek + help.
    * buscar cobijo = seek + shelter.
    * buscar con ahínco = look + hard.
    * buscar detenidamente = look + hard.
    * buscar el apoyo de = woo.
    * buscar el camino = wind + Posesivo + way.
    * buscar el modo de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar el origen de = trace + the origin of.
    * buscar el origen de la relación entre = trace + the relationship between.
    * buscar el peligro = court + danger, flirt with + danger.
    * buscar empleo = seek + employment.
    * buscar en = sift through, search through.
    * buscar en Google = google.
    * buscar en las posas entre las rocas de la orilla = rock-pool.
    * buscar en otro sitio = go + elsewhere.
    * buscar entre la basura = scavenge.
    * buscar en varios + Nombre + a la vez = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar información = mine + information, seek + information.
    * buscar interiormente = probe + Reflexivo + for.
    * buscar la controversia = court + controversy.
    * buscar la fama = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la forma de = look for + ways to.
    * buscar la forma de + Infinitivo = develop + way of + Gerundio.
    * buscar la identidad de uno = trace + Posesivo + identity.
    * buscar la manera de = explore + ways in which, explore + ways and means of.
    * buscar la noticia = grab at + a headline.
    * buscar la oportunidad = make + an opportunity.
    * buscar la protección de = burrow back into.
    * buscarle cinco pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscarle los tres pies al gato = nitpick.
    * buscarle tres pies al gato = split + hairs.
    * buscar los servicios de = engage.
    * buscar material = pursue + material.
    * buscar oro = pan for + gold.
    * buscar placer = seek + pleasure.
    * buscar por autor y título = search by + name-title key.
    * buscar por título = search by + title key.
    * buscar por todas partes = scour + Nombre + for.
    * buscar por todo el mundo = search + the world (over).
    * buscar por todo + Nombre = search across + Nombre.
    * buscar problemas = ask for + trouble, court + disaster, make + trouble.
    * buscar razones que expliquen Algo = ascribe + reasons to.
    * buscar refugio = seek + shelter.
    * buscar satisfacción = seek + satisfaction.
    * buscárselo = have it + coming.
    * buscar simultáneamente en varios sitios = cross-search [cross search].
    * buscar solución = seek + solution.
    * buscar trabajo = seek + employment.
    * buscar trabajo en la calle = work + the streets.
    * buscar una forma de hacer Algo = develop + way + to make + Nombre, develop + way + to make + Nombre.
    * buscar una oportunidad = look for + an opportunity.
    * buscar una respuesta = pursue + answer.
    * buscar una solución = contrive + solution.
    * buscar y encontrar = match.
    * en busca de quimeras = in pursuit of + windmills.
    * encargado de buscar a los alumnos que hacen novillos = truant officer.
    * en el que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * estar siempre buscando = be on the lookout for.
    * hallar lo buscado = achieve + match.
    * mandar a buscar = send for.
    * no buscarle las pulgas al perro = let + sleeping dogs lie.
    * no poderse buscar = be unsearchable.
    * peinar en busca de = scour + Nombre + for.
    * que busca el beneficio propio = self-serving.
    * que se puede buscar = searchable.
    * respuesta + buscar = answer + lie.
    * saber buscar con inteligencia = be search-savvy.

    * * *
    buscar [A2 ]
    vt
    1 ‹persona/objeto› to look for; ‹fama/fortuna› to seek; ‹trabajo/apartamento› to look for, try to find; ‹solución› to look for, try to find
    lo he buscado en or por todas partes I've looked o searched for it everywhere
    no trates de buscar excusas don't try to make excuses
    la policía lo está buscando the police are looking for him, he's wanted by the police
    [ S ] se busca wanted
    los hombres como él sólo buscan una cosa men like him are only after one thing ( colloq)
    te buscan en la portería someone is asking for you at reception
    las flores buscan la luz flowers grow towards the light
    la buscaba con la mirada or los ojos he was trying to spot her
    está buscando la oportunidad de vengarse he's looking for a chance to get his own back ( colloq)
    busca una manera más fácil de hacerlo try and find an easier way of doing it
    2 (en un libro, una lista) to look up
    busca el número en la guía look up the number in the directory
    B
    1 (recoger) to collect, pick up
    fuimos a buscarlo al aeropuerto we went to pick him up from o fetch him from o collect him from o meet him at the airport
    vengo a buscar mis cosas I've come to collect o pick up my things
    fue a buscar un médico he went to get a doctor, he fetched a doctor
    salió a buscar un taxi/el pan he went to get a taxi/the bread
    sube a buscarme las tijeras go up and get me o bring me o fetch me the scissors
    C
    1
    (intentar conseguir): una ley que busca la igualdad de (los) sexos a law which aims to achieve sexual equality o equality between the sexes
    ¿qué buscas con eso? what are you trying to achieve by that?
    tiene cuatro hijas y busca el varón ( fam); she has four girls and she's trying for a boy
    buscar + INF to try to + INF, set out to + INF
    el libro busca destruir ese mito the book sets out o tries o attempts to explode that myth
    2 (provocar) ‹bronca/camorra› to look for
    siempre están buscando pelea they're always looking o spoiling for a fight
    me está buscando y me va a encontrar he's looking for trouble and he's going to get it
    ■ buscar
    vi
    to look
    busca en el cajón look o have a look in the drawer
    ¿has buscado bien? have you looked properly?, have you had a proper look?
    ¡busca! ¡busca! (a un perro) fetch!
    A (intentar encontrar) to look for
    debería buscarse a alguien que le cuidara los niños she should look for o find somebody to look after the children
    B ‹complicaciones/problemas›
    no quiero buscarme complicaciones I don't want any trouble
    tú te lo has buscado you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right
    se está buscando problemas she's asking for trouble
    buscársela(s) ( fam): te la estás buscando you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it ( colloq)
    no te quejes, la verdad es que te la buscaste don't complain, the truth is you had it coming to you o you brought it on yourself ( colloq)
    * * *

     

    Multiple Entries:
    buscar    
    buscar algo
    buscar ( conjugate buscar) verbo transitivo
    1

    ‹fama/fortuna› to seek;

    b) (en libro, lista) to look up;


    2



    (— en tren, a pie) I went to meet him at the airport;
    ◊ vengo a buscar mis cosas I've come to collect o pick up my things



    fue a buscar un médico/un taxi he went to get a doctor/a taxi;
    ¿qué buscas con eso? what are you trying to achieve by that?
    verbo intransitivo
    to look;
    ◊ busca en el cajón look o have a look in the drawer

    buscarse verbo pronominal
    1 ( intentar encontrar) to look for
    2 ‹ problemas› to ask for;
    ◊ no quiero buscarme complicaciones/problemas I don't want any trouble;

    tú te lo has buscado you've brought it on yourself, it serves you right;
    buscársela(s) (fam): te la estás buscando you're asking for trouble, you're asking for it (colloq)
    buscar verbo transitivo
    1 to look for
    2 (en la enciclopedia, en el diccionario) to look up
    3 (conseguir, traer) to fetch: ve a buscar un poco de agua, go and fetch some water
    4 (recoger cosas) to collect
    (recoger personas) to pick up: fue a buscarme al trabajo, she picked me up from work
    ' buscar' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    acudir
    - condicionamiento
    - ir
    - mirar
    - sistema
    - tienta
    - aguja
    - andar
    - bronca
    - camorra
    - colocación
    - pelea
    - perro
    - recoger
    - refugio
    - trabajo
    - venir
    English:
    advertise
    - collect
    - dig around
    - down-market
    - expressly
    - fetch
    - fish
    - forage
    - fumble
    - get
    - go for
    - hunt
    - instrumental
    - kerb-crawl
    - look
    - look for
    - look out for
    - look up
    - meet
    - needle
    - pick
    - pick up
    - prospect
    - pursue
    - scout around
    - search
    - search for
    - seek
    - seek after
    - spoil for
    - want
    - afield
    - call
    - collection
    - court
    - dig
    - feel
    - ferry
    - go
    - grope
    - house
    - job
    - nook
    - scout
    - send
    - trouble
    - woo
    * * *
    ♦ vt
    1. [para encontrar] to look for, to search for;
    [provecho, beneficio propio, fortuna] to seek;
    busco apartamento en esta zona I am looking for Br a flat o US an apartment in this area;
    estoy buscando trabajo I'm looking for work;
    la policía busca a los terroristas the police are searching o hunting for the terrorists;
    lo busqué, pero no lo encontré I looked o hunted for it, but I couldn't find it;
    ¿me ayudas a buscar las llaves? can you help me to look for the keys?;
    se fue a buscar fortuna a América he went to seek his fortune in America;
    fui a buscar ayuda I went in search of help;
    ¡ve a buscar ayuda, rápido! quick, go for help o go and find help!;
    es como buscar una aguja en un pajar it's like looking for a needle in a haystack;
    CSur Fam
    buscar la vuelta a algo to (try to) find a way of doing sth
    2. [recoger] to pick up;
    vino a buscar sus libros he came to pick up his books;
    voy a buscar el periódico I'm going for the paper o to get the paper;
    ir a buscar a alguien to pick sb up;
    ya iré yo a buscar a los niños al colegio I'll go and pick the children up from school;
    pasará a buscarnos a las nueve she'll pick us up at nine
    3. [en diccionario, índice, horario] to look up;
    buscaré la dirección en mi agenda I'll look up the address in my address book
    4. [intentar conseguir]
    siempre busca quedar bien con todos she always tries to please everybody;
    no sé qué está buscando con esa actitud I don't know what he is hoping to achieve with that attitude;
    con estas medidas buscan reducir la inflación these measures are intended to reduce inflation, with these measures they are seeking to reduce inflation;
    Fam
    ése sólo busca ligar he's only after one thing
    5. Informát to search for
    6. Fam [provocar] to push, to try the patience of;
    no me busques, que me voy a enfadar don't push me o it, I'm about to lose my temper;
    buscar bronca o [m5] camorra to look for trouble
    ♦ vi
    to look;
    busqué bien pero no encontré nada I had a thorough search, but didn't find anything;
    buscamos por toda la casa we looked o searched throughout the house, we searched the house from top to bottom
    * * *
    v/t search for, look for;
    ir/venir a buscar fetch;
    se la estaba buscando he was asking for trouble o for it
    * * *
    buscar {72} vt
    1) : to look for, to seek
    2) : to pick up, to collect
    3) : to provoke
    buscar vi
    : to look, to search
    buscó en los bolsillos: he searched through his pockets
    * * *
    buscar vb
    1. (tratar de encontrar) to look for
    2. (consultar) to look up
    3. (recoger) to pick up / to meet [pt. & pp. met]
    4. (traer) to fetch / to get
    "Se busca" "Wanted"

    Spanish-English dictionary > buscar

  • 9 महा _mahā

    1
    महा A cow.
    2
    महा The substitute of महत् at the beginning of Karmadhāraya and Bahuvrīhi compounds, and also at the beginning of some other irregular words. (Note: The number of compounds of which महा is the first mem- ber is very large, and may be multiplied ad infinitum. The more important of them, or such as have peculiar significations, are given below.)
    -Comp. -अक्षः an epithet of Śiva. ˚पटलिक a chief keeper of archives.
    -अङ्ग a. huge, bulky.
    -(ङ्गः) 1 a camel.
    -2 a kind of rat.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -अञ्जनः N. of a mountain.
    -अत्ययः a great danger or calamity.
    -अध्वनिक a. 'having gone a long way', dead.
    -अध्वरः a great sacrifice.
    -अनसम् 1 a heavy carriage.
    -2 cooking utensils. (
    -सी) a kitchen-maid. (
    -सः, -सम्) a kitchen; सूपानस्य करिष्यामि कुशलो$स्मि महानसे Mb.4.2.2.
    -अनिलः a whirl- wind; महानिलेनेव निदाघजं रजः Ki.14.59.
    -अनुभाव a.
    1 of great prowess, dignified, noble, glorious, magnanimous, exalted, illustrious; ग्रहीतुमार्यान् परिचर्यया मुहुर्महानु- भावा हि नितान्तमर्थिनः Śi.1.17; Ś.3.
    -2 virtuous, righteous, just.
    (-वः) 1 a worthy or respectable person.
    -2 (pl.) people of a religious sect in Mahārāṣtra founded by Chakradhara in the 13th century.
    -अन्तकः 1 death.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -अन्धकारः 1 thick darkness.
    -2 gross (spiritual) ignorance.
    -अन्ध्राः (pl.) N. of a people and their country.
    -अन्वय, -अभिजन a. nobly-born, of noble birth. (
    -यः, -नः) noble birth, high descent.
    -अभिषवः the great extraction of Soma.
    -अमात्यः the chief or prime minister (of a king).
    -अम्बुकः an epithet of Śiva.
    -अम्बुजम् a billion.
    -अम्ल a. very sour. (
    -म्लम्) the fruit of the tamarind tree. अरण्यम् a great (dreary) forest, large forest.
    -अर्घ a. very costly, costing a high price; महार्घस्तीर्थानामिव हि महतां को$प्यतिशयः U.6.11. (
    -र्घः) a kind of quail.
    -अर्घ्य a.
    1 valuable, precious.
    -2 invaluable; ines- timable; see महार्ह below.
    -अर्चिस् a. flaming high.
    -अर्णवः 1 the great ocean.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -अर्थ a.
    1 rich.
    -2 great, noble, dignified.
    -3 important, weighty.
    -4 significant.
    -अर्बुदम् one thousand millions.
    -अर्ह a.
    1 very valuable, very costly; महार्हशय्यापरिवर्तनच्युतैः स्वकेशपुष्पैरपि या स्म दूयते Ku.5.12.
    -2 invaluable, inestimable; महार्हशयनोपेत किं शेषे निहतो भुवि Rām.6.19. 2. (
    -र्हम्) white sandal-wood.
    -अवरोहः the fig-tree.
    -अशनिध्वजः a great banner in the form of the thunderbolt; जहार चान्येन मयूरपत्रिणा शरेण शक्रस्य महाशनि- ध्वजम् R.3.56.
    - अशन a. voracious, gluttonous; Mb. 4.
    -अश्मन् m. a precious stone, ruby.
    -अष्टमी the eighth day in the bright half of Āśvina sacred to Durgā; आश्विने शुक्लपक्षस्य भवेद् या तिथिरष्टमी । महाष्टमीति सा प्रोक्ता......
    -असिः a large sword.
    -असुरी N. of Durgā.
    -अह्नः the afternoon.
    -आकार a. extensive, large, great.
    -आचार्यः 1 a great teacher.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -आढ्य a. wealthy, very rich. (
    -ढ्यः) the Kadamba tree.
    -आत्मन् a.
    1 high-souled, high-minded, magnanimous, noble; अयं दुरात्मा अथवा महात्मा कौटिल्यः Mu.7; द्विषन्ति मन्दाश्चरितं महात्मनाम् Ku.5.75; U.1.49; प्रकृतिसिद्धमिदं हि महात्मनाम् Bh.1.63.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, exalted, eminent; किमाचाराः किमाहाराः क्व च वासो महात्मनाम् Mb.3. 1.4.
    -3 mighty (महाबल); अथायमस्यां कृतवान् महात्मा लङ्केश्वरः कष्टमनार्यकर्म Rām.5.9.74. (-m.)
    1 the Supreme Spirit; युगपत्तु प्रलीयन्ते यदा तस्मिन् महात्मनि Ms.1.54.
    -2 the great principle, i. e. intellect of the Sāṅkhyas. (महात्मवत् means the same as महात्मन्).
    -आनकः a kind of large drum.
    -आनन्दः, -नन्दः 1 great joy or bliss.
    -2 espe- cially, the great bliss of final beatitude.
    (-न्दा) 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 a festival on the ninth day in the bright half of Māgha.
    -आपगा a great river.
    -आयुधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -आरम्भ a. undertaking great works, enterprizing. (
    -म्भः) any great enterprize.
    -आलयः 1 a temple in general.
    -2 a sanctuary, an asylum.
    -3 a great dwelling.
    -4 a place of pilgrimage.
    -5 the world of Brahman.
    -6 the Supreme Spirit.
    -7 a tree &c. sacred to a deity.
    -8 N. of a particular dark fortnight.
    -9 पितृश्राद्ध in the month of Bhādra- pada. (
    -या) N. of a particular deity.
    - आशय a. high- souled, nobleminded, magnanimous, noble; दैवात् प्रबुद्धः शुश्राव वराहो हि महाशयः Ks; राजा हिरण्यगर्भो महाशयः H.4; see महात्मन्.
    (-यः) 1 a noble-minded or magnanimous person; महाशयचक्रवर्ती Bv.1.7.
    -2 the ocean.
    -आस्पद a.
    1 occupying a great position.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -आहवः a great or tumultuous fight.
    -इच्छ a.
    1 magnanimous, noble-minded, high-souled, noble; मही महेच्छः परिकीर्य सूनौ R.18.33.
    -2 having lofty aims or aspirations, ambitious; विद्यावतां महेच्छानां...... नाश्रयः पार्थिवं विना Pt.1.37.
    -इन्द्रः 1 'the great Indra', N. of Indra; इयं महेन्द्रप्रभृतीनधिश्रियः Ku.5.53; R.13.2; Ms.7.7.
    -2 a chief or leader in general.
    -3 N. of a mountain range; पतिर्महेन्द्रस्य महोदधेश्च R.6.54;4.39,43. ˚चापः rain-bow. ˚नगरी N. of Amarāvatī, the capital of Indra. ˚मन्त्रिन् m. an epithet of Bṛihaspati. ˚वाहः the elephant Airāvata; महेन्द्रवाहप्रतिमो महात्मा Mb.9.17.52.
    -इभ्य a. very rich.
    -इषुः a great archer; अधिरोहति गाण्डीवं महेषौ Ki.13.16.
    -इष्वासः a great archer, a great warrior; अत्र शूरा महेष्वासा भामार्जुनसमा युधि Bg.1.4.
    -ईशः, -ईशानः N. of Śiva; महेशस्त्वां धत्ते शिरसि रसराजस्य जयिनीम् Udb. ˚बन्धुः the Bilva tree.
    -ईशानी N. of Pārvatī.
    -ईश्वरः 1 a great lord, sovereign; महेश्वरस्त्र्यम्बक एव नापरः R.; गोप्तारं न निधीनां कथयन्ति महेश्वरं विबुधाः Pt.2.74.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 a god (opp. प्रकृति).
    -5 the Supreme Being (परमात्मा); मायां तु प्रकृतिं विद्यान्मायिनं तु महेश्वरम् Śvet. Up.4.1. ˚सखः N. of Kubera; यया कैलासभवने महेश्वरसखं बली Mb.9.11.55.
    (-री) 1 N. of Durgā.
    -2 a kind of bell-metal.
    -उक्षः (for उक्षन्) a large bull; a full grown or strong bull; महोक्षतां वत्सतरः स्पृशन्निव R.3.32;4.22;6.72; Śi.5.63.
    -उत्पलम् a large blue lotus. (
    -लः) the Sārasa bird.
    -उत्सवः 1 a great festival or occasion of joy; नयनविषयं जन्मन्येकः स एव महोत्सवः Māl.1.36.
    -2 the god of love.
    -उत्साह a. possessed of great energy, energetic, persevering; अहं च कर्णं जानामि...... सत्यसंधं महोत्साहं...... Mb.3.91.2.
    (-हः) 1 perseverance.
    -2 great pride; ये जात्यादिमहो- त्साहान्नरेन्द्रान्नोपयान्ति च । तेषामामरणं भिक्षा प्रायश्चितं विनिर्मितम् ॥ Pt.1.38.
    -उदधिः 1 the great ocean; महोदधेः पूर इवेन्दु- दर्शनात् R.3.17.
    -2 an epithet of Indra. ˚जः a conch- shell, shell.
    - उदय a. very prosperous or lucky, very glorious or splendid, of great prosperity.
    (-यः) 1 (a) great elevation or rise, greatness, prosperity; नन्दस्त्वतीन्द्रियं दृष्ट्वा लोकपालमहोदयम् Bhāg.1.28.1; अपवर्ग- महोदयार्थयोर्भुवमंशाविव धर्मयोर्गतौ R.8.16. (b) great fortune or good luck. (c) greatness, pre-eminence.
    -2 final beatitude.
    -3 a lord, master.
    -4 N. of the district called Kānyakubja or Kanouja; see App.
    -5 N. of the capital of Kanouja.
    -6 sour milk mixed with honey.
    -7 = महात्मन् q. v.; संसक्तौ किमसुलभं महोदयानाम Ki.7.27. ˚पर्वन् a time of union of the middle of श्रवण नक्षत्र and the end of व्यतिपात (generally in the month of माघ or पौष at the beginning of अमावास्या).
    - उदर a. big-bellied, corpulent.
    -(रम्) 1 a big belly.
    -2 dropsy.
    -उदार a.
    1 very generous or magnanimous.
    -2 mighty, powerful.
    -उद्यम a. = महोत्साह q. v; महोद्यमाः कर्म समा- रभन्ते.
    -उद्योग a. very industrious or diligent, hard- working.
    -उद्रेकः a particular measure (= 4 प्रस्थs).
    -उन्नत a. exceedingly lofty. (
    -तः) the palmyra tree.
    -उन्नतिः f. great rise or elevation (fig. also), high rank.
    -उपकारः a great obligation.
    -उपाध्यायः a great preceptor, a learned teacher.
    -उरगः a great serpent; वपुर्महोरगस्येव करालफणमण्डलम् R.12.98.
    -उरस्क a. broad-chested. (
    -स्कः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -उर्मिन् m. the ocean; ततः सागरमासाद्य कुक्षौ तस्य महोर्मिणः Mb.3.2.17.
    -उल्का 1 a great meteor.
    -2 a great fire-brand.
    -ऋत्विज् m. 'great priest', N. of the four chief sacri- ficial priests.
    -ऋद्धि a. very prosperous, opulent. (-f.) great prosperity or affluence.
    -ऋषभः a great bull.
    -ऋषिः 1 a great sage or saint; यस्मादृषिः परत्वेन महांस्त- स्मान्महर्षयः; (the term is applied in Ms.1.34 to the ten Prajāpatis or patriarchs of mankind, but it is also used in the general sense of 'a great sage').
    -2 N. of Sacute;iva.
    -3 of Buddha.
    -ओघ a. having a strong current.
    -घः a very large number; शतं खर्व- सहस्राणां समुद्रमभिधीयते । शतं समुद्रसाहस्रं महौघमिति विश्रुतम् ॥ Rām.6.28.37.
    -ओष्ठ (महोष्ठ) a. having large lips. (
    -ष्ठः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -ओजस् a. very mighty or powerful, possessed of great splendour or glory; महौजसा मानधना धनार्चिताः Ki.1.19. (-m.) a great hero or warrior, a champion. (-n.) great vigour.
    -ओजसम् the discus of Viṣṇu (सुदर्शन). (
    -सी) N. of plant (Mar. कांगणी).
    -ओदनी Asparagus Racemosus (Mar. शतावरी).
    -ओषधिः f.
    1 a very efficacious medicinal plant, a sovereign drug.
    -2 the Dūrvā grass.
    -3 N. of various plants ब्राह्मी, श्वेतकण्टकारी, कटुका, अतिविष &c. ˚गणः a collection of great or medicinal herbs:-- पृश्निपर्णी श्यामलता भृङ्गराजः शतावरी । गुड्चा सहदेवी च महौषधिगणः स्मृतः ॥ cf. also सहदेवी तथा व्याघ्री बला चातिबला त्वचा । शङ्खपुष्पी तथा सिंही अष्टमी च सुवर्चला ॥ महौषध्यष्टकं प्रोक्तं....
    -औषधम् 1 a sovereign remedy, panacea.
    -2 ginger.
    -3 garlic.
    -4 a kind of poison (वत्सनाभ).
    -कच्छः 1 the sea.
    -2 N. of Varuṇa.
    -3 a mountain.
    -कन्दः garlic.
    -कपर्दः a kind of shell.
    -कपित्थः 1 the Bilva tree.
    -2 red garlic.
    -कम्बु a. stark naked. (
    -म्बुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर a.
    1 large-handed.
    -2 having a large revenue.
    -कर्णः an epithet of Śiva.
    -कर्मन् a. doing great works. (-m.) an epithet of Śiva.
    -कला the night of the new moon.
    -कल्पः a great cycle of time (1 years of Brahman); Bhāg.7.15.69.
    -कविः 1 a great poet, a classical poet, such as कालिदास, भवभूति, बाण, भारवि &c.
    -2 an epithet of Śukra.
    -कषायः N. of a plant (Mar. कायफळ).
    -कान्तः an epithet of Śiva. (
    -ता) the earth.
    -काय a. big-bodied, big, gigantic, bulky.
    (-यः) 1 an elephant.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 of Viṣṇu.
    -4 of a being attending on Śiva (= नन्दि).
    -कारुणिक a. exceedingly compassionate.
    -कार्तिकी the night of full-moon in the month of Kārtika.
    -कालः 1 a form of Śiva in his character as the destroyer of the world; महाकालं यजेद्देव्या दक्षिणे धूम्रवर्णकम् Kālītantram.
    -2 N. of a cele- brated shrine or temple of Śiva (Mahākāla) (one of the 12 celebrated Jyotirliṅgas) established at Ujjayinī (immortalized by Kālidāsa in his Meghadūta, which gives a very beautiful description of the god, his temple, worship &c., together with a graphic picture of the city; cf. Me.3-38; also R.6.34); महाकालनिवासिनं कालीविलासिनमनश्वरं महेश्वरं समाराध्य Dk.1.1.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -4 N. of a kind of gourd.
    -5 N. of Śiva's servant (नन्दि). ˚पुरम् the city of Ujjayinī. ˚फलम् a red fruit with black seeds; पक्वं महाकालफलं किलासीत् N.22.29.
    -काली an epithet of Durgā in her terrific form.
    -काव्यम् a great or classical poem; (for a full description of its nature, contents &c., according to Rhetoricians see S. D.559). (The number of Mahākāvyas is usually said to be five:-- रघुवंश, कुमारसंभव, किरातार्जुनीय, शिशुपालवध and नैषधचरित or six, if मेघदूत-- a very small poem or खण़्डकाव्य-- be added to the list. But this enumeration is apparently only traditional, as there are several other poems, such as the भट्टिकाव्य, विक्रमाङ्कदेवचरित, हरविजय &c. which have an equal claim to be considered as Mahākāvyas).
    -कीर्तनम् a house.
    -कुमारः the eldest son of a reigning prince, heir-apparent.
    -कुल, -कुलीन a. of noble birth or descent, sprung from a noble family, nobly born. (
    -लम्) a noble birth or family, high descent.
    -कुहः a species of parasitical worm.
    -कृच्छ्रम् a great penance.
    -केतुः N. of Śiva.
    -केशः, -कोशः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 a large sheath.
    -क्रतुः a great sacrifice; e. g. a horse-sacrifice; तदङ्गमग्ऱ्यं मघवन् महाक्रतोरमुं तुरङ्गं प्रतिमोक्तुमर्हसि R.3.46.
    -क्रमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -क्रोधः an epithet of Śiva.
    -क्षत्रपः a great satrap.
    -क्षीरः sugar-cane.
    -क्षीरा f. a She-buffalo; Nighaṇṭaratnākara.
    -खर्वः, -र्वम् a high number (ten billions ?).
    -गजः a great elephant; see दिक्करिन्.
    -गणपतिः a form of the god Gaṇeśa.
    -गदः fever.
    -गन्ध a. exceedingly fragrant. (
    -न्धः) a kind of cane. (
    -न्धम्) a kind of sandal- wood. (
    -न्धा) N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -गर्तः, -गर्भः -गीतः N. of Śiva.
    -गर्दभगन्धिका N. of a plant, भारङ्गी.
    -गल a. longnecked.
    -गवः Bos gavaeus.
    -गुण a. very efficacious, sovereign (as a medicine); त्वया ममैष संबन्धः कपिमुख्य महागुणः Rām.5.1.12. (
    -णः) a chief quality, cardinal virtue.
    -गुरुः a highly respectable or venerable person; (these are three, the father, mother and preceptor; पिता माता तथाचार्यो महागुरुरिति स्मृतः).
    -गुल्मा the Soma plant.
    -गृष्टिः f. a cow with a large hump.
    -ग्रहः 1 an epithet of Rāhu.
    -2 the sun; महाग्रहग्राहविनष्टपङ्कः Rām.5.5.6.
    -ग्रामः N. of the ancient capital of Ceylon, the modern Māgama.
    -ग्रीवः 1 a camel.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -ग्रीविन् m. a camel.
    -घूर्णा spirituous liquor.
    -घृतम् ghee kept for a long time (for medicinal purposes).
    -घोष a. noisy, loud-sounding. (
    -षम्) a market, fair. (
    -षः) a loud noise, clamour.
    -चक्रम् the mystic circle in the शाक्त ceremonial.
    -चक्रवर्तिन् m. a universal monarch.
    -चण्डा N. of Chāmuṇḍā.
    -चपला a kind of metre.
    -चमूः f. a large army.
    -छायः the fig-tree.
    -जङ्घः a camel.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा 1 a great braid of hair.
    -2 the matted hair of Śiva.
    -जत्रु a. having a great collar-bone. (
    -त्रुः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -जनः 1 a multitude of men, a great many beings, the general populace or public; महाजनो येन गतः स पन्थाः Mb.3.313. 117; आगम्य तु ततो राजा विसृज्य च महाजनम् 6.98.25.
    -2 the populace, mob; विलोक्य वृद्धोक्षमधिष्ठितं त्वया महाजनः स्मेरमुखो भविष्यति Ku.5.7.
    -3 a great man, a distinguished or eminent man; महाजनस्य संसर्गः कस्य नोन्नतिकारकः । पद्मपत्रस्थितं तोयं धत्ते मुक्ताफलश्रियम् Pt.3.6.
    -4 the chief of a caste or trade.
    -5 a merchant, tradesman.
    -जवः an antelope.
    -जातीय a.
    1 rather large.
    -2 of an excellent kind.
    -जालिः, -ली N. of a plant (Mar. सोनामुखी)
    -जिह्वः an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्ञानिन् m.
    1 a very learned man.
    -2 a great sage.
    -3 N. of Śiva.
    -ज्यैष्ठी the day of fullmoon in the month of Jyeṣṭha; ताभिर्दृश्यत एष यान् पथि महाज्यैष्ठीमहे मन्महे N.15.89; पूर्णिमा रविवारेण महाज्यैष्ठी प्रकीर्तिता Agni P.121.63.
    -ज्योतिस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -ज्वरः great affliction.
    -ज्वाल a. very brilliant or shining.
    (-लः) 1 N. of Śiva.
    -2 a sacrificial fire.
    -डीनम् a kind of flight; 'यानं महाडीनमाहुः पवित्रामूर्जितां गतिम्' Mb.8.41.27 (com.).
    -तपस् m.
    1 a great ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -तलम् N. of one of the seven lower regions; see पाताल.
    -तारा N. of a Buddhist goddess.
    -तिक्तः the Nimba tree.
    -तिथिः the 6th day of a lunation.
    -तीक्ष्ण a. exceedingly sharp or pungent. (
    -क्ष्णा) the marking- nut plant.
    -तेजस् a.
    1 possessed of great lustre or splendour.
    -2 very vigorous or powerful, heroic. (-m.)
    1 a hero, warrior.
    -2 fire.
    -3 an epithet of Kārtikeya. (-n.) quick-silver.
    -त्याग, -त्यागिन् a. very generous. (-m.) N. of Śiva.
    -दंष्ट्रः a species of big tiger.
    -दन्तः 1 an elephant with large tusks.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -दण्डः 1 a long arm.
    -2 a severe punishment.
    -दम्भः an epithet of Śiva.
    -दशा the influence exercised (over a man's destiny) by a predominant planet.
    -दानम् the gift of gold equal to one's own weight; अथातः संप्रवक्ष्यामि महादानस्य लक्षणम्.
    -दारु n. the devadāru tree.
    -दुर्गम् a great calamity; Pt.
    -दूषकः a kind of grain.
    -देवः N. of Śiva.
    (-वी) 1 N. of Pārvatī.
    -2 the chief queen.
    -द्रुमः the sacred fig-tree.
    -द्वारम् a large gate, the chief or outer gate of a temple.
    -धन a.
    1 rich.
    -2 expensive, costly; हेमदण्डैर्महाधनैः Rām.7. 77.13.
    (-नम्) 1 gold.
    -2 incense.
    -3 a costly or rich dress.
    -4 agriculture, husbandry.
    -5 anything costly or precious.
    -6 great booty.
    -7 a great battle (Ved.).
    -धनुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -धातुः 1 gold.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -3 lymph.
    -4 N. of Meru.
    -धी a. having a great understanding.
    -धुर्यः a full-grown draught ox.
    -ध्वजः a camel.
    -ध्वनिक a. dead.
    -नग्नः an athlete; Buddh.
    -नटः an epithet of Śiva; महानटः किं नु...... तनोति...... साम्प्रतमङ्गहारम् N.22.7; महानटबाहुनेव बद्धभुजाङ्केन Vās.
    -नदः a great river.
    -नदी 1 a great river, such as Gaṅgā, Kṛiṣṇā; मन्दरः पर्वतश्चाक्षो जङ्घा तस्य महानदी Mb.8.34.2; संभूयाम्भोधिमभ्येति महानद्या नगापगा Śi.2.1.
    -2 N. of a river falling into the bay of Bengal.
    -नन्दा 1 spirituous liquor.
    -2 N. of a river.
    -3 ninth day of the bright half of the month of Māgha; माघमासस्य या शुक्ला नवमी लोकपूजिचा । महानन्देति सा प्रोक्ता....
    -नरकः N. of one of the 21 hells.
    -नलः a kind of reed.
    -नवमी the ninth day in the bright half of Āśvina, sacred to the worship of Durgā ततो$नु नवमी यस्मात् सा महानवमी स्मृता.
    -नाटकम् 'the great drama', N. of a drama, also called Hanumannāṭaka, (being popularly ascribed to Hanumat); thus defined by S. D.:-- एतदेव यदा सर्वैः पताकास्थानकैर्युतम् । अङ्कैश्च दशभिर्धीरा महानाटकमूचिरे ॥
    -नाडी sinew, tendon.
    -नादः 1 a loud sound, uproar.
    -2 a great drum.
    -3 a thunder-cloud.
    -4 a shell.
    -5 an elephant.
    -6 a lion.
    -7 the ear.
    -8 a camel.
    -9 an epithet of Śiva. (
    -दम्) a musical instrument.
    -नाम्नी 1 N. of a परिशिष्ट of Sāmaveda.
    -2 (pl.) N. of 9 verses of Sāmaveda beginning with विदा मघवन् विदा.
    -नायकः 1 a great gem in the centre of a string of pearls.
    -2 a great head or chief.
    -नासः an epithet of Śiva.
    -निद्र a. fast asleep. (
    -द्रा) 'the great sleep', death.
    -निम्नम् intestines, abdomen.
    -नियमः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -निर्वाणम् total extinction of individuality (according to the Buddhists).
    -निशा 1 the dead of night, the second and third watches of the night; महानिशा तु विज्ञेया मध्यमं प्रहरद्वयम्
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -नीचः a washerman.
    -नील a. dark-blue. (
    -लः) a kind of sapphire or emerald; इन्द्रनीलमहानीलमणिप्रवरवेदिकम् Rām.5.9.16; महा- महानीलशिलारुचः Śi.1.16;4.44; R.18.42; Kau. A.2.11. 29. ˚उपलः a sapphire.
    -नृत्यः, -नेत्रः an epithet of Śiva.
    -नेमिः a crow.
    -न्यायः the chief rule.
    -पक्ष a.
    1 having many adherents.
    -2 having a large family or retinue; महापक्षे धनिन्यार्थे निक्षेपं निक्षिपेद् बुधः Ms.8.179.
    (-क्षः) 1 an epithet of Garuḍa.
    -2 a kind of duck. (
    -क्षी) an owl.
    -पङ्क्तिः, -पदपङ्क्तिः a kind of metre.
    -पञ्चमूलम् the five great roots:-- बिल्वो$ग्निमन्थः श्योनाकः काश्मरी पाटला तथा । सर्वैस्तु मिलितैरेतैः स्यान्महापञ्चमूलकम् ॥
    -पञ्चविषम् the five great or deadly poisons:-- शृङ्गी च कालकूटश्च मुस्तको वत्सनाभकः । शङ्खकर्णीति योगो$यं महापञ्चविषाभिधः ॥
    -पटः the skin.
    -पथः 1 chief road, principal street, high or main road; संतानकाकीर्णमहापथं तत् Ku.7.3.
    -2 the passage into the next world, i. e. death.
    -3 N. of certain mountain-tops from which devout persons used to throw themselves down to secure entrance into heaven.
    -4 an epithet of Śiva.
    -5 the long pilgrimage to mount Ke- dāra.
    -6 the way to heaven.
    -7 the knowledge of the essence of Śiva acquired in the pilgrimage to Kedāra.
    -पथिक a.
    1 undertaking great journeys.
    -2 one receiving Śulka (toll) on the high way; cf. Mb.12.76.6 (com. महापथिकः समुद्रे नौयानेन गच्छन् यद्वा महापथि शुल्कग्राहकः)
    -पद्मः 1 a particular high number.
    -2 N. of Nārada.
    -3 N. of one of the nine treasures of Kubera.
    -4 N. of the southernmost elephant supporting the world.
    -5 an epithet of Nanda.
    -6 a Kinnara attendant on Kubera.
    (-द्मम्) 1 a white lotus.
    -2 N. of a city. ˚पतिः N. of Nanda.
    -पराकः a. a particular penance; Hch.
    -पराङ्णः a late hour in the afternoon.
    -पवित्रः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पशुः large cattle; महापशूनां हरणे... दण्डं प्रकल्पयेत् Ms.8.324.
    -पातः a long flight; Pt.2.58.
    -पातकम् 1 a great sin, a heinous crime; ब्रह्महत्या सुरापानं स्तेयं गुर्वङ्गनागमः । महान्ति पातकान्याहुस्तत्संसर्गश्च पञ्चमम् ॥ Ms.1154.
    -2 any great sin or transgression.
    -पात्रः a prime minister.
    -पादः an epithet of Śiva.
    -पाप्मन् a. very sinful or wicked.
    -पुराणम् N. of a Purāṇa; महापुराणं विज्ञेयमेकादशकलक्षणम् Brav. P.
    -पुंसः a great man.
    -पुरुषः 1 a great man, an eminent or distinguished personage; शब्दं महापुरुषसंविहितं निशम्य U. 6.7.
    -2 the Supreme Spirit.
    -3 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुषिकः a worshipper of Viṣṇu; तदहं ते$भिधास्यामि महापौरुषिको भवान् Bhāg.2.1.1.
    -पुष्पः a kind of worm.
    -पूजा great worship; any solemn worship performed on extraordinary occasions.
    -पृष्ठः a camel.
    -पोटगलः a kind of large reed.
    -प्रजापतिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -प्रतीहारः a chief door-keeper.
    -प्रपञ्चः the great universe.
    -प्रभ a. of great lustre. (
    -भः) the light of a lamp.
    -प्रभुः 1 a great lord.
    -2 a king, sovereign.
    -3 a chief.
    -4 an epithet of Indra.
    -5 of Śiva
    -6 of Viṣṇu.
    -7 a great saint or holy man.
    -प्रलयः 'the great dissolution', the total annihilation of the universe at the end of the life of Brahman, when all the lokas with their inha- bitants, the gods, saints &c. including Brahman himself are annihilated; महाप्रलयमारुत...... Ve.3.4.
    -प्रश्नः a knotty question.
    -प्रसादः 1 a great favour.
    -2 a great present (of food offered to an idol); पादोदकं च निर्माल्यं नैवेद्यं च विशेषतः । महाप्रसाद इत्युक्त्वा ग्राह्यं विष्णोः प्रयत्नतः
    -प्रस्थानम् 1 departing this life, death.
    -2 setting out on a great journey for ending life; इहैव निधनं याम महाप्रस्थानमेव वा Rām.2.47.7 (com. महाप्रस्थानं मरणदीक्षा- पूर्वकमुत्तराभिमुखगमनम्); Mb.1.2.365.
    -प्राणः 1 the hard breathing or aspirate sound made in the pronunciation of the aspirates.
    -2 the aspirated letters themselves (pl.); they are:-- ख्, घ्, छ्, झ्, ठ्, ढ्, थ्, ध्, फ्, भ्, श्, ष्, स्, ह्.
    -3 a raven.
    -प्राणता possession of great strength or essence; अन्यांश्च जीवत एव महाप्राणतया स्फुरतो जग्राह K.
    -प्रेतः a noble departed spirit.
    -प्लवः a great flood, deluge;... क्षिप्तसागरमहाप्लवामयम् Śi.14.71.
    -फल a.
    1 bearing much fruit.
    -2 bringing much reward.
    (-ला) 1 a bitter gourd.
    -2 a kind of spear.
    (-लम्) 1 a great fruit or reward.
    -2 a testicle.
    -फेना the cuttle-fish bone.
    -बन्धः a peculiar position of hands or feet.
    -बभ्रुः a kind of animal living in holes.
    -बल a. very strong; नियुज्यमानो राज्याय नैच्छद्राज्यं महाबलः Rām
    (-लः) 1 wind, storm.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -3 a solid bamboo.
    -4 a palm.
    -5 a crocodile.
    -बला N. of a plant; महाबला च पीतपुष्पा सहदेवी च सा स्मृता Bhāva. P. (
    -लम्) lead. ˚ईश्वरः N. of a Liṅga of Śiva near the modern Mahābaleśwara.
    -बाध a. causing great pain or damage.
    -बाहु a. long-armed, powerful. (
    -हुः) an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -बि(वि)लम् 1 the atmosphere.
    -2 the heart.
    -3 a water-jar, pitcher.
    -4 a hole, cave.
    -बिसी a variety of skin (चर्म), a product of द्वादशग्राम in the Himālayas.
    -बी(वी)जः an epithet of Śiva.
    -बी (वी)ज्यम् the perinæum.
    -बुध्न a. having a great bottom or base (as a mountain).
    -बुशः barley.
    -बृहती a kind of metre.
    -बोधिः 1 the great intelligence of a Buddha.
    -2 a Buddha.
    -ब्रह्मम्, -ब्रह्मन् n. the Supreme Spirit.
    -ब्राह्मणः 1 a great or learned Brāhmaṇa.
    -2 a low or contemptible Brāhmaṇa.
    -भटः a great warrior; तदोजसा दैत्यमहाभटार्पितम् Bhāg.
    -भद्रा N. of the river Gaṅgā.
    -भाग a.
    1 very fortunate or blessed, very lucky or prosperous.
    -2 illustrious, distinguished, glo- rious; उभौ धर्मौ महाभागौ Mb.12.268.3; महाभागः कामं नरपतिरभिन्नस्थितिरसौ Ś.5.1; Ms.3.192.
    -3 very pure or holy, highly virtuous; पतिव्रता महाभागा कथं नु विचरिष्यति Mb.4.3.16.
    -भागता, -त्वम्, -भाग्यम् 1 extreme good fortune, great good luck, prosperity.
    -2 great excel- lence or merit.
    -भागवतम् the great Bhāgavata, one of the 18 Purāṇas. (
    -तः) a great worshipper of Viṣṇu.
    -भागिन् a. very fortunate or prosperous.
    -भाण्डम् a chief treasury.
    -भारतम् N. of the celebrated epic which describes the rivalries and contests of the sons of Dhṛitarāṣṭra and Pāṇḍu. (It consists of 18 Parvans or books, and is said to be the composition of Vyāsa; cf. the word भारत also); महत्त्वाद्भारतत्वाच्च महाभारतमुच्यते
    -भाष्यम् 1 a great commentary.
    -2 particularly, the great commentary of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini.
    -भासुरः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -भिक्षुः N. of Śākyamuni.
    -भीता a kind of sensitive plant (लाजाळू).
    -भीमः an epithet of king Śantanu.
    -भीरुः a sort of beetle or fly.
    -भुज a. long-armed, powerful.
    -भूतम् a great or primary element; see भूत; तस्यैतस्य महाभूतस्य निःश्वसितमेतद्यदृग्वेदः Up.; तं वेधा विदधे नूनं महाभूतसमाधिना R.1. 29; Ms.1.6.
    (-तः) 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 a great creature.
    -भोगः 1 a great enjoyment.
    -2 a great coil or hood; great winding.
    -3 a serpent. (
    -गा) an epi- thet of Durgā.
    -मणिः 1 a costly or precious jewel; संस्कारोल्लिखितो महामणिरिव क्षीणो$पि नालक्ष्यते Ś.6.5.
    -2 N. of Śiva.
    -मति a.
    1 high-minded.
    -2 clever. (
    -तिः) N. of Bṛihaspati or Jupiter.
    -मत्स्यः a large fish, sea-monster.
    -मद a. greatly intoxicated. (
    -दः) an elephant in rut.
    -मनस्, -मनस्क a.
    1 high-minded, noble- minded, magnanimous; ततो युधिष्ठिरो राजा धर्मपुत्रो महामनाः Mb.4.1.7.
    -2 liberal.
    -3 proud, haughty. (-m) a fabulous animal called शरभ q. v.
    -मन्त्रः 1 any sacred text of the Vedas.
    -2 a great or efficacious charm, a powerful spell.
    -मन्त्रिन् m. the prime-minister, premier.
    -मयूरी N. of Buddhist goddess.
    -मलहारी a kind of Rāgiṇi.
    -महः a great festive procession; Sinhās.
    -महस् n. a great light (seen in the sky).
    -महोपाध्यायः 1 a very great preceptor.
    -2 a title given to learned men and reputed scholars; e. g. महामहो- पाध्यायमल्लिनाथसूरि &c.
    -मांसम् 'costly flesh', especially human flesh; न खलु महामांसविक्रयादन्यमुपायं पश्यामि Māl.4; अशस्त्रपूतं निर्व्याजं पुरुषाङ्गोपकल्पितम् । विक्रीयते महामांसं गृह्यतां गृह्यतामिदम् 5.12 (see Jagaddhara ad loc.).
    -माघी the full-moon day in the month of Māgha.
    -मात्र a.
    1 great in measure, very great or large.
    -2 most excellent, best; वृष्ण्यन्धकमहामात्रैः सह Mb.1.221.27; 5.22.37.
    (-त्रः) 1 a great officer of state, high state- official, a chief minister; (मन्त्रे कर्मणि भूषायां वित्ते माने परिच्छदे । मात्रा च महती येषां महामात्रास्तु ते स्मृताः); Ms. 9.259; गूढपुरुषप्रणिधिः कृतमहामात्रापसर्पः (v. l. महामात्यापसर्पः) पौरजानपदानपसर्पयेत् Kau. A.1.13.9; Rām.2.37.1.
    -2 an elephant-driver or keeper; मदोन्मत्तस्य भूपस्य कुञ्जरस्य च गच्छतः । उन्मार्गं वाच्यतां यान्ति महामात्राः समीपगाः ॥ Pt.1.161.
    -3 a superintendent of elephants.
    (-त्री) 1 the wife of a chief minister.
    -2 the wife of a spiritual teacher.
    -मानसी N. of a Jain goddess.
    -मान्य a. being in great honour with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6.
    -मायः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -माया 1 worldly illusion, which makes the material world appear really existent.
    -2 N. of Durgā; महामाया हरेश्चैषा यया संमोह्यते जगत् Devīmāhātmya.
    -मायूरम् a particular drug. (
    -री) N. of an amulet and a goddess; Buddh.
    -मारी 1 cholera, an epidemic.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -मार्गः high road, main street. ˚पतिः a superintendent of roads.
    -मालः N. of Śiva.
    -माहेश्वरः a great worshipper of Maheśvara or Śiva.
    -मुखः a crocodile.
    -मुद्रा a parti- cular position of hands or feet (in practice of yoga).
    -मुनिः 1 a great sage.
    -2 N. of Vyāsa.
    -3 an epithet of Buddha.
    -4 of Agastya.
    -5 the coriander plant. (
    -नि n.)
    1 coriander seed.
    -2 any medicinal herb or drug.
    -मूर्तिः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -मूर्धन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -मूलम् a large radish. (
    -लः) a kind of onion.
    -मूल्य a. very costly. (
    -ल्यः) a ruby.
    -मृगः 1 any large animal.
    -2 an elephant,
    -3 the fabulous animal called शरभ.
    -मृत्युः, -मेधः N. of Śiva.
    -मृत्युंजयः a kind of drug.
    -मृधम् a great battle.
    -मेदः the coral tree; महामेदाभिधो ज्ञेयः Bhāva. P.
    -मेधा an epithet of Durgā.
    -मोहः great infatuation or confusion of mind. (ससर्ज) महामोहं च मोहं च तमश्चाज्ञानवृत्तयः Bhāg.3.12.2. (
    -हा) an epithet of Durgā.
    -यज्ञः 'a great sacrifice', a term applied to the five daily sacrifices or acts of piety to be performed by a house-holder; अध्यापनं ब्रह्मयज्ञः पितृयज्ञस्तु तर्पणम् । होमो दैवो (or देवयज्ञः) बलिर्भौतो (or भूतयज्ञः) नृयज्ञो$तिथिपूजनम् ॥ Ms.3.7,71, (for explanation, see the words s. v.).
    -2 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -यमकम् 'a great Yamaka', i. e. a stanza all the four lines of which have exactly the same words, though different in sense; e. g. see Ki.15.52, where विकाशमीयुर्जगतीशमार्गणाः has four different senses; cf. also बभौ मरुत्वान् विकृतः समुद्रः Bk.1.19.
    -यशस् a. very famous, renowned, celebrated.
    -यात्रा 'the great pilgrimage', the pilgrimage to Benares.
    -यानम् N. of the later system of Buddhist teaching, firstly promul- gated by Nāgārjuna (opp. हीनयान).
    -याम्यः an epi- thet of Viṣṇu.
    -युगम् 'a great Yuga', consisting of the four Yugas of mortals, or comprising 4,32, years of men.
    -योगिन् m.
    1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Viṣṇu.
    -3 a cock.
    -योनिः f. excessive dilation of the female organ.
    -रक्तम् coral.
    -रङ्गः a large stage.
    -रजतम् 1 gold; उच्चैर्महारजतराजिविराजितासौ Śi.4.28.
    -2 the thorn-apple.
    -रजनम् 1 safflower.
    -2 gold.
    -3 turmeric; तस्य हैतस्य पुरुषस्य रूपं यथा महारजनं वासः Bṛi. Up.2.3.6.
    -रत्नम् 1 a precious jewel; वज्रं मुक्ता प्रवालं च गोमेदश्चेन्द्रनीलकः ॥ वैडूर्यः पुष्करागश्च पाचिर्माणिक्यमेव च । महारत्नानि चैतानि नव प्रोक्तानि सूरिभिः ॥ Śukra.4.155-56.
    -रथः 1 a great chariot.
    -2 a great warrior or hero; द्रुपदश्च महारथः Bg.1.4; कुतः प्रभावो धनंजयस्य महारथजयद्रथस्य विपत्तिमुत्पादयितुम् Ve.2; दशरथः प्रशशास महारथः R.9.1; Śi.3.22; (a महारथ is thus defined:-- एको दशसहस्राणि योधयेद्यस्तु धन्विनाम् ॥ शस्त्रशास्त्र- प्रवीणश्च विज्ञेयः स महारथः ॥).
    -3 desire, longing; cf. मनोरथ.
    -रवः a frog.
    -रस a. very savoury.
    (-सः) 1 a sugar- cane.
    -2 quicksilver.
    -3 a precious mineral.
    -4 the fruit of the date tree.
    -5 any one of the eight substan- ces given below:-- दरदः पारदं शस्ये वैक्रान्तं कान्तमभ्रकम् । माक्षिकं विमलश्चेति स्युरेते$ष्टौ महारसाः ॥ (
    -सम्) sour ricewater.
    -राजः 1 a great king, sovereign or supreme ruler; पञ्चाशल्लक्षपर्यन्तो महाराजः प्रकीर्तितः Śukra.1.184.
    -2 a respect- ful mode of addressing kings or other great personages (my lord, your majesty, your highness); इति सत्यं महाराज बद्धो$स्म्यर्थेन कौरवैः Mb.
    -3 a deified Jaina teacher.
    -4 a fingernail. ˚अधिराजः a universal emperor, para- mount sovereign. ˚चूतः a kind of mango tree.
    -राजिकः N. of Viṣṇu.
    -राजिकाः (m. pl.) an epithet of a class of gods (said to be 22 or 236 in number.).
    -राज्यम् the rank or title of a reigning sovereign.
    -राज्ञी 1 the reigning or chief queen, principal wife of a king.
    -2 N. of Durgā.
    -रात्रम् midnight, dead of night.
    -रात्रिः, -त्री f.
    1 see महाप्रलय; ब्रह्मणश्च निपाते च महाकल्पो भवेन्नृप । प्रकीर्तिता महारात्रिः.
    -2 midnight.
    -3 the eighth night in the bright half of Āśvina.
    -राष्ट्रः 'the great kingdom', N. of a country in the west of India, the country of the Marāṭhās.
    -2 the people of Mahārāṣṭra; the Marāṭhās (pl.). (
    -ष्ट्री) N. of the principal Prākṛita; dialect, the language of the people of the Mahārāṣṭra; cf. Daṇḍin:-- महाराष्ट्राश्रयां भाषां प्रकृष्टं प्राकृतं विदुः Kāv.1.34.
    -रिष्टः a kind of Nimba tree growing on mountains.
    -रुज्, -ज a. very painful.
    -रुद्रः a form of Śiva.
    -रुरुः a species of antelope.
    -रूप a. mighty in form.
    (-पः) 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 resin.
    -रूपकम् a kind of drama.
    -रेतस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -रोगः a dangerous illness, grievous malady; (these are eight:-- उन्मादो राजयक्ष्मा च श्वासस्त्वग्दोष एव च । मधुमेहश्चाश्मरी च तथो- दरभगन्दरौ ॥).
    -रौद्र a. very dreadful. (
    -द्री) an epithet of Durgā.
    -रौरवः N. of one of the 21 hells; Ms.4.88-9.
    -लक्ष्मी 1 the great Lakṣmī, or Śakti of Nārāyaṇa; सेवे सैरिभमर्दिनीमिह महालक्ष्मीं सरोजस्थिताम्.
    -2 a young girl who represents the goddess Durgā at the Durgā festival.
    -लयः 1 a great world destruction.
    -2 the Supreme Being (महदादीनां लयो यस्मिन्).
    -लिङ्गम् the great Liṅga or Phallus. (
    -ङ्गः) an epithet of Śiva.
    -लोलः a crow.
    -लोहम् a magnet.
    -वंशः N. of a wellknown work in Pali (of the 5th century).
    -वक्षस् m. epithet of Śiva.
    -वनम् a large forest in Vṛindāvana.
    -वरा Dūrvā grass.
    -वराहः 'the great boar', an epithet of Viṣṇu in his third or boar incarnation.
    -वर्तनम् high wages;
    -वल्ली 1 the Mādhavī creeper.
    -2 a large creeping plant.
    -वसः the porpoise.
    -वसुः silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -वाक्यम् 1 a long sentence.
    -2 any continuous composition or literary work.
    -3 a great proposition, principal sentence; such as तत्त्वमसि, ब्रह्मैवेदं सर्वम् &c.
    -4 a complete sentence (opp. अवान्तरवाक्य q. v.); न च महावाक्ये सति अवान्तरवाक्यं प्रमाणं भवति ŚB. on MS.6.4.25.
    -वातः a stormy wind, violent wind; महावाता<?>तैर्महिषकुलनीलैर्जलधरैः Mk.5.22.
    -वादिन् m. a great or powerful disputant.
    -वायुः 1 air (as an element).
    -2 stormy wind, hur- ricane, tempest.
    -वार्तिकम् N. of the Vārtikas of Kātyāyana on Pāṇini's Sūtras.
    -विडम् a kind of factitious salt.
    -विदेहा N. of a certain वृत्ति or condition of the mind in the Yoga system of philosophy.
    -विद्या the great lores; काली तारा महाविद्या षोडशी भुवनेश्वरी । भैरवी छिन्नमस्ता च विद्या धूमवती तथा । बगला सिद्धविद्या च मातङ्गी कमला- त्मिका । एता दश महाविद्याः... ॥
    -विपुला a kind of metre.
    -विभाषा a rule giving a general option or alternative; इति महाविभाषया साधुः.
    -विभूतिः an epithet of Śiva.
    -विषः a serpent having two mouths.
    -विषुवम् the vernal equinox. ˚संक्रान्तिः f. the vernal equinox (the sun's entering the sign Aries).
    -विस्तर a. very extensive or copious.
    -वीचिः N. of a hell.
    -वीरः 1 a great hero or warrior.
    -2 a lion.
    -3 the thunderbolt of Indra.
    -4 an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -5 of Garuḍa.
    -6 of Hanumat.
    -7 a cuckoo.
    -8 a white horse.
    -9 a sacrificial fire.
    -1 a sacrificial vessel.
    -11 a kind of hawk. ˚चरितम् N. of a celebrated drama by Bhavabhūti.
    -वीर्य a. of great valour, very powerful.
    (-र्यः) 1 N. of Brah- man.
    -2 the Supreme Being. (
    -र्या) the wild cotton shrub.
    -2 an epithet of संज्ञा, the wife of the sun.
    -वृषः a great bull.
    -वेग a.
    1 very swift or fleet.
    (-गः) 1 great speed, excessive velocity.
    -2 an ape.
    -3 the bird Garuḍa.
    -वेघः a particular position of hands or feet (in the practice of Yoga).
    -वेल a. billowy.
    -व्याधिः f.
    1 a great disease.
    -2 a very bad kind of leprosy (black leprosy).
    -व्याहृतिः f. a great mystical word, i. e. भूर्, भुवस् and स्वर्.
    -व्रत a. very devotional, rigidly observing vows.
    (-तम्) 1 a great vow, a great reli- gious observance; a vow for not taking even water for a month; महाव्रतं चरेद्यस्तु Mb.12.35.22 (com. महाव्रतं मासमात्रं जलस्यापि त्यागः).
    -2 any great or funda- mental duty; प्राणैरपि हिता वृत्तिरद्रोहो व्याजवर्जनम् । आत्मनीव प्रियाधानमेतन्मैत्रीमहाव्रतम् Mv.5.59; क्रतौ महाव्रते पश्यन् ब्रह्मचारी- त्वरीरतम् N.17.23.
    -व्रतिन् m.
    1 a devotee, an ascetic.
    -2 an epithet of Śiva.
    -शक्तिः 1 an epithet of Śiva.
    -2 of Kārtikeya.
    -शङ्कुः the sine of the sun's eleva- tion.
    -शङ्खः 1 a great conch-shell; पौण्ड्रं दध्मौ महाशङ्खं Bg.1.15; महाशङ्खमयी माला ताराविद्याजपे प्रिया Tantra.
    -2 the temporal bone, forehead.
    -3 a human bone.
    -4 a particular high number.
    -5 one of Kubera's treasures.
    -शठः a kind of thorn-apple.
    -शब्द a. making a loud sound, very noisy, boisterous.
    -शल्कः a kind of sea- crab or prawn; Ms.3.272.
    -शालः a great householder.
    -शालिः a kind of large and sweetsmelling rice.
    -शाल्वणम् ('great fomentation') N. of a remedy; Suśr.
    -शासन a.
    1 exercising great power.
    -2 whose commands are great; त्रैलोक्यघिपतित्वमेव विरसं यस्मिन् महा- शासने Bh.3.8.
    (-नम्) 1 the knowledge of Brahma as expounded in the Upaniṣadas.
    -2 great order of government.
    -शिरस् m. a kind of serpent.
    -शिवरात्रिः N. of a festival on the 14th day of the dark half of Māgha,
    -शुक्तिः f. a pearl-shell.
    -शुक्ला an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -शुभ्रम् silver.
    -शूद्रः (-द्री f.)
    1 a Sūdra in a high position.
    -2 a cowherd.
    -3 an upper servant. (
    -द्री) a female cow-keeper. (
    -द्रा) a Śudra woman in a high position.
    -शून्यम् a particular mental condi- tion of a Yogin.
    -शृङ्गः 1 a species of stag.
    -2 the शरभ animal.
    -श्मशानम् an epithet of Benares.
    -श्यामा the Sissoo tree. (Mar. शिसवी).
    -श्रमणः 1 an epithet of Buddha.
    -2 a Jain monk.
    -श्लक्ष्णा sand.
    -श्वासः a kind of asthma.
    -श्वेता 1 an epithet of Sarasvatī.
    -2 of Durgā.
    -3 white sugar.
    -संहिता great combi- nation.
    -संक्रान्तिः f. the winter solstice.
    -सती a very chaste woman.
    -सत्ता absolute existence.
    -सत्यः an epithet of Yama.
    -सत्त्व a.
    1 noble.
    -2 very strong or powerful.
    -3 just, righteous.
    (-त्त्वः) 1 a large animal.
    -2 N. of Sākyamuni.
    -3 an epithet of Kubera.
    -संधिविग्रहः the office of the minister of peace and war.
    -सन्नः an epithet of Kubera.
    -सन्निः m. (in music) a kind of measure.
    -समुद्रः the great ocean.
    -सर्गः a great or completely new creation (after a complete destruction of the world).
    -सर्जः the bread- fruit or jack-tree.
    -साधनभागः a great executive officer.
    -सांतपनः a kind of very rigid penance; see Ms.11. 218.
    -सांधिविग्रहिकः a minister of peace and war.
    -सामन्तः a great vassal.
    -सामान्यम् the widest genera- lity.
    -सारः a kind of Khadira tree.
    -सारथिः an epithet of Aruṇa.
    -साहसम् great violence or outrage, great audacity.
    -साहसिकः a dacoit, highwayman, a daring robber.
    -सिंहः the fabulous animal called Śarabha.
    -सिद्धिः f. a kind of magical power.
    -सुखम् 1 great pleasure.
    -2 copulation. (
    -खः) a Buddha.
    -सुगन्धम् a fragrant unguent.
    -सुगन्धिः a kind of antidote.
    -सुधा silver; Gīrvāṇa.
    -सुभिक्षम् good times.
    -सूक्तः the composer of the great Sūktas or hymns of the 1th Maṇḍala of the Ṛigveda.
    -सूक्ष्मा sand.
    -सूतः a mili- tary drum.
    -सेनः 1 an epithet of Kārtikeya; महासेन- प्रसूतिं तद्ययौ शरवणं महत् Rām.7.16.1.
    -2 the commander of a large army. (
    -ना) a great army.
    -स्कन्धः a camel.
    -स्थली the earth.
    -स्थानम् a great position.
    -स्नेहः a combination of the 4 kinds of fat.
    -स्मृतिः the Ṣaḍaṅgas and Smṛitis; महास्मृतिं पठेद्यस्तु तथैवानुस्मृतिं शुभाम् Mb.12.2.3.
    -स्रोतस् n. the bowels.
    -स्रग्विन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -स्वनः a kind of drum.
    -हंसः an epithet of Viṣṇu.
    -हविस् n. clarified butter.
    -हस्तः an epithet of Śiva.
    -हासः a loud or boisterous laughter, cachinnation.
    -हिमवत् m. N. of a mountain.
    -ह्रस्वा N. of a plant (Mar. कुहिली).

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > महा _mahā

  • 10 sisto

    sisto, stĭti (Charis. p. 220, and Diom. p. 369, give steti for both sisto and sto, confining stiti to the compounds of both. But steti, as perfect of sisto, is late jurid. Lat., and perh. dub.;

    for steterant,

    Verg. A. 3, 110;

    steterint,

    id. ib. 3, 403; Liv. 8, 32, 12, belong to stare; cf. also Gell. 2, 14, 1 sqq.; and v. Neue, Formenl. 2, 461 sq.), stătum [root stă, strengthened by reduplication; cf. histêmi], used in two general senses, I. To cause to stand, place, = colloco, pono; II. To stand, be placed, = sto.
    I.
    Sistere, in gen., = collocare (in class. prose only in the partic. uses, v. A. 4. C. and D., infra).
    A.
    Causative, with acc.
    1.
    To place = facere ut stet; constr. with in and abl., with abl. alone, and with ad, super, etc., and acc.:

    O qui me gelidis in vallibus Haemi Sistat,

    Verg. G. 2, 489:

    tertia lux classem Cretaeis sistet in oris,

    id. A. 3, 117 (classis stat;

    v. sto): inque tuo celerem litore siste gradum,

    Ov. H. 13, 102 (cf. infra, III. 2. A.):

    jaculum clamanti (al. clamantis) sistit in ore,

    plants the dart in his face, Verg. A. 10, 323:

    disponit quas in fronte manus, medio quas robore sistat,

    Stat. Th. 7, 393:

    (equum ligneum) sacratā sistimus arā,

    Verg. A. 2, 245:

    aeternis potius me pruinis siste,

    Stat. Th. 4, 395: ut stata (est) lux pelago, as soon as light was set ( shone) on the sea, id. ib. 5, 476:

    victima Sistitur ante aras,

    Ov. M. 15, 132:

    quam (suem) Aeneas ubi... sistit ad aram,

    Verg. A. 8, 85:

    post haec Sistitur crater,

    Ov. M. 8, 669: vestigia in altero (monte) sisti (non posse), that no footprints can be placed ( made) on the other mountain, Plin. 2, 96, 98, § 211:

    cohortes expeditas super caput hostium sistit,

    Tac. H. 3, 77; cf. id. A. 12, 13; Stat. Th. 4, 445; Sil. 4, 612. —
    2.
    To place, as the result of guidance or conveyance; hence, to convey, to send, lead, take, conduct to, = facere ut veniat; constr. with in and abl., with abl. alone, and with advv. of place: officio meo ripā sistetur in illā Haec, will be carried by me to, etc., Ov. M. 9, 109:

    terrā sistēre petitā,

    id. ib. 3, 635:

    (vos) facili jam tramite sistam,

    Verg. A. 6, 676:

    ut eum in Syriā aut Aegypto sisterent orabat,

    to convey him to, Tac. H. 2, 9.—So with hic (= in with abl.) or huc (= in with acc.):

    hic siste patrem,

    Sen. Phoen. 121:

    Annam huc siste sororem,

    Verg. A. 4, 634.—
    3.
    To place an army in order of battle, draw up, = instruere:

    aciem in litore sistit,

    Verg. A. 10, 309; cf.:

    sistere tertiam decimam legionem in ipso aggere jubet,

    Tac. H. 3, 21.—
    4.
    Se sistere = to betake one's self, to present one's self, to come (so twice in Cicero's letters):

    des operam, id quod mihi affirmasti, ut te ante Kal. Jan., ubicumque erimus, sistas,

    Cic. Att. 3, 25:

    te vegetum nobis in Graeciā sistas,

    id. ib. 10, 16, 6 (cf. infra, E.):

    hic dea se primum rapido pulcherrima nisu Sistit,

    Verg. A. 11, 853.—
    5.
    With two acc. (cf.: praesto, reddo) = to cause to be in a certain condition, to place, etc.; often with dat. of interest (ante- and post-class., and poet.; cf.

    supra, 4.): ego vos salvos sistam,

    I will place you in safety, see you to a safe place, Plaut. Rud. 4, 4, 5:

    omnia salva sistentur tibi,

    all will be returned to you in good order, id. ib. 5, 3, 3; so,

    suam rem sibi salvam sistam,

    id. Poen. 5, 2, 123; cf.:

    rectius tacitas tibi res sistam, quam quod dictum est mutae mulieri,

    will keep your secrets, id. ib. 4, 2, 54:

    neque (dotem) incolumem sistere illi, et detraxe autument,

    that you deliver it entire to her, id. Trin. 3, 3, 15:

    cum te reducem aetas prospera sistet,

    Cat. 64, 238: tu modo servitio vacuum me siste (= praesta) superbo, set me free from, Prop. 4, 16 (3, 17), 42:

    tutum patrio te limine sistam,

    will see you safe home, Verg. A. 2, 620:

    praedā onustos triumphantesque mecum domos reduces sistatis,

    Liv. 29, 27, 3 Weissenb. ad loc.:

    Pelasgis siste levem campum,

    Stat. Th. 8, 328:

    modo se isdem in terris victorem sisterent,

    Tac. A. 2, 14:

    operā tuā sistas hunc nobis sanum atque validum,

    give him back to us, safe and sound, Gell. 18, 10, 7: ita mihi salvam ac sospitem rempublicam sistere in suā sede liceat, Aug. ap. Suet. Aug. 28.—
    b.
    Neutr, with double nom., = exsistere, to be, to become: judex extremae sistet vitaeque necisque, he will become a judge, etc., Manil. 4, 548 (dub.):

    tempora quod sistant propriis parentia signis,

    id. 3, 529 (dub.; al. sic stant; cf. infra, II.).—
    B.
    As neuter verb, to stand, rest, be placed, lie ( poet.);

    constr. like sto: ne quis mihi obstiterit obviam, nam qui obstiterit, ore sistet,

    will lie on his face, Plaut. Capt. 4, 2, 13 Brix ad loc.: (nemo sit) tantā gloriā... quin cadat, quin capite sistat, will be placed or stand on his head, id. Curc. 2, 3, 8:

    ibi crebro, credo, capite sistebant cadi,

    id. Mil. 3, 2, 36 Lorenz (Brix, hoc illi crebro capite):

    ipsum si quicquam posse in se sistere credis,

    to rest upon itself, Lucr. 1, 1057:

    neque posse in terrā sistere terram,

    nor can the earth rest upon itself, id. 2, 603:

    at conlectus aquae... qui lapides inter sistit per strata viarum,

    id. 4, 415:

    incerti quo fata ferant, ubi sistere detur,

    to rest, to stay, Verg. A. 3, 7; cf.:

    quaesitisque diu terris, ubi sistere detur,

    Ov. M. 1, 307. —
    C.
    As jurid. term.
    1.
    In both a causative and neuter sense = to produce in court, or to appear in court after being bound over by the judge or by promise to the adversary (vadimonium); constr. either absol. or with the dat. of the adversary to whom the promise is made (alicui sisti), to appear upon somebody's demand; also, in judicio sisti. The present active is either used reflexively (se sistere = to appear), or with a transitive object (sistere aliquem = to produce in court one in whose behalf the promise has been made). The present passive, sisti, sistendus, sistitur, = to appear or to be produced. The perfect act., stiti, stitisse, rarely the perfect passive, status sum, = to have appeared, I appeared. So in all periods of the language:

    cum autem in jus vocatus fuerit adversarius, ni eo die finitum fuerit negotium, vadimonium ei faciendum est, id est ut promittat se certo die sisti,

    Gai. 4, 184:

    fit ut Alfenus promittat, Naevio sisti Quinctium,

    that Quinctius would be forthcoming upon Naevius's complaint, Cic. Quint. 21, 67; cf. id. ib. 8, 30 (v. infra, B.):

    testificatur, P. Quinctium non stitisse, et se stitisse,

    id. ib. 6, 25:

    quin puellam sistendam promittat (= fore ut puella sistatur in judicio),

    Liv. 3, 45, 3:

    interrogavit quisquam, in quem diem locumque vadimonium promitti juberet, et Scipio manum ad ipsam oppidi, quod obsidebatur, arcem protendens: Perendie sese sistant illo in loco,

    Gell. 7, 1, 10:

    si quis quendam in judicio sisti promiserit, in eādem causā eum debet sistere,

    Dig. 2, 11, 11:

    si servum in eādem causā sistere promiserit, et liber factus sistatur,... non recte sistitur,

    ib. 2, 9, 5:

    sed si statu liberum sisti promissum sit, in eādem causā sisti videtur, quamvis liber sistatur,

    ib. 2, 9, 6:

    cum quis in judicio sisti promiserit, neque adjecerit poenam si status non esset,

    ib. 2, 6, 4:

    si quis in judicio secundum suam promissionem non stitit,

    ib. 2, 11, 2, § 1; cf. ib. 2, 5, 1; 2, 8, 2; 2, 11, 2, § 3.—
    2.
    Vadimonium sistere, to present one's self in court, thus keeping the solemn engagement (vadimonium) made to that effect; lit., to make the vadimonium stand, i. e. effective, opp. deserere vadimonium = not to appear, to forfeit the vadimonium. The phrase does not occur in the jurists of the Pandects, the institution of the vadimonium being abolished by Marcus Aurelius. It is found in the following three places only: quid si vadimonium capite obvoluto stitisses? Cat. ap. Gell. 2, 14, 1: ut Quinctium sisti Alfenus promitteret. Venit Romam Quinctius;

    vadimonium sistit,

    Cic. Quint. 8, 30:

    ut nullum illa stiterit vadimonium sine Attico,

    Nep. Att. 9; Gai. 4, 185; cf. diem sistere under status, P. a. infra.—
    D.
    Transf., out of judicial usage, in gen., = to appear or present one's self, quasi ex vadimonio; constr. absol. or with dat. of the person entitled to demand the appearance:

    ubi tu es qui me vadatus's Veneriis vadimoniis? Sisto ego tibi me, et mihi contra itidem ted ut sistas suadeo (of a lover's appointment),

    Plaut. Curc. 1, 3, 5; so,

    tibi amatorem illum alacrem vadimonio sistam,

    produce, App. M. 9, p. 227, 14:

    nam promisimus carnufici aut talentum magnum, aut hunc hodie sistere,

    Plaut. Rud. 3, 4, 73:

    vas factus est alter ejus sistendi, ut si ille non revertisset, moriendum esset sibi,

    Cic. Off. 3, 10, 45. —
    E.
    Fana sistere, acc. to Festus anciently used, either = to place ( secure and fix places for) temples in founding a city, or to place the couches in the lectisternia:

    sistere fana, cum in urbe condendā dicitur, significat loca in oppido futurorum fanorum constituere: quamquam Antistius Labeo, in commentario XV. juris pontificii ait fana sistere esse lectisternia certis locis et diebus habere,

    Fest. p. 267 Lind. To this usage Plaut. perh. alludes:

    apud illas aedis sistendae mihi sunt sycophantiae,

    the place about that house I must make the scene of my tricks, Plaut. Trin. 4, 2, 25.—
    F.
    Sistere monumenta, etc., or sistere alone, to erect statues, etc. (= statuere; post-class. and rare;

    mostly in Tac.): ut apud Palatium effigies eorum sisteret,

    Tac. A. 15, 72:

    cum Augustus sibi templum sisti non prohibuisset,

    id. ib. 4 37:

    at Romae tropaea de Parthis arcusque sistebantur,

    id. ib. 15, 18:

    monuere ut... templum iisdem vestigiis sisteretur,

    id. H. 4, 53:

    sistere monumenta,

    Aus. Ep. 24, 55: Ast ego te... Carthaginis arce Marmoreis sistam templis (cf. histanai tina), Sil. 8, 231; v. statuo.
    II.
    Sistere = to cause what is tottering or loose to stand firm, to support or fasten; and neutr., to stand firm.
    A.
    Causative (rare;

    perh. not in class. prose) = stabilire: sucus... mobilis (dentes) sistit,

    Plin. 20, 3, 8, § 15; and trop.: hic (Marcellus) rem Romanam magno turbante tumultu Sistet (cf.: respublica stat;

    v. sto),

    Verg. A. 6, 858; cf.:

    non ita civitatem aegram esse, ut consuetis remediis sisti posset,

    Liv. 3, 20, 8 (where sisti may be impers.; v. infra, III. C.).—
    B.
    Neutr., to stand firm, to last, = stare:

    nec mortale genus, nec divum corpora sancta Exiguom possent horai sistere tempus,

    Lucr. 1, 1016: qui rem publicam sistere negat posse, nisi ad equestrem ordinem judicia referantur, Cotta ap. Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 96, § 223.—
    2.
    Neutr., to stand firm, to resist:

    nec quicquam Teucros Sustentare valet telis, aut sistere contra,

    Verg. A. 11, 873; so with dat. = resistere:

    donec Galba, inruenti turbae neque aetate neque corpore sistens, sella levaretur,

    Tac. H. 1, 35; cf. sisti = resistere, III. B. 1. f. infra.
    III.
    Sistere = to stand still, and to cause to stand still.
    A.
    Neutr. = stare (rare; in Varr., Tac., and the poets).
    a.
    To stand still:

    solstitium dictum est quod sol eo die sistere videatur,

    Varr. L. L. 5, p. 53 (Bip.):

    sistunt amnes,

    Verg. G. 1, 479:

    incurrit, errat, sistit,

    Sen. Herc. Oet. 248.—
    b.
    To remain, stop:

    Siste! Quo praeceps ruis?

    Sen. Thyest. 77; id. Oedip. 1050:

    vis tu quidem istum intra locum sistere?

    will you remain in that position? Tac. A. 4, 40.—
    c.
    Trop., to stop, not to go any farther:

    depunge, ubi sistam,

    Pers. 6, 79:

    nec in Hectore tracto sistere,

    to stop at the dragging of Hector, Stat. Achill. 1, 7.—
    d.
    To cease (dub.):

    hactenus sistat nefas' pius est,

    if his crime ceases here, he will be pious, Sen. Thyest. 744 (perh. act., to stop, end).—
    B.
    Causative (not ante-Aug.; freq. in Tac., Plin., and the poets).
    1.
    To arrest, stop, check an advancing motion.
    a.
    With gradum:

    plano sistit uterque gradum,

    arrest their steps, Prop. 5 (4), 10, 36; Verg. A. 6, 465:

    siste properantem gradum,

    Sen. Herc. Fur. 772:

    repente sistunt gradum,

    Curt. 4, 6, 14. —With pedem, Ov. R. Am. 80.—
    b.
    With fugam, to stop, stay, check, stem, arrest the flight:

    fugam foedam siste,

    Liv. 1, 12, 5:

    si periculo suo fugam sistere posset,

    id. 30, 12, 1; so Curt. 8, 14, 37; 4, 16, 2; 8, 3, 2; Tac. A. 12, 39.—
    c.
    Of vehicles, horses, etc.:

    esseda siste,

    Prop. 2, 1, 76:

    equos,

    Verg. A. 12, 355:

    quadrijugos,

    Stat. Achill. 2, 429; so id. Th. 5, 364.—
    d.
    With iter, to arrest the advance of an army, to halt:

    exercitus iter sistit,

    Tac. H. 3, 50.—
    e.
    With bellum, to halt (cf. infra, D.):

    Aquilejae sisti bellum expectarique Mucianum jubebat,

    Tac. H. 3, [p. 1712] 8.—
    f.
    Of living objects, in gen.
    (α).
    To arrest their course, make them halt:

    aegre coercitam legionem Bedriaci sistit,

    Tac. H. 2, 23:

    festinantia sistens Fata,

    staying the hurrying Fates, Stat. S. 3, 4, 24.—So, se sistere with ab, to desist from:

    non prius se ab effuso cursu sistunt,

    Liv. 6, 29, 3; hence, to arrest by wounding, i. e. to wound or kill:

    aliquem cuspide,

    Sil. 1, 382; 1, 163; so,

    cervum vulnere sistere,

    id. 2, 78.—
    (β).
    To stop a hostile attack of persons, to resist them, ward them off:

    ut non sisterent modo Sabinas legiones, sed in fugam averterent,

    Liv. 1, 37, 3:

    ibi integrae vires sistunt invehentem se jam Samnitem,

    id. 10, 14, 18:

    nec sisti vis hostium poterat,

    Curt. 5, 3, 11:

    nec sisti poterant scandentes,

    Tac. H. 3, 71; 5, 21. —
    g.
    Trop., to stop the advance of prices:

    pretia augeri in dies, nec mediocribus remediis sisti posse,

    Tac. A. 3, 52.—
    2. a.
    Of water:

    sistere aquam fluviis,

    Verg. A. 4, 489:

    amnis, siste parumper aquas,

    Ov. Am. 3, 6, 2:

    quae concita flumina sistunt,

    id. M. 7, 154:

    sistito infestum mare,

    calm, Sen. Agam. 523; cf. Ov. M. 7, 200; id. H. 6, 87; Plin. 28, 8, 29, § 118.—
    b.
    Of blood and secretions:

    (ea) quibus sistitur sanguis parari jubet,

    Tac. A. 15, 54:

    sanguinem,

    Plin. 20, 7, 25, § 59; 28, 18, 73, § 239; 27, 4, 5, § 18:

    haemorrhoidum abundantiam,

    id. 27, 4, 5, § 19:

    fluctiones,

    id. 20, 8, 27, § 71, 34, 10, 23, § 105; 35, 17, 57, § 195:

    nomas,

    id. 30, 13, 39, § 116; 24, 16, 94, § 151:

    mensis,

    id. 23, 6, 60, § 112:

    vomitiones,

    id. 20, 20, 81, § 213:

    alvum bubus,

    id. 18, 16, 42, § 143:

    alvum,

    stop the bowels, id. 23, 6, 60, § 113; 22, 25, 59, § 126; 20, 5, 18, § 37:

    ventrem,

    id. 20, 23, 96, § 256; Mart. 13, 116.—
    3.
    To arrest the motion of life, make rigid:

    ille oculos sistit,

    Stat. Th. 2, 539.—
    4.
    To end, put an end to (= finem facere alicui rei); pass., to cease:

    querelas,

    Ov. M. 7, 711:

    fletus,

    id. ib. 14, 835:

    lacrimas,

    id. F. 1, 367; 480; 6, 154:

    minas,

    id. Tr. 1, 2, 60:

    opus,

    id. H. 16 (17), 266; id. M. 3, 153:

    labores,

    id. ib. 5, 490:

    furorem,

    Stat. Th. 5, 663:

    furialem impetum,

    Sen. Med. 157; id. Agam. 203:

    pace tamen sisti bellum placet,

    Ov. M. 14, 803:

    antequam summa dies spectacula sistat,

    id. F. 4, 387:

    sitim sistere,

    to allay, id. P. 3, 1, 18:

    nec primo in limine sistit conatus scelerum,

    suppresses, Stat. S. 5, 2, 86:

    ruinas,

    to stop destruction, Plin. Pan. 50, 4:

    ventum,

    to ward off, turn the wind, id. Ep. 2, 17, 17;

    (motus terrae) non ante quadraginta dies sistuntur, = desinunt,

    Plin. 2, 82, 84, § 198.—
    5.
    Sistere with intra = to confine, keep within:

    transgresso jam Alpes Caecina, quem sisti intra Gallias posse speraverant,

    Tac. H. 2, 11:

    dum populatio lucem intra sisteretur,

    provided the raids were confined to day-time, id. A. 4, 48. —
    C.
    Impers. and trop., to arrest or avoid an impending misfortune, or to stand, i. e. to endure; generally in the form sisti non potest (more rarely: sisti potest) = it cannot be endured, a disaster cannot be avoided or met (once in Plaut.; freq. in Liv.; sometimes in Tac.; cf., in gen., Brix ad Plaut. Trin. 720; Drak. ad Liv. 3, 16, 4; Weissenb. ad Liv. 2, 29, 8; Gronov. ad Liv. 4, 12, 6; Beneke ad Just. 11, 1, 6).
    1.
    Without a subject, res or a noun of general import being understood:

    quid ego nunc agam, nisi ut clipeum ad dorsum accommodem, etc.? Non sisti potest,

    it is intolerable, Plaut. Trin. 3, 2, 94:

    totam plebem aere alieno demersam esse, nec sisti posse nisi omnibus consulatur,

    Liv. 2, 29, 8:

    si domestica seditio adiciatur, sisti non posse,

    the situation will be desperate, id. 45, 19, 3:

    si quem similem priore anno dedissent, non potuisse sisti,

    id. 3, 9, 8:

    vixque concordiā sisti videbatur,

    that the crisis could scarcely be met, even by harmonious action, id. 3, 16, 4:

    qualicunque urbis statu, manente disciplinā militari sisti potuisse,

    these evils were endurable, id. 2, 44, 10: exercitum gravi morbo affectari, nec sisti potuisse ni, etc., it would have ended in disaster, if not, etc., id. 29, 10, 1:

    qui omnes populi si pariter deficiant, sisti nullo modo posse,

    Just. 11, 1, 6 Gronov. ad loc.; cf. Liv. 3, 20, 8 supra, II. A. 1.— Rarely with a subject-clause understood: nec jam sisti poterat, and it was no longer tolerable, i. e. that Nero should disgrace himself, etc., Tac. A. 14, 14.—
    2.
    Rarely with quin, to prevent etc. (pregn., implying also the stopping of something; cf.

    supra, III. B. 1.): neque sisti potuit quin et palatium et domus et cuncta circum haurirentur (igni),

    Tac. A. 15, 39.—Hence, stătus, a, um, P. a., as attribute of nouns, occurs in several conventional phrases, as relics of archaic usage.
    A.
    Status (condictusve) dies cum hoste, in the XII. Tables, = a day of trial fixed by the judge or agreed upon with the adversary;

    esp., a peregrinus (= hostis),

    Cic. Off. 1, 12, 37. It presupposes a phrase, diem sistere, prob.=vadimonium sistere (v. supra, I. C. 2.). Such an appointment was an excuse from the most important public duties, even for soldiers from joining the army, Cinc. ap. Gell. 16, 4, 4.—

    Hence, transf.: si status condictus cum hoste intercedit dies, tamen est eundum quo imperant,

    i. e. under all circumstances we must go, Plaut. Curc. 1, 1, 5.—
    B.
    In certain phrases, appointed, fixed, regular (cf. statutus, with which it is often confounded in MSS.):

    status dies: tres in anno statos dies habere quibus, etc.,

    Liv. 39, 13, 8:

    stato loco statisque diebus,

    id. 42, 32, 2; so id. 5, 52, 2; 27, 23 fin.:

    stato lustri die,

    Sen. Troad. 781:

    status sacrificii dies,

    Flor. 1, 3, 16:

    statum tempus, statā vice, etc.: lunae defectio statis temporibus fit,

    Liv. 44, 37 init.; so id. 28, 6, 10:

    stato tempore,

    Tac. A. 12, 13; id. H. 4, 81; Plin. 11, 37, 65, § 173:

    stata tempora (partus),

    Stat. Achill. 2, 673:

    adeo in illā plagā mundus statas vices temporum mutat,

    Curt. 8, 19, 13; so id. 9, 9, 9; 5, 1, 23; so, feriae, etc.: feriae statae appellabantur quod certo statutoque die observarentur, Paul. ex Fest. p. 69 Lind.:

    stata quinquennia,

    Stat. S. 5, 3, 113:

    stata sacra or sacrificia: stata sacrificia sunt quae certis diebus fieri debent,

    Fest. p. 264 Lind.:

    proficiscuntur Aeniam ad statum sacrificium,

    Liv. 40, 4, 9; 23, 35, 3; 5, 46, 2; 39, 13, 8; Cic. Mil. 17, 45:

    solemne et statum sacrificium (al. statutum),

    id. Tusc. 1, 47, 113; so Liv. 23, 35, 3:

    stata sacra,

    Ov. F. 2, 528; Stat. Th. 1, 666:

    stata foedera,

    id. ib. 11, 380:

    status flatus,

    Sen. Ben. 4, 28:

    stati cursus siderum,

    Plin. 18, 29, 69, § 291 (different: statae stellae = fixed stars, Censor. D. N. 8, belonging to II. 2. supra): statae febres, intermittent fevers, returning regularly, Plin. 28, 27, 28, § 107.—
    C.
    Moderate, average, normal:

    inter enim pulcherrimam feminam et deformissimam media forma quaedam est, quae et a nimio pulcritudinis periculo et a summo deformitatis odio vacat, qualis a Q. Ennio perquam eleganti vocabulo stata dicitur...Ennius autem eas fere feminas ait incolumi pudicitia esse quae statā formā forent,

    Gell. 5, 11, 12 -14 (v. Enn. Trag. p. 133 Vahl.).

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > sisto

  • 11 Gomes da Costa, Manuel de Oliveira

    (1863-1929)
       Marshal of the Portuguese Army, commander of Portugal's forces in Flanders in World War I, and leader of the military coup that overthrew the First Republic in May 1926. Trained at the Military College, Gomes da Costa rose from the rank of private to general during the period 1883-1917. His career began with important colonial service in Portuguese India and Mozambique in suppressing insurgencies in the 1890s. He served with Mousinho de Albuquerque in the Gaza campaigns (1896-97), in Mozambique, and later in Angola and São Tomé. His most notable service was in Portugal's intervention in World War I as he helped organize the first brigade and commanded the first division of Portugal's Expeditionary Corps (CEP), which entered combat on the western front in May 1917. For his role in the battle of Lys, in April 1918, when German forces badly mauled the Portuguese sector, Gomes da Costa was decorated by Portugal with the Tower and Sword medal. During the latter part of the First Republic, he was dispatched to the colonies on missions to divert him from domestic politics, since he had joined the Reformist Party (PR).
       As the most senior and best-known career army officer, Gomes da Costa was invited by former CEP comrades to join in military conspiracies to overthrow the democrat-dominated First Republic. On 28 May 1926, in Braga, he launched the military coup with the pronouncement "To Arms, Portugal!" The general's famous name and forceful personality gave the military movement the necessary prestige and won public opinion's confidence for the political moment. Gomes da Costa, however, was not suited for political maneuvering and administrative efficiency and, on 9 July 1926, he was dismissed as minister of war by other generals, including future president Óscar Carmona, and then exiled to the Azores. For political effect and as a consolation prize to the leader whose individual daring had helped create the abertura (opening) that allowed the coup to succeed, the military dictatorship honored Gomes da Costa, even in exile, with promotion to marshal of the army. In ill health on his return from the isolated Azores in late 1927, he died less than two years later in Lisbon. There is a statue of Gomes da Costa in a square in Braga, designed by Barata Feyo, which honors the general of the Twenty- eighth of May coup d'etat.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Gomes da Costa, Manuel de Oliveira

  • 12 toque

    m.
    1 knock (blow).
    dio unos toques en la puerta she knocked on the door
    2 touch (detalle).
    dar los últimos toques a algo to put the finishing touches to something
    3 warning (aviso).
    dar un toque a alguien to call somebody; (llamar) to prod somebody, to warn somebody (llamar la atención)
    toque de diana reveille
    toque de difuntos death knell
    5 bunt.
    6 joint, hashish cigarette, spliff, marijuana cigarette.
    7 electric shock, electrical shock, electroshock, electrical discharge.
    pres.subj.
    1st person singular (yo) Present Subjunctive of Spanish verb: tocar.
    * * *
    1 (acto) touch
    2 (de campana) ringing, peal, pealing; (de trompeta) blare, sounding; (de claxon) honk; (de sirena) hoot; (de tambor) beat, beating
    3 (pincelada) touch
    \
    dar el toque de alarma figurado to sound the alarm
    dar el último toque to put the finishing touch
    dar un toque a alguien (llamar) to take somebody to task 2 (llamar la atención) to call somebody's attention
    toque de alarma alarm signal
    toque de atención warning, warning note
    toque de balón ball control
    toque de diana reveille
    toque de difuntos death knell
    * * *
    noun m.
    * * *
    SM
    1) (=golpecito) tap

    dar un toque de atención a algn, dar un toque a algn * —

    2) (=sonido) [de campana] chime, ring; [de reloj] stroke; [de timbre] ring; [de tambor] beat

    dar un toque a algn — [por teléfono] to give sb a bell *

    3) (=detalle) touch

    dar el último toque o los últimos toques a algo — to put the finishing touch o touches to sth

    4) (Arte) [de color, brillo] touch
    5) (Quím) test
    6) † (=quid) crux, essence
    7) And (=vuelta) turn
    * * *
    1)
    a) ( de timbre) ring; ( de campana) stroke, chime

    a toque de campana: aquí hay que hacerlo todo a toque de campana — it's like being in the army here

    b) (fam) ( llamada) call, ring (BrE colloq)
    2)
    a) ( golpe suave) touch
    b) (Med)

    hacerse or darse unos toques — to paint one's throat ( with antiseptic)

    c) ( en béisbol) bunt
    3) ( detalle) touch
    4)
    a) (Méx arg) ( de marihuana) joint (colloq), spliff (arg)
    b) (Méx fam) ( descarga) electric shock
    * * *
    = touch, chime.
    Nota: De timbre, campana, reloj, móvil o similar.
    Ex. However, some of the central premises of the film are flawed, and the risqué touches, whether racial or erotic innuendo, are primarily there to titillate and make the film seem hot and controversial.
    Ex. After hearing the chimes, dial your ten-digit customer identification number.
    ----
    * piedra de toque = touchstone.
    * tener el toque mágico = have + the magic touch.
    * toque de clarín = bugle call.
    * toque de diana = reveille.
    * toque de difuntos = death knell.
    * toque de queda = curfew, last post, the.
    * toque de rebato = clarion call.
    * toque de retreta = last post, the.
    * toque de silencio = last post, the.
    * toque de trompetas = fanfare.
    * toque final, el = finishing touch, the.
    * toque personal = personal touch.
    * toques de luz = highlights.
    * toque suave = tap.
    * un toque de = a touch of, a splash of, a hint of.
    * * *
    1)
    a) ( de timbre) ring; ( de campana) stroke, chime

    a toque de campana: aquí hay que hacerlo todo a toque de campana — it's like being in the army here

    b) (fam) ( llamada) call, ring (BrE colloq)
    2)
    a) ( golpe suave) touch
    b) (Med)

    hacerse or darse unos toques — to paint one's throat ( with antiseptic)

    c) ( en béisbol) bunt
    3) ( detalle) touch
    4)
    a) (Méx arg) ( de marihuana) joint (colloq), spliff (arg)
    b) (Méx fam) ( descarga) electric shock
    * * *
    = touch, chime.
    Nota: De timbre, campana, reloj, móvil o similar.

    Ex: However, some of the central premises of the film are flawed, and the risqué touches, whether racial or erotic innuendo, are primarily there to titillate and make the film seem hot and controversial.

    Ex: After hearing the chimes, dial your ten-digit customer identification number.
    * piedra de toque = touchstone.
    * tener el toque mágico = have + the magic touch.
    * toque de clarín = bugle call.
    * toque de diana = reveille.
    * toque de difuntos = death knell.
    * toque de queda = curfew, last post, the.
    * toque de rebato = clarion call.
    * toque de retreta = last post, the.
    * toque de silencio = last post, the.
    * toque de trompetas = fanfare.
    * toque final, el = finishing touch, the.
    * toque personal = personal touch.
    * toques de luz = highlights.
    * toque suave = tap.
    * un toque de = a touch of, a splash of, a hint of.

    * * *
    A
    1 (de un timbre) ring; (de una campana) stroke, chime
    al toque de cornetas when the bugles sound/sounded
    lo recibieron con toque de campanas they greeted him with the ringing of bells o with peals of bells
    al toque de las doce when the clock strikes twelve, on the stroke of twelve
    a toque de campana: aquí hay que hacerlo todo a toque de campana it's like being in the army here o everything is so regimented here
    2 ( Esp fam) (llamada) call, buzz, ring ( BrE colloq)
    si te levantas temprano dale un toque a César if you get up early, wake César o ( colloq) give César a knock
    Compuestos:
    reveille
    warning
    darle un toque de atención a algn to call sb to order, to rap sb on the knuckles
    reveille
    (de campanas) death knell, passing bell; ( Mil) (de trompeta) taps (pl) ( AmE), last post ( BrE)
    curfew
    impusieron el toque de queda they imposed a curfew
    levantaron el toque de queda they lifted the curfew
    B
    con cuatro toques magistrales acabó el retrato with a few deft touches she finished the portrait
    2 ( Med):
    hacerse or darse unos toques to paint one's throat ( with antiseptic)
    dio un toque perfecto he laid down a perfect bunt
    C (detalle) touch
    aquí falta el toque femenino this place lacks a woman's touch
    necesita un toque de color it needs a touch of color
    sólo falta darle los últimos toques we just have to put the finishing touches to it
    D (de metales) assaying piedra2 (↑ piedra (2))
    E
    1 ( Méx arg) (de marihuana) joint ( colloq), spliff ( arg)
    2 ( Méx fam) (descarga) electric shock
    * * *

     

    Del verbo tocar: ( conjugate tocar)

    toqué es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) pretérito indicativo

    toque es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) presente subjuntivo

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) presente subjuntivo

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) imperativo

    Del verbo tocarse: ( conjugate tocarse)

    me toqué es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) pretérito indicativo

    me toque es:

    1ª persona singular (yo) presente subjuntivo

    se toque es:

    3ª persona singular (él/ella/usted) presente subjuntivo

    Multiple Entries:
    tocar    
    toque
    tocar ( conjugate tocar) verbo transitivo
    1

    ( palpar) to feel;
    ( manosear) to handle;
    ◊ ¡no vayas a toque ese cable! don't touch that cable!;

    mis ahorros no los quiero toque I don't want to touch my savings;
    la planta ya toca el techo the plant is already touching the ceiling
    b) ( hacer sonar) ‹timbre/campana› to ring;

    ‹ claxon› to blow, sound
    c) (Mús) ‹instrumento/pieza› to play

    2 ‹ tema› ( tratar) to touch on, refer to;
    ( sacar) to bring up
    3 (atañer, concernir) to affect;

    verbo intransitivo
    1


    b) [campana/timbre] to ring;


    c) (Mús) to play

    2
    a) (corresponder en reparto, concurso, sorteo):


    le tocó el primer premio she won the first prize;
    me tocó la maestra más antipática del colegio I got the most horrible teacher in the school


    ¿a quién le toca cocinar? whose turn is it to do the cooking?
    tocarse verbo pronominal
    a) ( refl) ‹herida/grano› to touch;

    ‹ barba› to play with

    [ cables] to touch
    toque sustantivo masculino
    1

    ( de campana) stroke, chime;

    toque de queda curfew
    b) (Esp fam) ( llamada) call, ring (BrE colloq)

    2 ( en béisbol) bunt
    3 ( detalle) touch;

    4 (Méx fam) ( descarga) electric shock
    tocar
    I verbo transitivo
    1 (entrar en contacto) to touch: el avión toca tierra, the airplane touches down
    (a una persona) to touch
    (manipular, manejar) to handle
    (sentir al tacto) to feel
    (mover, desordenar) yo no toqué tus papeles, I didn't touch your papers
    2 (hacer alusión) to touch on
    3 (un instrumento) to play: toca el violín, she plays the violin
    4 (el timbre, la campana) to ring
    II verbo intransitivo
    1 (corresponder) a ti te toca decírselo, you're the one who has to tell him
    los lunes te toca limpiar la casa, you have to clean the house on Mondays
    (por turno) me toca, it's my turn
    2 (en el juego, en un concurso) to win: le tocaron dos millones, he won two million pesetas
    3 (afectar) to concern, affect
    por lo que a ti te toca, as far as you are concerned
    4 (sonar) tocan las campanas, the bells are ringing
    toque sustantivo masculino
    1 (golpe suave) rap
    2 (matiz, detalle) touch
    un toque de buen gusto, a touch of good taste
    3 fam (aviso) un toque de atención, warning
    (llamada) call
    4 Mil toque de queda, curfew
    ' toque' also found in these entries:
    Spanish:
    atención
    - detalle
    - día
    - diana
    - levantamiento
    - tocar
    - retreta
    - turno
    English:
    blast
    - brighten up
    - curfew
    - dab
    - disturb
    - hoot
    - lend
    - reveille
    - splash
    - touch
    - highlight
    - hint
    - joint
    - pat
    - peep
    - ringing
    - tap
    - wait
    * * *
    ♦ nm
    1. [golpe] knock;
    dio unos toques en la puerta she knocked on the door;
    jugar al primer toque [en fútbol] to play one-touch soccer
    2. [detalle, retoque] touch;
    el toque femenino the feminine touch;
    dar los últimos toques a algo to put the finishing touches to sth
    3. Fam [aviso]
    dar un toque a alguien [llamar] to give sb a shout;
    [llamar la atención] to talk to sb, to have a few words with sb;
    si te enteras de algo, dame un toque if you hear anything, give me a shout
    toque de atención warning;
    le dio un toque de atención por llegar tarde she had a word with him about coming in late
    4. [sonido] [de campana] chime;
    [de tambor] beat; [de sirena] blast toque de diana reveille;
    toque de difuntos [con campanas] death knell;
    toque de retreta last post
    * * *
    m
    1 tap;
    2 MÚS de campana chime
    3
    :
    dar los últimos toques put the finishing touches (a to);
    toque personal personal touch
    4 DEP touch; en béisbol bunt
    * * *
    toque, etc. tocar
    toque nm
    1) : touch
    el último toque: the finishing touch
    un toque de color: a touch of color
    2) : ringing, peal, chime
    3) Mex : shock, jolt
    4)
    toque de queda : curfew
    5)
    toque de diana : reveille
    * * *
    1. (detalle) touch [pl. touches]
    3. (llamada) ring / call
    4. (aviso) warning

    Spanish-English dictionary > toque

  • 13 इन्द्रः _indrḥ

    इन्द्रः [इन्द्-रन्; इन्दतीति इन्द्रः; इदि ऐश्वर्ये Malli.]
    1 The lord of gods.
    -2 The god of rain, rain; cloud; इन्द्रो वरुणः सोमो रुद्रः । शं न इन्द्रो बृहस्पतिः Tait. Vp.1.1.1. Bṛi. Up.1.4.11.
    -3 A lord or ruler (as of men &c.). इन्द्रो- मायाभिः पुरुरूप ईयते Bṛi. Up.2.5.19. first or best (of any class of objects), always as the last member of comp.; नरेन्द्रः a lord of men i. e. a king; so मृगेन्द्रः a lion; गजेन्द्रः the lord or chief of elephants; so योगीन्द्रः, कपीन्द्रः.
    -4 A prince, king.
    -5 The pupil of the right eye.
    -6 N. of the plant कुटज.
    -7 Night.
    -8 One of the divisions of भारतवर्ष.
    -9 N. of the 26th Yoga.
    -1 The human or animal soul.
    -11 A vegetable poison.
    -12 The Yoga star in the 26th Nakṣatra.
    -13 Greatness.
    -14 The five objects of senses.
    -द्रा 1 The wife of Indra, Indrāṇī.
    -2 N. of a plant (मरुबक Mar. मरवा) [Indra, the god of the firmament, is the Jupiter Pluvius of the Indian Āryans. In the Vedas he is placed in the first rank among the gods; yet he is not regarded as an uncreated being, being distinctly spoken of in various passages of the Vedas as being born, and as having a father and a mother. He is sometimes represented as having been produced by the gods as a destroyer of enemies, as the son of Ekāṣṭakā, and in Rv.1.9.13 he is said to have sprung from the mouth of Puruṣa. He is of a ruddy or golden colour, and can assume any form at will. He rides in a bright golden chariot drawn by two tawny horses. His most famous weapon is the thunderbolt which he uses with deadly effect in his warfare with the demons of darkness, drought and inclement weather, variously called Ahi, Vṛitra, Śambar, Namu- chi &c. He storms and breaks through their castles, and sends down fertilizing showers of rain to the great delight of his worshippers. He is thus the lord of the atmosphere, the dispenser of rain, and governor of the weather. He is represented as being assisted by the Maruts or storm-gods in his warfare. Besides the thunderbolt he uses arrows, a large hook, and a net. The Soma juice is his most favourite food, and under its exhilarating influence he performs great achieve- ments (cf. Rv.1.119), and pleases his devout worshippers, who are said to invite the god to drink the juice. He is their friend and even their brother; a father, and the most fatherly of fathers; the helper of the poor, and the deliverer and comforter of his ser- vants. He is a wall of defence; his friend is never slain or defeated. He richly rewards his adorers, particularly those who bring him libations of Soma, and he is supplicated for all sorts of temporal blessings as cows, horses, chariots, health, intelligence, pros- perous days, long life, and victory in war. In the Vedas Indra's wife is Indrānī, who is invoked among the goddesses.
    *****Such is the Vedic conception of Indra. But in later mythology he falls in the second rank. He is said to be one of the sons of Kaśyapa and Dākṣāyaṇī or Aditi. He is inferior to the triad Brahmā, Viṣṇu and Maheśa (though in some places Viṣṇu is regard- ed as his younger brother, cf. R.14.59,15.4), but he is the chief of all the other gods, and is com- monly styled Sureśa, Devendra &c. As in the Vedas so in later mythology, he is the regent of the atmosphere, and of the east quarter, and his world is called Svarga. He sends the lightning, uses the thunderbolt and sends down rain. He is frequently at war with Asuras, whom he constantly dreads, and by whom he is sometimes defeated. The Indra of mythology is famous for his incontinence and adultery, one prominent instance of which is his seduction of Ahalyā, the wife of Gautama (see Ahalyā), and for which he is often spoken of as Ahalyā-jāra. The curse of the sage im- pressed upon him a 1 marks resembling the female organ, and he was therefore called Sayoni; but these marks were afterwards changed into eyes, and he is hence called Netra-yoni and Sahasrākṣa. In the Rāmāyana Indra is represented as having been defeated and carried off to Laṅkā by Ravaṇa's son called Meghanāda, who for this exploit received the title of 'Indrajit'. It was only at the intercession of Brahmā and the gods that Indra was released, and this humiliation was regarded as a punishment for his seduction of Ahalyā. He is also represented as being in constant dread of sages practising potent penances, and as sending down nymphs to beguile their minds (see Apsaras). In the Purāṇas he is said to have destroyed the offspring of Diti in her womb, and to have cut off the wings of mountains when they grew troublesome. Other stories are also told in which Indra was once worsted by Raja, gran- dson of Purūravas, owing to the curse of Durvāsas, and other accounts show that he and Kṛiṣna were at war with each other for the Pārijāta tree which the latter wanted to remove from Svarga, and which he succeeded in doing in spite of Indra's resistance. His wife is Indrāṇī, the daughter of the demon Pulo- man, and his son is named Jayanta. He is also said to be father of Arjuna. His epithets are numerous; mostly descriptive of his achievements, e. g. वृत्रहन्, बलभिद्, पाकशासन, गोत्रभिद्, पुरंदर, शतक्रतु, जिष्णु, नमुचिसूदन &c. (see Ak.I.1.44.47). The Heaven of Indra is Svarga; its capital, Amarāvatī; his garden, Nandana; his elephant, Airāvata; his horse, Uchchaiśravas; his bow, the rain-bow, and his sword, Paranja.].
    -Comp. -अग्निः the fire produced from the contact of clouds; ˚धूमः frost, snow; ˚देवता the 16th lunar mansion.
    -अनुजः, -अवरजः an epithet of Viṣṇu and of Nārāyaṇa (उपेन्द्र); तस्थौ भ्रातृसमीपस्थः शक्रस्येन्द्रानुजो यथा Rām.6.91.4.
    -अरिः an Asura or demon.
    -अवसानः a desert.
    -अशनः 1 hemp (dried and chewed).
    -2 the shrub which bears the seed used in jeweller's weight, (गुंजावृक्ष).
    -आयुधम् Indra's weapon, the rainbow; इन्द्रा- युधद्योतिततोरणाङ्कम् R.7.4,12.79; K.127.
    (-ध) 1 N. of the horse in Kādambarī (i. e. Kapiñjala changed into a horse).
    -2 a horse marked with black about the eyes.
    -3 a diamond. (
    -धा) a kind of leech.
    -आसनम् 1 the throne of Indra.
    -2 a throne in general.
    -3 a foot of five short syllables.
    -इज्यः N. of बृहस्पति the preceptor of gods.
    -ईश्वरः one of the forms of Śiva-liṅga.
    -उत्सवः a festival honouring Indra.
    - ऋषभ a. having Indra as a bull, or impregnated by Indra, an epithet of the earth. इन्द्रऋषभा द्रविणे नो दधातु Av.12.1.6.
    -कर्मन् m. an epithet of Viṣṇu (performing Indra's deeds).
    -कान्तः A class of the four-storeyed buildings. (Mānasāra 21.6-68).
    -कीलः 1 N. of the mountain मन्दर.
    -2 a rock.
    (-लम्) 1 the banner of Indra.
    -2 A pin, nail, bolt फालका भाजनोर्ध्वे तु तदूर्ध्वे चेन्द्रकीलकम् (Mānasāra 12.126). cf. also Kau. A.2.3.
    -कुञ्जरः Indra's elephant, Airāvata.
    -कूटः N. of a mountain
    -कृष्ट a. 'ploughed by Indra', growing exuberantly or in a wild state. (
    -ष्टः) a kind of corn produced by rain-water.
    -केतुः Indra's banner.
    -कोशः, -षः, -षकः, -ष्ठः 1 a couch, sofa, which is generally made up of covering pieces of perforated wooden planks; cf. अट्टालक- प्रतोलीमध्ये त्रिधानुष्काधिष्ठानं-इन्द्रकोशं कारयेत् Kau. A.2.3.
    -2 a platform.
    -3 a projection of the roof of a house.
    -4 A pin or bracket projecting from the wall (नागदन्त). A projection of the roof of a house forming a kind of balcony; Kau. A.24.
    -गिरिः the महेन्द्र mountain.
    -गुरुः, -आचार्यः the teacher of Indra; i. e. बृहस्पति.
    -गोपः, -गोपकः [इन्द्रो गोपो रक्षको$स्य, वर्षाभवत्वात्तस्य] a kind of insect of red or white colour; Śukra.4.157; K.1.
    -चन्दनम् the white sandal wood.
    -चापम्, -धनुस् n.
    1 a rainbow; विद्युत्वन्तं ललितवनिताः सेन्द्रचापं सचित्राः Me.64; Śi.7.4.
    -2 the bow of Indra
    -चिर्भटा A mild variety of Colocynth. The leaf is tripartite, rough and wrinkled. (Mar. कंवडळ, applied often as इन्द्रावण in the sense of vile, malignant, dark and hateful.)
    -च्छदः A neck- lace of pearls having 18 strings.
    -च्छन्दस् n. [इन्द्र इव सहस्रनेत्रेण सहस्रगुच्छेन च्छाद्यते] a necklace consisting of 1 strings.
    -जः N. of Vālī.
    -जतु n. Bitumen (Mar. शिलाजित).
    -जननम् Indra's birth.
    -जननीय a. treating of Indra's birth (as a work).
    -जा a. Ved. born or arising from Indra. Av.4.3.7.
    -जालम् [इन्द्रस्य परमेश्वरस्य जालं मायेव]
    1 the net of Indra. तेनाह- मिन्द्रजालेनामूंस्तमसाभि दधामि सर्वान् Av.8.8.8.
    -2 a weapon used by Arjuna; a stratagem or trick in war.
    -3 deception, cheating.
    -4 conjuring, jugglery, magical tricks; इन्द्रजालं च मायां वै कुहका वा$पि भीषणा Mb.5.16.55. स्वप्नेन्द्रजालसदृशः खलु जीवलोकः Śānti.2.2; K.15.
    -जालिक a. [इन्द्रजाल-ठन्] deceptive, unreal, delusive. (
    -कः) a juggler, conjurer.
    -जित् m. 'conqueror of Indra', N. of a son of Rāvaṇa who was killed by Lakṣmaṇa. [Indrajit is another name of Meghanāda a son of Rāvaṇa. When Rāvaṇa warred against Indra in his own heaven, his son Meghanāda was with him, and fought most valiantly. During the combat, Meghanāda, by virtue of the magical power of becoming invisible which he had obtained from Śiva, bound Indra, and bore him off in triumph to Laṅkā. Brahmā and the other gods hurried thither to obtain his release, and gave to Meghanāda the title of Indrajit, 'conqueror of Indra'; but the victor refused to release his prisoners unless he were promised immortality. Brahmā refused to grant this extravagant demand, but he strenuously persisted, and achieved his object. In the Rāmāyaṇa he is repre- sented to have been decapitated by Lakṣmaṇa while he was engaged in a sacrifice]. ˚हन्तृ or विजयिन् m. N. of Lakṣmaṇa.
    -ज्येष्ठ a. Ved. led by Indra.
    -तापनः the thundering of clouds.
    -तूलम्, -तूलकम् a flock of cotton.
    -दमनः the son of Bāṇāsura.
    -दारुः the tree Pinus Devadāru.
    -द्युति Sandal
    -द्रुः, -द्रुमः 1 the plant Termi- nalia Arjuna (अर्जुन).
    -2 The plant कुटज.
    -द्वीपः, -पम् one of the 9 Dvīpas or Divisions of the continent (of India).
    -धनुः N. of Indra's bow, the rainbow; स एकव्रा- त्यो$भवत्स धनुरादत्त तदेवेन्द्रधनुः Av.15.1.6.
    -ध्वजः 1 a flag raised on the 12th day of the bright half of Bhādra.
    -2 Indra's weapon; विस्रस्ताकल्पकेशस्रगिन्द्रध्वज इवापतत् Bhāg.1.44.22.
    -नक्षत्रम् Indra's lunar mansion फल्गुनी.
    -नेत्रम् 1 the eye of Indra.
    -2 the number one thousand.
    -नीलः [इन्द्र इव नीलः श्यामः] a sapphire; परीक्षाप्रत्ययैर्यैश्च पद्मरागः परीक्ष्यते । त एव प्रत्यया दृष्टा इन्द्रनीलमणेरपि ॥ Garuḍa. P.; R.13.54;16.69; Me.48,79.
    -नीलकः an emerald.
    -पत्नी 1 Indra's wife, शची.
    -पर्णी, -पुष्पा N. of a medicinal plant (Mar. कळलावी).
    -पर्वतः 1 the महेन्द्र mountain.
    -2 a blue mountain.
    -पुत्रा N. of अदिति.
    -पुरोगम, -पुरःसर, -श्रेष्ठ a. led or preceded by Indra, having Indra at the head.
    -पुरोहितः N. of बृहस्पति. (
    -ता) the asterism Puṣya.
    -प्रमतिः N. of the pupil of Paila and the author of some ṛiks of the Rv.
    -प्रस्थम् N. of a city on the Yamunā, the residence of the Paṇḍavas (identified with the modern Delhi); इन्द्रप्रस्थगमस्तावत्कारि मा सन्तु चेदयः Śi.2.63.
    -प्रहरणम् Indra's weapon, the thunderbolt.
    -भगिनी N. of Pārvatī.
    -भेषजम् dried ginger.
    -मखः a sacrifice in honour of Indra.
    -महः 1 a festival in honour of Indra.
    -2 the rainy season; ˚कामुकः a dog.
    -मादन a. animating or delighting Indra; ये वायव इन्द्रमादनासः Rv.7.92.4.
    -मेदिन् a. Ved. whose friend or ally is Indra; इन्द्रमेदी सत्वनो नि ह्वयस्व Av.5.2-.8.
    -यज्ञः (See इन्द्रमह and इन्द्रमख) श्वो$स्माकं घोषस्योचित इन्द्रयज्ञो नामोत्सवः भविष्यति Bālacharita I.
    -यवः, -वम् seed of the Kutaja tree.
    -लुप्तः, -प्तम्, -लुप्तकम् 1 excessive bald- ness of the head.
    -2 loss of beard.
    -लोकः Indra's world, Svarga or Paradise.
    -लोकेशः 1 lord of Indra's world, i. e. Indra.
    -2 a guest (who, if hospitably received, confers paradise on his host).
    -वंशा, -वज्रा N. of two metres, see Appendix.
    -वल्लरी, -वल्ली N. of a plant (पारिजात) or of इन्द्रवारुणी.
    -वस्तिः [इन्द्रस्य आत्मनः वस्तिरिव] the calf (of the leg).
    -वाततम a. Ved. desired by Indra. अस्मे ऊतीरिन्द्रवाततमाः Rv.1.6.6.
    -वानकम् A variety of diamonds. Kau. A.2.11.
    -वायू (du.) Indra and Vāyu. इन्द्रवायू उभाविह सुहवेह हवामहे Av.3.2.6.
    -वारुणी, -वारुणिका Colocynth, a wild bitter gourd cucumis colocynthis. (Mar. मोठी कंवडळ) किमिन्द्रवारुणी राम सितया कटुकीयते Laghu Yoga- vāsiṣṭha-sāra X. सौवर्चलं हरिद्रा च पिप्पली चेन्द्रवारुणिः । मूत्र- कृच्छ्रे प्रशंसन्ति पिण्डो$यं वाजिनां हितः ॥ शालिहोत्र of भोज 33.
    -वाह् a. carrying Indra.
    -वृक्षः the Devadāru tree.
    -वृद्धा a kind of abscess.
    -वैडूर्यम् a kind of precious stone.
    -व्रतम् Indra's rule of conduct; one of the duties of a king (who is said to follow इन्द्रव्रत when he distri- butes benefits as Indra pours down rain); वार्षिकांश्चतुरो मासान् यथेन्द्रो$प्यभिवर्षति । तथाभिवर्षेत्स्वं राष्ट्रं कामैरिन्द्रव्रतं चरन् ॥ Ms.9.34.
    -शक्तिः f. Indrāṇī, the wife of Indra, or his energy personified.
    -शत्रुः 1 an enemy or destroyer of Indra (when the accent is on the last syllable), an epithet of प्रह्लाद; इन्द्रशत्रो विवर्धस्व मा चिरं जहि विद्विषम् Bhāg.6.9.12. बलिप्रदिष्टां श्रियमाददानं त्रैविक्रमं पादमिवेन्द्रशत्रुः R.7.35.
    -2 [इन्द्रः शत्रुः यस्य] one whose enemy is Indra, an epithet of वृत्र (when the accent is on the first syllable). (This refers to a legend in the Śat. Br., where it is said that Vṛitra's father intended his son to become the destroyer of Indra, and asked him to say इन्द्रशत्रुर्वधस्व &c. but who, through mistake, accented the word on the first syllable, and was killed by Indra; cf. Śik.52; मन्त्रो हीनः स्वरतो वर्णतो वा मिथ्याप्रयुक्तो न तमर्थमाह । स वाग्वज्रो यजमानं हिनस्ति यथेन्द्रशत्रुः स्वरतो$पराधात् ॥
    -शलभः a kind of insect (इन्द्रगोप).
    -संजयम् N. of a sāman. Arṣeya Br.
    -संधा connection or alliance with Indra. तयाहमिन्द्रसंधया सर्वान् देवानिह हुव Av.11.1.9.
    -सारथिः 1 N. of Mātali.
    -2 an epi- thet of Vāyu, driving in the same carriage with Indra; Rv.4.46.2.
    -सावर्णिः N. of the fourteenth Manu.
    -सुतः, -सूनुः 1 N. of (a) Jayanta; (b) Arjuna; (c) Vāli, the king of monkeys.
    -2 N. of the अर्जुन tree.
    -सुरसः, -सुरा a shrub the leaves of which are used in discutient applications (निर्गुंडी).
    -सेनः N. of several men; of Bali; of a mountain; Bhāg.8.2.23.
    -सेना 1 Indra's missile or host.
    -2 Indra's army; Rv.1.12.2.
    -सेनानीः the leader of Indra's armies, epithet of Kārtikeya.
    -स्तुत् m.
    -स्तोमः 1 praise of Indra; N. of a particular hymn addressed to Indra in certain ceremonies.
    -2 a sacrifice in honour of Indra.
    -हवः invocation of Indra; भद्रान् कृण्वन्निन्द्रहवान्त्सखिभ्य Rv.9.96.1.
    -हस्तः a kind of medicament.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > इन्द्रः _indrḥ

  • 14 त्रि _tri

    त्रि num. a. [Uṇ.5.66] (declined in pl. only, nom. त्रयः m., तिस्त्रः f., त्रीणि n.) Three; त एव हि त्रयो लोकास्त एव त्रय आश्रमाः &c. Ms.2.229; प्रियतमाभिरसौ तिसृभिर्बभौ R.9.18; त्रीणि वर्षाण्युदीक्षेत कुमार्यृतुमती सती Ms.9.9 [cf. L. tres; Gr. treis; A. S., Zend thri; Eng. three].
    -Comp. -अंशः 1 a three-fold share; त्र्यंशं दायाद्धरेद्विप्रः Ms.9.151.
    -2 a third part.
    -3 three-fourths.
    -अक्ष a. triocular.
    -अक्षः, -अक्षकः an epithet of Śiva; शुष्कस्नायु- स्वराह्लादात्त्र्यक्षं जग्राह रावणः Pt.5.57.
    -अक्षरः 1 the mystic syllable ओम् consisting of three letters; see under अ. आद्यं यत्त्र्यक्षरं ब्रह्म Ms.11.265.
    -2 a match- maker or घटक (that word consisting of three syllables).
    -3 a genealogist. (
    -री) knowledge, learning; see विद्या.
    -अङ्कटम्, -अङ्गटम् 1 three strings suspended to either end of a pole for carrying burdens.
    -2 a sort of colly- rium. (
    -टः) N. of Śiva.
    -अङ्गम् (pl.) a tripartite army (chariots, cavalry and infantry).
    -अङ्गुलम् three fingers' breadth.
    -अञ्जनम् the three kinds of collyrium; i. e. कालाञ्जन, रसाञ्जन and पुष्पाञ्जन.
    -अञ्जलम्, -लिः three handfuls taken collectively.
    -अधिपतिः (the lord of the 3 guṇas or worlds), an epithet of Viṣṇu; Bhāg.3.16.24.
    -अधिष्ठानः the soul. (
    नम्) spirit, life (चैतन्य). -a. having three stations; Ms.12.4.
    -अध्वगा, -मार्गगा, -वर्त्मगा epithets of the river Ganges (flowing through the three worlds).
    -अनीक a. having the three properties of heat, rain and cold; त्यनीकः पत्यते माहिनावान् Rv.3.56.3. (
    -का) an army consisting of horses, elephants and chariots.
    -अब्द a. three years old.
    -ब्दम् three years taken collectively.
    -अम्बकः (also त्रियम्बक in the same sense though rarely used in classical literature) 'having three eyes', N. of Śiva.; त्रियम्बकं संयमिनं ददर्श Ku.3.44; जडीकृतस्त्र्यम्बकवीक्षणेन R.2. 42;3.49. ˚सखः an epithet of Kubera; कुबेरस्त्र्यम्बकसखः Ak.
    -अम्बका an epithet of Pārvatī
    -अशीत a. eighty-third.
    -अशीतिः f. eighty-three.
    -अष्टन् a. twenty-four.
    -अश्र, -अस्र a. triangular. (
    -स्रम्) a triangle.
    -अहः 1 a period of three days.
    -2 a festival lasting three days.
    -आर्षेयाः deaf, dumb and blind persons.
    -आहिक a.
    1 performed or produced in three days.
    -2 recurring after the third day, tertian (as fever).
    -3 having provision for three days कुशूलकुम्भीधान्यो वा त्र्याहिको$श्वस्तनो$पि वा Y.1.128.
    -ऋचम् (
    तृचम् also) three Riks taken collectively; Ms.8.16.
    -ऐहिक a. having provision for three days.
    -ककुद् m.
    1 N. of the moun- tain Trikūṭa.
    -2 N. of Viṣnu or Kṛiṣṇa.
    -3 the highest, chief.
    -4 a sacrifice lasting for ten nights.
    -ककुभ् m. Ved.
    1 Indra.
    -2 Indra's thunderbolt.
    -कटु dry ginger, black pepper and long pepper taken together as a drug; शिरामोक्षं विधायास्य दद्यात् त्रिकटुकं गुडम् Śālihotra 62.
    -कण्टः, -कण्टकः a kind of fish.
    -करणी the side of a square 3 times as great as another.
    -कर्मन् n. the chief three duties of a Brāhmaṇa i. e. sacrifice, study of the Vedas, and making gifts or charity. (-m.) one who engages in these three duties (as a Brāhmaṇa).
    -काण्डम् N. of Amarsiṁha's dictionary.
    -कायः N. of Buddha.
    -कालम् 1 the three times; the past, the pre- sent, and the future; or morning, noon and evening.
    -2 the three tenses (the past, present, and future) of a verb. (
    -लम् ind. three times, thrice; ˚ज्ञ, ˚दर्शिन् a. omniscient (m.)
    1 a divine sage, seer.
    -2 a deity.
    -3 N. of Buddha. ˚विद् m.
    1 a Buddha.
    -2 an Arhat (with the Jainas).
    -कूटः N. of a mountain in Ceylon on the top of which was situated Laṅkā, the capital of Rāvaṇa.; Śi.2.5.
    -कूटम् sea-salt.
    कूर्चकम् a knife with three edges.
    -कोण a. triangular, forming a triangle.
    (-णः) 1 a triangle.
    -2 the vulva.
    -खम् 1 tin.
    -2 a cucumber.
    -खट्वम्, -खट्वी three bed- steads taken collectively.
    -क्षाराणि n. (pl.) salt-petre, natron and borax.
    -गणः an aggregate of the three objects of worldly existence; i. e. धर्म, अर्थ and काम; न बाधते$स्य त्रिगणः परस्परम् Ki.1.11; see त्रिवर्ग below.
    -गत a.
    1 tripled.
    -2 done in three days.
    -गर्ताः (pl.)
    1 N. of a country, also called जलन्धर, in the north- west of India.
    -2 the people or rulers of that country.
    -3 a particular mode of calculation.
    -गर्ता 1 a lascivious woman, wanton.
    -2 a woman in general.
    -3 a pearl.
    -4 a kind of cricket.
    -गुण a.
    1 consisting of three threads; व्रताय मौञ्जीं त्रिगुणां बभार याम् Ku.5.1.
    -2 three-times repeated, thrice, treble, threefold, triple; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य (दिनानि) R.2. 25.
    -3 containing the three Guṇas सत्त्व, रजस् and तमस्. (
    -णम्) the Pradhāna (in Sāṅ. phil.); (-ind.) three times; in three ways.
    -णाः m. (pl.) the three quali- ties or constituents of nature; त्रयीमयाय त्रिगुणात्मने नमः K.1.
    (-णा) 1 Māyā or illusion (in Vedānta phil.).
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -गुणाकृतम् ploughed thrice.
    -चक्षुस् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -चतुर a. (pl.) three or four; गत्वा जवात्त्रिचतुराणि पदानि सीता B.R.6.34.
    -चत्वा- रिंश a. forty-third.
    -चत्वारिंशत् f, forty-three.
    -जगत् n.
    -जगती the three worlds, (1) the heaven, the atmos- phere and the earth; or (2) the heaven, the earth, and the lower world; त्वत्कीर्तिः...... त्रिजगति विहरत्येवमुर्वीश गुर्वी Sūkti.5.59.
    -जटः an epithet of Śiva.
    -जटा N. of a female demon, one of the Rākṣasa attendants kept by Rāvaṇa to watch over Sītā, when she was retained as a captive in the Aśoka-vanikā. She acted very kindly towards Sītā and induced her companions to do the same; सीतां मायेति शंसन्ति त्रिजटा समजीवयत् R.12.74.
    -जातम्, जातकम् The three spices (mace, cardamoms, cinnamon).
    -जीवा, -ज्या the sine of three signs or 9˚, a radius.
    -णता a bow; कामुकानिव नालीकांस्त्रिणताः सहसामुचन् Śi.19.61.
    -णव, -णवन् a. (pl.) three times nine; i. e. 27.
    -णाकः the heaven; तावत्त्रिणाकं नहुषः शशास Bhāg.6.13.16.
    -णाचिकेतः 1 a part of the Adhvaryu-sacrifice or Yajur- veda, or one who performs a vow connected therewith (according to Kull. on Ms.3.185); Mb.13.9.26.
    -2 one who has thrice kindled the Nāchiketa fire or studied the Nāchiketa section of Kāṭhaka; त्रिणाचिकेत- स्त्रिभिरेत्य सन्धिम् Kaṭh.1.17.
    -णीता a wife ('thrice married'; it being supposed that a girl belongs to Soma, Gandharva and Agni before she obtains a human husband).
    -णेमि a. with three fellies; विचिन्वतो$भूत् सुमहांस्त्रिणेमिः Bhāg.3.8.2.
    -तक्षम्, तक्षी three carpen- ters taken collectively.
    -दण्डम् 1 the three staves of a Saṁnyāsin (who has resigned the world) tied togethar so as to form one.
    -2 the triple subjection of thought, word, and deed. (
    -ण्डः) the state of a religious ascetic; ज्ञानवैराग्यरहितस्त्रिदण्डमुपजीवति Bhāg.11.18.4.
    -दण्डिन् m.
    1 a religious mendicant or Saṁnyāsin who has renounced all worldly attachments, and who carries three long staves tied together so as to form one in his right hand; तल्लिप्सुः स यतिर्भूत्वा त्रिदण्डी द्वारका- मगात् Bhāg.1.86.3.
    -2 one who has obtained command over his mind, speech, and body (or thought, word, and deed); cf. वाग्दण्डो$थ मनोदण्डः कायदण्डस्तथैव च । यस्यैते निहिता बुद्धौ त्रिदण्डीति स उच्यते ॥ Ms.12.1.
    -दशाः (pl.)
    1 thirty.
    -2 the thirty-three gods:-- 12 Ādityas, 8 Vasus, 11 Rudras and 2 Aśvins. (
    -शः) a god, an immortal; तस्मिन्मघोनस्त्रिदशान्विहाय सहस्रमक्ष्णां युगपत्पपात Ku.3.1. ˚अङ्कुशः (-शम्) the heaven. ˚आयुधम् Indra's thunder- bolt; R.9.54. ˚आयुधम् rainbow; अथ नभस्य इव त्रिदशायुधम् R.9.54. ˚अधिपः, ˚ईश्वरः, ˚पतिः epithets of Indra. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Śiva. ˚अध्यक्षः, ˚अयनः an epithet of Viṣṇu. ˚अरिः a demon. ˚आचार्यः an epithet of Bṛihas- pati. ˚आधार Nectar. ˚आलयः, ˚आवासः
    1 heaven.
    -2 the mountain Meru.
    -3 a god. ˚आहारः 'the food of the gods', nectar. ˚इन्द्रः
    1 Indra.
    -2 Śiva.
    -3 Brahman. ˚गुरुः an epithet of Bṛihaspati, ˚गोपः a kind of insect; (cf. इन्द्रगोप) श्रद्दधे त्रिदशगोपमात्रके दाहशक्तिमिव कृष्णवर्त्मनि R.11.42. ˚दीर्घिका an epithet of the Ganges. ˚पतिः Indra; एषो$प्यैरावतस्थस्त्रिदशपतिः Ratn.4.11. ˚पुङ्गवः Viṣṇu; Rām.1. ˚मञ्जरी the holy basil. ˚वधू, ˚वनिता, an Apsaras or heavenly damsel; कैलासस्य त्रिदशवनितादर्पणस्यातिथिः स्याः Me.6. ˚वर्त्मन् the sky. ˚श्रेष्ठः
    1 Agni.
    -2 Brahman. ˚दशीभूत Become divine; त्रिदशीभूतपौराणां स्वर्गान्तरमकल्पयत् R.15.12.
    -दिनम् three days collectively. ˚स्पृश् m. concurrence of three lunations with one solar day.
    -दिवम् 1 the heaven; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28; Ś.7.3.
    -2 sky, atmosphere.
    -3 paradise.
    -4 happi- ness. (
    -वा) cardamoms. ˚अधीशः, ˚ईशः
    1 an epithet of Indra.
    -2 a god. ˚आलयः the heaven; अश्वमेधजिताँल्लोका- नाप्नोति त्रिदिवालये Mb.13.141.53. ˚उद्भवा
    1 the Ganges.
    -2 small cardamoms. ˚ओकस् m. a god; वपुषि त्रिदिवौकसां परं सह पुष्पैरपतत्र्छिलीमुखाः Vikr.15.72. ˚गत dead; त्रिदिवगतः किमु वक्ष्यते पिता मे Vikr.6.62.
    -दृश् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -दोषम् vitiation or derangement of the three humours of the body, i. e. वात, पित्त and कफ.
    -धा ind. in 3 parts, ways or places; triply, ˚त्वम् tripartition; Ch. Up.
    -धातुः an epithet of Gaṇeśa;
    -तुम् 1 the triple world.
    -2 the aggregate of the 3 minerals or humours.
    -धामन् m.
    1 N. of Viṣṇu.
    -2 of Vyāsa;
    -3 of Śiva.
    -4 of Agni.
    -5 death. -n. the heaven; हंसो हंसेन यानेन त्रिधाम परमं ययौ Bhāg.3.24.2.
    -धारा the Ganges.
    -नयन, -नेत्रः, -लोचनः epithets of Śiva; R.3. 66; Ku.3.66;5.72.
    - नवत a. ninety-third.
    -नवतिः f. ninety three.
    -नयना Pārvat&imacr.
    -नाभः Viṣṇu; Bhāg.8. 17.26.
    -नेत्रचूडामणिः the moon.
    -नेत्रफलः the cocoa-nut tree.
    -पञ्च a. three-fold five, i. e. fifteen.
    -पञ्चाश a. fiftythird.
    -पञ्चाशत् f. fifty-three.
    -पुटः glass (काच).
    -पताकः 1 the hand with three fingers stretched out or erect.
    -2 the forehead marked naturally with three horizontal lines.
    -पत्रकः the Palāśa tree.
    -पथम् 1 the three paths taken collectively, i. e. the sky, atmosphere, and the earth, or the sky, earth and the lower world.
    -2 a place where three roads meet. (
    -था) an epithet of Mathura. ˚गा, ˚गामिनी an epithet of the Ganges; गङ्गा त्रिपथगामिनी; धृतसत्पथस्त्रिपथगामभितः स तमारुरोह पुरुहूतसुतः Ki.6.1; Amaru.99.
    -पद्, -पाद्, -पात् m. Ved.
    1 Viṣṇu.
    -2 fever (personified).
    -पद a. three-footed. (
    -दम्) a tripod; त्रिपदैः करकैः स्थालैः...... Śiva. B.22. 62.
    -पदिका 1 a tripod.
    -2 a stand with three feet.
    -पदी 1 the girth of an elephant; नास्रसत्करिणां ग्रैवं त्रिपदी- च्छेदिनामपि R.4.48.
    -2 the Gāyatrī metre.
    -3 a tripod.
    -4 the plant गोधापदी.
    -परिक्रान्त a. one who walks thrice round a sacred fire.
    -पर्णः Kiṁśuka tree.
    -पाटः 1 intersection of a prolonged side and perpendicular (in a quadrangular figure).
    -2 the figure formed by such intersection.
    -पाटिका a beak.
    पाठिन् a.
    1 familiar with Saṁhitā, Pada, and Krama.
    -2 one who learns a thing after three repetitions.
    -पादः 1 the Supreme Being.
    -2 fever.
    -पाद् a.
    1 having three feet.
    -2 con- sisting of three parts, having three fourths; राघवः शिथिलं तस्थौ भुवि धर्मस्त्रिपादिव R.15.96.
    -3 trinomial. (-m.)
    1 an epithet of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation.
    -2 the Supreme Being.
    -पिटकम् the 3 collections of Buddhistic sacred writings (सुत्त, विनय and अभिधम्म).
    -पुट a. triangular.
    (-टः) 1 an arrow.
    -2 the palm of the hand.
    -3 a cubit.
    -4 a bank or shore.
    -पुटकः a triangle.
    -पुटा an epithet of Durgā.
    -पुटिन् m. the castor-oil plant.
    -पुण्ड्रम्, -पुण्ड्रक a mark on the forehead consisting of three lines made with cowdung ashes.
    -पुरम् 1 a collection of three cities.
    -2 the three cities of gold, silver, and iron in the sky, air and earth built for demons by Maya; (these cities were burnt down, along the demons inhabiting them, by Śiva at the request of the gods); Ku.7.48; Amaru.2; संरक्ताभिस्त्रिपुरविजयो गीयते किन्नरीभिः Me.56; Bh.3.123; (
    -रः) N. of a demon or demons presiding over these cities. ˚अधिपतिः N. of Maya, ˚अन्तकः, ˚अरिः, ˚घ्नः, ˚दहनः, ˚द्विष् m., हरः &c. epithets of Śiva; अये गौरीनाथ त्रिपुरहर शम्भो त्रिनयन Bh.3.123; R.17.14. ˚दाहः burning of the three cities; मुहुरनुस्मरयन्तमनुक्षपं त्रिपुरदाहमुमापतिसेविनः Ki.5.14. ˚सुन्दरी Durgā.
    (-री) 1 N. of a place near Jabalpura, formerly capital of the kings of Chedi.
    -2 N. of a country.
    -पुरुष a
    1 having the length of three men.
    -2 having three assistants. (
    -षम्) the three ancestors- father, grand-father and great-grand-father.
    -पृष्ठम् the highest heaven; Bhāg.1.19.23. (
    ष्ठः) Viṣṇu.
    -पौरुष a.
    1 belonging to, or extending over, three generations of men.
    2 offered to three (as oblations).
    -3 inherited from three (as an estate).
    -प्रस्रुतः an elephant in rut.
    -फला (1) the three myrobalans taken collectively, namely, Terminalia Chebula, T. Bellerica, and Phyllanthus (Mar. हिरडा, बेहडा and आंवळकाठी). Also (2) the three sweet fruits (grape, pomegranate, and date); (3) the three fragrant fruits (nutmeg, areca- nut, and cloves).
    -बन्धनः the individual soul.
    -बलिः, बली, -वलिः, -वली f.
    1 the three folds or wrinkles of skin above the navel of a woman (regarded as a mark of beauty); क्षामोदरोपरिलसत्त्रिवलीलतानाम् Bh.1.93,81; cf. Ku.1.39.
    -2 the anus.
    -बलीकम् the anus.
    -बाहुः a kind of fighting with swords.
    -ब्रह्मन् a. with ब्रह्मा, विष्णु and महेश.
    -भम् three signs of the zodiac, or ninety degrees.
    -भङ्गम् a pose in which the image is bent at three parts of the body.
    -भद्रम् copulation, sexual union, cohabitation.
    -भागः 1 the third part; त्रिभागं ब्रह्महत्यायाः कन्या प्राप्नोति दुष्यती Mb.12.165.42.
    -2 the third part of a sign of the zodiac.
    -भुक्ल a. one possessed of learning, good conduct and good family-descent (Dānasāgara, Bibliotheca Indica,274, Fasc.1, p.29).
    -भुजम् a triangle.
    -भुवनम् the three worlds; पुण्यं यायास्त्रिभुवन- गुरोर्धाम चण्डीश्वरस्य Me.35; Bh.1.99. ˚गुरु Śiva. ˚कीर्तिरसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda. ˚पतिः Viṣṇu.
    -भूमः a palace with three floors.
    -मद the three narcotic plants; the three-fold haughtiness; Bhāg.3.1.43.
    -मधु n.
    -मधुरम् 1 sugar, honey, and ghee.
    -2 three verses of the Ṛigveda (1.9.6-8; मधु वाता ऋतायते˚).
    -3 a ceremony based on the same; L. D. B.
    -4 threefold utterance of a vedic stanza ˚मधु वाता -m. a reciter and performer of the above ceremony; L. D. B.
    -मार्गा the Ganges; त्रिमार्गयेव त्रिदिवस्य मार्गः Ku.1.28.
    -मुकुटः the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -मुखः an epithet of Buddha.
    -मुनि ind. having the three sages पाणिनि, कात्यायन and पतञ्जलि; त्रिमुनि व्याकरणम्.
    -मूर्तिः 1 the united form of Brahmā, Viṣṇu, and Maheśa, the Hindu triad; नमस्त्रिमूर्तये तुभ्यं प्रांक्सृष्टेः केवलात्मने । गुणत्रयविभायाय पश्चाद्भेदमुपेयुषे ॥ Ku.2.4.
    -2 Buddha, or Jina.
    -मूर्धन् m.
    1 a demon; त्रयश्च दूषण- खरस्त्रिमूर्धानो रणे हताः U.2.15.
    -2 a world called महर्लोक; G&imac;rvāṇa; cf. अमृतं क्षेममभयं त्रिमूर्ध्नो$धायि मूर्धसु Bhāg.2.6.19.
    -यव a. weighing 3 barley corns; Ms.8.134.
    -यष्टिः a necklace of three strings.
    -यामकम् sin.
    -यामा 1 night (consisting of 3 watches of praharas, the first and last half prahara being excluded); संक्षिप्येत क्षण इव कथं दीर्घयामा त्रियामा Me.11, Ku.7.21,26; R.9.7; V.3. 22.
    -2 turmeric.
    -3 the Indigo plant.
    -4 the river Yamuṇā.
    -युगः an epithet of Viṣṇu; धर्मं महापुरुष पासि युगानुवृत्तं छन्नः कलौ यदभवस्त्रियुगो$थ सत्त्वम् Bhāg.7.9.38; the god in the form of यज्ञपुरुष; Bhāg.5.18.35.
    -योनिः a law-suit (in which a person engages from anger, cove- tousness, or infatuation).
    -रसकम् spirituous liquor; see त्रिसरकम्.
    -रात्र a. lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रः) a festival lasting for three nights. (
    -त्रम्) a period of three nights.
    -रेखः a conch-shell.
    -लिङ्ग a. having three genders, i. e. an adjective.
    -2 possessing the three Guṇas. (
    -गाः) the country called Telaṅga. (
    -गी) the three genders taken collectively.
    -लोकम् the three worlds. (
    -कः) an inhabitant of the three worlds; यद्धर्मसूनोर्बत राजसूये निरीक्ष्य दृक्स्वस्त्ययनं त्रिलोकः Bhāg.3. 2.13. ˚आत्मन् m. the Supreme Being. ˚ईशः the sun. ˚नाथः 'lord of the three worlds', an epithet of
    1 Indra; त्रिलोकनाथेन सदा मखद्विषस्त्वया नियम्या ननु दिव्यचक्षुषा R.3.45.
    -2 of Śiva; Ku.5.77. ˚रक्षिन् a. protecting the 3 worlds; त्रिलोकरक्षी महिमा हि वज्रिणः V.1.6.
    -लोकी the three worlds taken collectively, the universe; सत्यामेव त्रिलोकीसरिति हरशिरश्चुम्बिनीविच्छटायाम् Bh.3.95; Śānti.4.22.
    -लोचनः Śiva.
    (-ना) 1 an unchaste woman.
    -2 an epithet of Durgā.
    -लोहकम् the three metals:-- gold, silver, and copper.
    -वर्गः 1 the three objects of wordly existence, i. e. धर्म, अर्थ, and काम; अनेन धर्मः सविशेषमद्य मे त्रिवर्गसारः प्रतिभाति भाविनि Ku.5.38; अन्योन्यानुबन्धम् (त्रिवर्गम्) Kau. A.1.7; प्राप त्रिवर्गं बुबुधे$त्रिवर्गम् (मोक्षम्) Bu. Ch.2.41.
    -2 the three states of loss, stability, and increase; क्षयः स्थानं च वृद्धिश्च त्रिवर्गो नीतिवेदिनाम् Ak.
    -3 the three qualities of nature, i. e. सत्त्व, रजस्, and तमस्.
    -4 the three higher castes.
    -5 the three myrobalans.
    -6 propriety, decorum.
    -वर्णकम् the first three of the four castes of Hindus taken collectively.
    -वर्ष a. three years old; Ms.5.7.
    -वलिः, -ली f. (in comp.) three folds over a woman's navel (regarded as a mark of beauty)
    -वली the anus.
    -वारम् ind. three times, thrice.
    -विक्रमः Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf incarnation. ˚रसः a patent medicine in Āyurveda.
    -विद्यः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -विध a. of three kinds, three-fold.
    -विष्टपम्, -पिष्टपम् 1 the world of Indra, heaven; त्रिविष्टपस्येव पतिं जयन्तः R.6.78.
    -2 the three worlds. ˚सद् m. a god.
    -वृत् a.
    1 threefold; मौञ्जी त्रिवृत्समा श्लक्ष्णा कार्या विप्रस्य मेखला Ms.2.42.
    -2 consisting of three parts (as three गुणs, विद्याs); Bhāg.3.24.33;1.23.39; (consisting of three letters- ओङ्कार); हिरण्यगर्भो वेदानां मन्त्राणां प्रणवस्त्रिवृत् Bhāg.11.16.12. (-m.)
    1 a sacrifice.
    -2 a girdle of three strings; Mb.12.47.44.
    -3 an amulet of three strings. (-f.) a plant possessing valuable purgative properties. ˚करण combining three things, i. e. earth, water, and fire.
    -वृत्तिः livelihood through 3 things (sacrifice, study and alms).
    -वेणिः, -णी f. the place near Prayāga where the Ganges joins the Yamunā and receives under ground the Sarasvatī; the place called दक्षिणप्रयाग where the three sacred rivers separate.
    -वेणुः 1 The staff (त्रिदण्ड) of a Saṁnyāsin; केचित् त्रिवेणुं जगृहुरेके पात्रं कमण्डलुम् Bhāg.11.23.34.
    -2 The pole of a chariot; अथ त्रिवेणुसंपन्नं...... बभञ्ज च महारथम् Rām.3. 51.16; Mb.7.156.83; a three bannered (chariot); Bhāg.4.26.1.
    -वेदः a Brāhmaṇa versed in the three Vedas.
    -शक्तिः a deity (त्रिकला), Māyā; Bhāg.2.6.31.
    -शङ्कुः 1 N. of a celebrated king of the Solar race, king of Ayodhyā and father of Hariśchandra. [He was a wise, pious, and just king, but his chief fault was that he loved his person to an inordinate degree. Desiring to celebrate a sacrifice by virtue of which he could go up to heaven in his mortal body, he requested his family-priest Vasiṣṭha to officiate for him; but being refused he next requested his hundred sons who also rejected his absurd proposal. He, therefore, called them cowardly and impotent, and was, in return for these insults, cursed and degraded by them to be a Chāṇḍāla. While he was in this wretched condition, Viśvāmitra, whose family Triśaṅku had in times of famine laid under deep obligations, undertook to celebrate the sacrifice, and invited all the gods to be present. They, however, declined; whereupon the enraged Viśvāmitra. by his own power lifted up Triśaṅku to the skies with his cherished mortal body. He began to soar higher and higher till his head struck against the vault of the heaven, when he was hurled down head-foremost by Indra and the other gods. The mighty Viśvāmitra, however, arrested him in his downward course, saying 'Stay Triśaṅku', and the unfortunate monarch remained suspended with his head towards the earth as a constellation in the southern hemisphere. Hence the wellknown proverb:-- त्रिशङ्कुरिवान्तरा तिष्ठ Ś.2.]
    -2 the Chātaka bird.
    -3 a cat.
    -4 a grass-hopper.
    -5 a fire- fly. ˚जः an epithet of Hariśchandra. ˚याजिन् m. an epithet of Viśvāmitra.
    -शत a. three hundred.
    (-तम्) 1 one hundred and three.
    -2 three hundred.
    -शरणः a Buddha.
    -शर्करा three kinds of sugar (गुडोत्पन्ना, हिमोत्था, and मधुरा).
    -शाख a. three-wrinkled; भ्रुकुट्या भीषणमुखः प्रकृत्यैव त्रिशाखया Ks.12.72.
    -शालम् a house with three halls or chambers.
    -शिखम् 1 a trident; तदापतद्वै त्रिशिखं गरुत्मते Bhāg.1.59.9.
    -2 a crown or crest (with three points).
    -शिरस् m.
    1 N. of a demon killed by Rāma.
    -2 an epithet of Kubera.
    -3 fever. त्रिशिरस्ते प्रसन्नो$स्मि व्येतु ते मज्ज्वराद्भयम् Bhāg.1.63.29.
    -शीर्षः Śiva.
    -शीर्षकम्, -शूलम् a trident. ˚अङ्कः, ˚धारिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शुक्लम् the holy combination of 'three days' viz. Uttarāyaṇa (day of the gods), the bright half of the moon (day of the manes) and day- time; त्रिशुक्ले मरणं यस्य, L. D. B.
    -शूलिन् m. an epithet of Śiva.
    -शृङ्गः 1 the Trikūṭa mountain.
    -2 a triangle.
    -शोकः the soul.
    -षष्टिः f. sixty-three.
    -ष्टुभ् f. a metre of 4 x 11 syllables.
    -संध्यम्, -संध्यी the three periods of the day, i. e. dawn, noon, and sunset; also
    -त्रिसवनम् (
    -षवणम्); Ms.11.216.
    -संध्यम् ind. at the time of the three Sandhyas; सान्निध्यं पुष्करे येषां त्रिसन्ध्यं कुरुनन्दन Mb.
    -सप्तत a. seventy-third.
    -सप्ततिः f. seventy-three.
    -सप्तन्, -सप्त a. (pl.) three times 7, i. e. 21.
    -सम a. (in geom.) having three equal sides, equilateral.
    -सरः milk, sesamum and rice boiled together.
    -सरकम् drinking wine thrice ('सरकं शीधुपात्रे स्यात् शीधुपाने च शीधुनि' इति विश्वः); प्रातिभं त्रिसरकेण गतानाम् Śi.1.12.
    -सर्गः the creation of the 3 Guṇas; Bhāg.1.1.1.
    -साधन a. having a threefold causality; R.3.13.
    -सामन् a. singing 3 Sāmans (an उद्गातृ); उद्गाता तत्र संग्रामे त्रिसामा दुन्दुभिर्नृप Mb.12.98.27.
    -साम्यम् an equilibrium of the three (qualities); Bhāg.2.7.4.
    -सुपर्णः, -र्णम् 1 N. of the three Ṛigvedic verses (Rv.1.114.3-5).
    -2 N. of T. Ār.1.48-5; -a. familiar with or reciting these verses; Ms.3.185.
    -स्थली the three sacred places: काशी, प्रयाग, and गया.
    -स्थानम् the head, neck and chest to- gether; तन्त्रीलयसमायुक्तं त्रिस्थानकरणान्वितम् Rām.7.71.15. -a.
    1 having 3 dwelling places.
    -2 extending through the 3 worlds.
    -स्रोतस् f. an epithet of the Ganges; त्रिस्रोतसं वहति यो गगनप्रतिष्ठाम् Ś.7.6; R.1.63; Ku.7.15.
    -सीत्य, -हल्य a. ploughed thrice (as a field).
    -हायण a. three years old.

    Sanskrit-English dictionary > त्रि _tri

  • 15 statuo

    stătŭo, ui, utum, 3, v. a. [statum, sup. of sto], to cause to stand (cf.: colloco, pono).
    I.
    Corporeally.
    A.
    To cause to stand, set up, set, station, fix in an upright position.
    1.
    To set up, set in the ground, erect:

    ibi arbores pedicino in lapide statuito,

    Cato, R. R. 18:

    inter parietes arbores ubi statues,

    id. ib.:

    stipites statuito,

    id. ib.:

    palis statutis crebris,

    Varr. R. R. 1, 14 init.:

    pedamenta jacentia statuenda,

    are to be raised, Col. 4, 26:

    pedamentum inter duas vitis,

    Plin. 17, 22, 21, § 194:

    hic statui volo primum aquilam,

    the standard of the troops, Plaut. Pers. 5, 1, 7:

    signifer, statue signum,

    plant the ensign, Liv. 5, 55, 1; Val. Max. 1, 5, 1.—
    2.
    To plant (rare):

    eodem modo vineam statuito, alligato, flexatoque uti fuerit,

    Plin. 17, 22, 35, § 198:

    agro qui statuit meo Te, triste lignum (i. e. arborem),

    Hor. C. 2, 13, 10.—
    3.
    In gen., to place, set or fix, set up, set forth things or persons.
    a.
    Without specifying the place:

    ollam statuito cum aqua,

    let a jar stand with water, Cato, R. R. 156 (157):

    crateras magnos statuunt, i. e. on the table,

    Verg. A. 1, 724; so,

    crateras laeti statuunt,

    id. ib. 7, 147: haec carina satis probe fundata et bene statuta est, well placed, i. e. so that the hull stands perpendicularly (cf.:

    bene lineatam carinam collocavit, v. 42),

    Plaut. Mil. 3, 3, 44:

    nec quidquam explicare, nec statuere potuerant, nec quod statutum esset, manebat, omnia perscindente vento,

    Liv. 21, 58, 7:

    eo die tabernacula statui passus non est,

    to pitch, Caes. B. C. 1, 81; so, aciem statuere, to draw up an army:

    aciem quam arte statuerat, latius porrigit,

    Sall. J. 52, 6.—
    b.
    With designation of the place by in and abl.; by adv. of place; by ante, apud, ad, circa, super, and acc.; by pro and abl.; by abl. alone (very rare), or by in and acc. (very rare): signa domi pro supellectile statuere, Cato ap. Prisc. 7, 19, 95 (p. 782 P.):

    statuite hic lectulos,

    Plaut. Pers. 5, 1, 7:

    etiamsi in caelo Capitolium statueretur,

    Cic. Or. 3, 46, 180:

    statuitur Sollius in illo gladiatorum convivio... atuitur, ut dico, eques Romanus in Apronii convivio,

    is taken to the banquet, id. Verr. 2, 3, 25, § 61 sq.:

    tabernacula in foro statuere,

    Liv. 39, 46, 3:

    in principiis statuit tabernaculum,

    Nep. Eum. 7, 1:

    in nostris castris tibi tabernaculum statue,

    Curt. 5, 11, 6; 8, 13, 20:

    statui in medium undique conspicuum tabernaculum jussit,

    id. 9, 6, 1:

    (sagittae) longae, nisi prius in terra statuerent arcum, haud satis apte imponuntur,

    id. 8, 14, 19:

    sedes curules sacerdotum Augustalium locis, superque eas querceae coronae statuerentur,

    Tac. A. 2, 83:

    donum deae apud Antium statuitur,

    id. ib. 3, 71:

    pro rigidis calamos columnis,

    Ov. F. 3, 529:

    jamque ratem Scythicis auster statuisset in oris,

    Val. Fl. 3, 653:

    statuere vas in loco frigido,

    Pall. Oct. 22.—Of living beings:

    capite in terram statuerem, Ut cerebro dispergat viam,

    Ter. Ad. 3, 2, 18:

    qui capite ipse sua in statuit vestigia sese (= qui sese ipse capite in sua vestigia statuit),

    i. e. stands on his head, Lucr. 4, 472:

    patrem ejus a mortuis excitasses, statuisses ante oculos,

    Cic. Or. 1, 57, 245:

    captivos vinctos in medio statuit,

    Liv. 21, 42, 1:

    ubi primum equus Curtium in vado statuit,

    id. 1, 13, 5:

    quattuor cohortes in fronte statuit,

    id. 28, 33, 12:

    ante se statuit funditores,

    id. 42, 58, 10:

    puerum ad canendum ante tibicinem cum statuisset,

    id. 7, 2, 9:

    procul in conspectu eum (Philopoemenem) statuerunt,

    id. 39, 49, 11:

    media porta robora legionum, duabus circa portis milites levemque armaturam statuit,

    id. 23, 16, 8:

    bovem ad fanum Dianae et ante aram statuit,

    id. 1, 45, 6:

    cum Calchanta circa aram statuisset,

    Val. Max. 8, 11, ext. 6:

    marium si qui eo loci statuisset,

    id. 3, 1, 2 fin.:

    adulescentes ante Caesarem statuunt,

    Tac. A. 4, 8:

    in fronte statuerat ferratos, in cornibus cohortes,

    id. ib. 3, 45:

    puer quis Ad cyathum statuetur?

    Hor. C. 1, 29, 8:

    tu cum pro vitula statuis dulcem Aulide natam Ante aras,

    id. S. 2, 3, 199:

    et statuam ante aras aurata fronte juvencum,

    Verg. A. 9, 627:

    clara regione profundi Aetheros innumeri statuerunt agmina cygni,

    Stat. Th. 3, 525.—
    4. a.
    Of statues, temples, columns, altars, trophies, etc.; constr. with acc. alone, or acc. of the structure and dat. of the person for whom or in whose honor it is erected:

    siquidem mihi aram et statuam statuis,

    Plaut. As. 3, 3, 122:

    huic statuam statui decet ex auro,

    id. Bacch. 4, 4, 1:

    ne ego aurea pro statua vineam tibi statuam,

    id. Curc. 1, 2, 52:

    eique statuam equestrem in rostris statui placere,

    Cic. Phil. 5, 15, 41; so id. ib. 9, 5, 10; 9, 7, 16; id. Verr. 2, 2, 62, § 151; 2, 2, 20, § 48; so,

    simulacrum alicui statuere,

    Val. Max. 1, 1, 8:

    effigiem,

    Verg. A. 2, 184:

    Mancinus eo habitu sibi statuit quo, etc. (effigiem),

    Plin. 34, 5, 10, § 18:

    simulacrum in curia,

    Tac. A. 14, 12:

    quanam in civitate tempium statueretur,

    id. ib. 4, 55:

    se primos templum urbis Romae statuisse,

    id. ib. 4, 56; so id. ib. 4, 15:

    nec tibi de Pario statuam, Germanice, templum,

    Ov. P. 4, 8, 31:

    templa tibi statuam, tribuam tibi turis honorem,

    id. M. 14, 128:

    super terrae tumulum noluit quid statui nisi columellam,

    Cic. Leg. 2, 26, 66:

    victimas atque aras diis Manibus statuentes,

    Tac. A. 3, 2:

    statuitque aras e cespite,

    Ov. M. 7, 240:

    statuantur arae,

    Sen. Med. 579:

    aeneum statuerunt tropaeum,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 23, 69:

    monumentum,

    id. ib. § 70; so,

    in alio orbe tropaea statuere,

    Curt. 7, 7, 14;

    so,

    Plin. 3, 3, 4, § 18: ut illum di perdant qui primus statuit hic solarium, Plaut. Fragm. ap. Gell. 3, 3, 5:

    princeps Romanis solarium horologium statuisse L. Papirius Cursor proditur,

    Plin. 7, 60, 60, § 213:

    a miliario in capite Romani fori statuto,

    id. 3, 5, 9, § 66:

    carceres eo anno in Circo primum statuti,

    Liv. 8, 20, 1:

    quo molem hanc immanis equi statuere?

    Verg. A. 2, 150:

    multo altiorem statui crucem jussit,

    Suet. Galb. 9:

    obeliscam,

    Plin. 36, 9, 14, § 71:

    at nunc disturba quas statuisti machinas,

    Plaut. Ps. 1, 5, 137:

    incensis operibus quae statuerat,

    Nep. Milt. 7, 4:

    si vallum statuitur procul urbis illecebris,

    Tac. A. 4, 2:

    castra in quinto lapide a Carthagine statuit,

    Just. 22, 6, 9.—
    b.
    Poet. and in post-class. prose (rare):

    aliquem statuere = alicui statuam statuere: inter et Aegidas media statuaris in urbe,

    Ov. H. 2, 67:

    statuarque tumulo hilaris et coronatus,

    my statue will be erected, Tac. Dial. 13; so with two acc.: custodem medio statuit quam vilicus horto, whose statue he placed as protectress, etc., Mart. 3, 68, 9; cf.

    in double sense: nudam te statuet, i. e. nudam faciet (= nudabit fortunis), and statuam tibi nu dam faciet,

    Mart. 4, 28, 8.—
    5.
    Of cities, etc., to establish, found, build (in class. prose usu. condo):

    Agamemnon tres ibi urbes statuit,

    Vell. 1, 1, 2:

    urbem quam statuo vestra est,

    Verg. A. 1, 573:

    urbom praeclaram,

    id. ib. 4, 655:

    Persarum statuit Babylona Semiramis urbem,

    Prop. 3, 11 (4, 10), 21:

    ibi civitatem statuerunt,

    Just. 23, 1; so,

    licentia et impunitas asyla statuendi (= aperiendi),

    Tac. A. 3, 60.—Hence, transf.: carmen statuere = carmen condere, to compose, devise a song:

    nunc volucrum... inexpertum carmen, quod tacita statuere bruma,

    Stat. S. 4, 5, 12.—
    B.
    To cause to stand still, to stop (rare; cf.

    sisto, III. B.): navem extemplo statuimus,

    Plaut. Bacch. 2, 3, 57:

    et statuit fessos, fessus et ipse, boves,

    Prop. 4 (5), 9, 4:

    famuli hoc modo statuerunt aquas,

    Arn. 1, p. 30: sanguinem, Oct. Hor. 4.—
    C.
    To cause to stand firm, strengthen, support (rare; = stabilire), only transf.: qui rem publicam certo animo adjuverit, statuerit, Att. ap. Cic. Sest. 56, 120 (Trag. Rel. v. 357 Rib.).
    II.
    Trop.
    A.
    To establish, constitute (= constituo).
    1.
    Esp.: exemplum or documentum (v. edo fin., and cf. Sen. Phoen. 320), to set forth an example or precedent for warning or imitation:

    statuite exemplum impudenti, date pudori praemium,

    Plaut. Rud. 3, 2, 6:

    exemplum statuite in me ut adulescentuli Vobis placere studeant potius quam sibi,

    Ter. Heaut. prol. 51; Auct. Her. 4, 35, 47:

    ut illi intellegere possint, in quo homine statueris exemplum hujus modi,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 45, § 111:

    in quos aliquid exempli populus Romanus statui putat oportere,

    id. ib. 2, 3, 90, §

    210: statuam in te exemplum, ne quis posthac infelicibus miseriis patriae illudat,

    Just. 8, 7, 14:

    documentum autem statui oportere, si quis resipiscat et antiquam societatem respiciat,

    Liv. 24, 45, 5: statueretur immo [p. 1753] documentum, quo uxorem imperator acciperet, a precedent, Tac. A. 12, 6.—
    2.
    Jus statuere, to establish a principle or relation of law:

    ut (majores nostri) omnia omnium rerum jura statuerint,

    Cic. Caecin. 12, 34: qui magistratum potestatemve habebit, si quid in aliquem novi juris statuerit, ipse quoque, adversario postulante, eodem jure uti debebit, if he has established any new principle of law, Edict. Praet. in Dig. 2, 2, 1, § 1:

    si quid injungere inferiori velis, id prius in te ac tuos si ipse juris statueris, facilius omnes oboedientes habeas,

    if you first admit it against yourself, Liv. 26, 36, 3:

    si dicemus in omnibus aequabile jus statui convenire,

    equal principles of law should be applied to all, Auct. Her. 3, 3, 4. —
    3.
    In gen., to establish by authority (of relations, institutions, rights, duties, etc.):

    (Numa) omnis partis religionis statuit sanctissime,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 14, 26:

    hoc judicium sic exspectatur ut non unae rei statui, sed omnibus constitui putetur,

    id. Tull. 15, 36:

    ad formandos animos statuendasque vitae leges, Quint. prooem. 14: sic hujus (virtutis) ut caelestium statuta magnitudo est,

    Sen. Ep. 79, 10:

    vectigal etiam novum ex salaria annona statuerunt,

    Liv. 29, 37, 2:

    novos statuere fines,

    id. 42, 24, 8:

    neque eos quos statuit terminos observat,

    id. 21, 44, 5:

    quibus rebus cum pax statuta esset,

    Just. 5, 10, 8; so id. 25, 1, 1:

    sedesque ibi statuentibus,

    id. 18, 5, 11.—
    4.
    With double acc., to constitute, appoint, create:

    Hirtius arbitrum me statuebat non modo hujus rei, sed totius consulatus sui,

    Cic. Att. 14, 1, a, 2:

    telluris erum natura nec illum, nec quemquam constituit,

    Hor. S. 2, 2, 130:

    de principatu (vinorum) se quisque judicem statuet,

    Plin. 14, 6, 8, § 59:

    praefectus his statuitur Andragoras,

    Just. 21, 4, 5.—
    B.
    To determine, fix, etc. (of temporal or local relations); constr. usually with acc. and dat. or acc. and gen.
    1.
    Modum statuere alicui or alicujus rei, to determine the manner, mode, or measure of, assign limits, restrictions or restraints to a thing or person, to impose restraints upon.
    (α).
    With dat.:

    diuturnitati imperii modum statuendum putavistis,

    that a limit should be assigned to the duration of his power, Cic. Imp. Pomp. 9, 26:

    statui mihi tum modum et orationi meae,

    imposed restraints upon myself and my words, id. Verr. 2, 5, 63, § 163:

    non statuendo felicitati modum, nec cohibendo fortunam,

    by not assigning any limits to his success, Liv. 30, 30, 23 (Pompeium) affirmabant, libertati publicae statuturum modum, Vell. 2, 40:

    cupidinibus statuat natura modum,

    Hor. S. 1, 2, 111:

    quem modum sibi ipsa statuit (crudelitas)?

    Val. Max. 9, 2 pr.:

    modum ipsae res statuunt (i. e. sibi),

    Plin. 28, 15, 61, § 216:

    modum nuptiarum sumptibus statuerunt,

    Just. 21, 4, 5:

    timori quem meo statuam modum?

    Sen. Thyest. 483;

    and with finem: jam statui aerumnis modum et finem cladi,

    id. Herc. Fur. 206. —
    (β).
    With gen.:

    honestius te inimicitiarum modum statuere potuisse quam me humanitatis,

    Cic. Sull. 17, 48:

    ipse modum statuam carminis,

    Ov. Tr. 1, 11, 44:

    errorisque sui sic statuisse modum,

    Prop. 3, 12 (4, 11), 36:

    modum statuunt fellis pondere denarii,

    they limit the quantity of the gall to the weight of a denarius, Plin. 28, 19, 77, § 254.—
    2.
    Condicionem or legem alicui, to impose a condition or law upon one, to dictate, assign a condition to:

    hanc tu condicionem statuis Gaditanis,

    Cic. Balb. 10, 25:

    providete ne duriorem vobis condicionem statuatis ordinique vestro quam ferre possit,

    id. Rab. Post. 6, 15:

    alter eam sibi legem statuerat ut, etc.,

    id. Phil. 10, 6, 12: pretio statuta lege ne modum excederet, etc., the law being assigned to the price that not, etc., i. e. the price being limited by the law, etc., Plin. 33, 7, 40, § 118:

    pacis legem universae Graeciae statuit,

    Just. 9, 5, 2.—So with ellipsis of dat., to agree upon, stipulate:

    statutis condicionibus,

    Just. 6, 1, 3:

    omnibus consentientibus Carthago conditur, statuto annuo vectigali pro solo urbis,

    id. 18, 5, 14. —
    3.
    Finem, to assign or put an end to, make an end of:

    haud opinor commode Finem statuisse orationi militem,

    Ter. Hec. 1, 2, 21:

    et finem statuit cuppedinis atque timoris,

    Lucr. 6, 25:

    cum Fulvius Flaccus finem poenae eorum statuere cogeretur,

    Val. Max. 3, 2, ext. 1: majores vestri omnium magnarum rerum et principia exorsi ab diis sunt, et finem statuerunt, finished, Liv. 45, 39, 10; so,

    terminum: nam templis numquam statuetur terminus aevi,

    Stat. S. 3, 1, 180:

    cum consilii tui bene fortiterque suscepti eum tibi finem statueris, quem ipsa fortuna terminum nostrarum contentionum esse voluisset,

    since you have assigned that end, Cic. Fam. 6, 22, 2.—
    4.
    Pretium alicui rei, to assign a price to something; fix, determine the price of something:

    quae probast mers, pretium ei statuit,

    Plaut. Mil. 3, 1, 132:

    numquam avare pretium statui arti meae,

    Ter. Heaut. prol. 48:

    statuit frumento pretium,

    Tac. A. 2, 87; so with dat. understood:

    ut eos (obsides) pretio quantum ipsi statuissent patres redimi paterentur,

    Liv. 45, 42, 7:

    pretium statuit (i. e. vecturae et sali),

    id. 45, 29, 13; so with in and acc.: ut in singulas amphoras (vini) centeni nummi statuantur, that the price may be set down at 100 sesterces for an amphora, Plin. 14, 4, 6, § 56.—
    5.
    Statuere diem, horam, tempus, locum alicui rei, or alicui, or with dat. gerund., to assign or appoint a day, time, place, etc. (for the more usual diem dicere):

    statutus est comitiis dies,

    Liv. 24, 27, 1:

    diem patrando facinori statuerat,

    id. 35, 35, 15:

    multitudini diem statuit ante quam sine fraude liceret ab armis discedere,

    Sall. C. 36, 2:

    dies insidiis statuitur,

    id. J. 70, 3:

    ad tempus locumque colloquio statuendum,

    Liv. 28, 35, 4:

    subverti leges quae sua spatia (= tempora) quaerendis aut potiundis honoribus statuerint,

    Tac. A. 2, 36.—With ellipsis of dat.:

    observans quem statuere diem,

    Mart. 4, 54, 6:

    noctem unam poscit: statuitur nox,

    Tac. A. 13, 44.—Esp. in the part. statutus, fixed, appointed (in MSS. and edd. often confounded with status; v. sisto fin.):

    institum ut quotannis... libri diebus statutis (statis) recitarentur,

    Suet. Claud. 42:

    ut die statuta omnes equos ante regiam producerent,

    Just. 1, 10, 1:

    quaedam (genera) statutum tempus anni habent,

    Plin. 17, 18, 30, § 135:

    fruges quoque maturitatem statuto tempore expectant,

    Curt. 6, 3, 7:

    sacrificium non esse redditum statuto tempore,

    id. 8, 2, 6:

    statuto tempore quo urbem Mithridati traderet,

    Just. 16, 4, 9:

    cum ad statutam horam omnes convenissent,

    id. 1, 10, 8:

    intra tempus statutum,

    fixed by the law, Dig. 4, 4, 19 and 20.—
    6.
    To recount, count up, state (very rare): statue sex et quinquaginta annos, quibus mox divus Augustus rempublicam rexit: adice Tiberii tres et viginti... centum et viginti anni colliguntur, count, fix the number at, Tac. Or. 17:

    Cinyphiae segetis citius numerabis aristas... quam tibi nostrorum statuatur summa laborum,

    Ov. P. 2, 7, 29.—
    C.
    To decide, determine, with reference to a result, to settle, fix, bring about, choose, make a decision.
    1.
    Of disputes, differences, questions, etc., between others.
    (α).
    With interrog.-clause:

    ut statuatis hoc judicio utrum posthac amicitias clarorum virorum calamitati hominibus an ornamento esse malitis,

    Cic. Balb. 28, 65:

    eam potestatem habetis ut statuatis utrum nos... semper miseri lugeamus, an, etc.,

    id. Mil. 2, 4:

    in hoc homine statuatis, possitne senatoribus judicantibus homo nocentissim us pecuniosissimusque damnari,

    id. Verr. 1, 16, 47:

    vos statuite, recuperatores, utra (sententia) utilior esse videatur,

    id. Caecin. 27, 77:

    decidis tu statuisque quid iis ad denarium solveretur,

    id. Quint. 4, 17:

    magni esse judicis statuere quid quemque cuique praestare oporteret,

    id. Off. 3, 17, 70:

    mihi vero Pompeius statuisse videtur quid vos in judicando spectare oporteret,

    id. Mil. 6, 15:

    semel (senatus) statuerent quid donatum Masinissae vellent,

    Liv. 42, 23:

    nec quid faciendum modo sit statuunt, sed, etc.,

    decide, dictate, id. 44, 22:

    nondum statuerat conservaret eum necne,

    Nep. Eum. 11, 2:

    statutumque (est) quantum curules, quantum plebei pignoris caperent,

    Tac. A. 13, 28: semel nobis esse statuendum quod consilium in illo sequamur, August. ap. Suet. Claud. 4. —
    (β).
    With de:

    ut consules de Caesaris actis cognoscerent, statuerent, judicarent,

    Cic. Att. 16, 16, B, 8:

    et collegas suos de religione statuisse, in senatu de lege statuturos,

    id. ib. 4, 2, 4:

    ut de absente eo C. Licinius statueret ac judicaret,

    Liv. 42, 22:

    si de summa rerum liberum senatui permittat rex statuendi jus,

    id. 42, 62: qui ab exercitu ab imperatore eove cui de ea re statuendi potestas fuerit, dimissus erit, Edict. Praet. in Dig. 3, 2, 1.—Often with reference to punishment:

    cum de P. Lentulo ceterisque statuetis, pro certo habetote, vos simul de exercitu Catilinae decernere,

    Sall. C. 52, 17:

    satis visum de Vestilia statuere,

    to pass sentence against, Tac. A. 2, 85:

    jus statuendi de procuratoribus,

    id. ib. 12, 54:

    facta patribus potestate statuendi de Caeciliano,

    id. ib. 6, 7; so id. ib. 13, 28; cf. id. ib. 15, 14; 2, 85; Suet. Tib. 61 fin. —In partic.: de se statuere, to decide on, or dispose of one's self, i. e. of one's life, = to commit suicide:

    eorum qui de se statuebant humabantur corpora,

    Tac. A. 6, 29.—
    (γ).
    With de and abl. and interrog.-clause:

    si quibusdam populis permittendum esse videatur ut statuant ipsi de suis rebus quo jure uti velint,

    Cic. Balb. 8, 22.—
    (δ).
    With contra:

    consequeris tamen ut eos ipsos quos contra statuas aequos placatosque dimittas,

    Cic. Or. 10, 34. —
    (ε).
    With indef. obj., usu. a neutr. pron.:

    utrum igitur hoc Graeci statuent... an nostri praetores?

    Cic. Fl. 12, 27:

    dixisti quippiam: fixum (i. e. id) et statutum est,

    id. Mur. 30, 62:

    eoque utrique quod statuit contenti sunt,

    Caes. B. C. 1, 87:

    senatus, ne quid absente rege statueret,

    Liv. 39, 24, 13:

    maturato opus est, quidquid statuere placet (senatui),

    id. 8, 13, 17:

    id ubi in P. Licinio ita statutum est,

    id. 41, 15, 10:

    interrogatus quid ipse victorem statuere debere censeret,

    Curt. 8, 14, 43:

    quid in futurum statuerim, aperiam,

    Tac. A. 4, 37:

    utque rata essent quae procuratores sui in judicando statuerent,

    Suet. Claud. 12;

    qul statuit aliquid parte inaudita altera, aequum licet statuerit, haud aequus fuit,

    Sen. Med. 2, 199:

    non ergo quod libet statuere arbiter potest,

    Dig. 4, 8, 32, § 15; cf.:

    earum rerum quas Caesar statuisset, decrevisset, egisset,

    Cic. Att. 16, 16, C, 11.—
    (ζ).
    With de or super and abl.:

    vos de crudelissimis parricidis quid statuatis cunctamini?

    Sall. C. 52, 31:

    nihil super ea re nisi ex voluntate filii statuere,

    Suet. Tib. 13:

    ne quid super tanta re absente principe statueretur,

    Tac. H. 4, 9.—
    (η).
    Absol., mostly pass. impers.:

    ita expediri posse consilium ut pro merito cujusque statueretur,

    Liv. 8, 14, 1:

    tunc ut quaeque causa erit statuetis,

    id. 3, 53, 10:

    non ex rumore statuendum,

    decisions should not be founded on rumors, Tac. A. 3, 69.—
    (θ).
    With cognoscere, to examine ( officially) and decide:

    petit ut vel ipse de eo causa cognita statuat, vel civitatem statuere jubeat,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 19:

    consuli ut cognosceret statueretque senatus permiserat,

    Liv. 39, 3, 2:

    missuros qui de eorum controversiis cognoscerent statuerentque,

    id. 40, 20, 1; 45, 13, 11:

    quod causa cognita erit statuendum,

    Dig. 2, 11, 2, § 8.—
    2.
    With reference to the mind of the subject, to decide, to make up one's mind, conclude, determine, be convinced, usu. with interrog.clause:

    numquam intellegis, statuendum tibi esse, utrum illi homicidae sint an vindices libertatis,

    Cic. Phil. 2, 12, 30:

    illud mirum videri solet, tot homines... statuere non potuisse, utrum judicem an arbitrum, rem an litem dici oporteret,

    id. Mur. 12, 27:

    neque tamen possum statuere, utrum magis mirer, etc.,

    id. de Or. 3, 22, 82:

    ipsi statuerent, quo tempore possent suo jure arma capere,

    id. Tull. 5, 12:

    ut statuerem quid esset faciendum,

    id. Att. 7, 26, 3:

    statuere enim qui sit sapiens, vel maxime videtur esse sapientis,

    id. Ac. 2, 3, 9:

    si habes jam statutum quid tibi agendum putes,

    id. Fam. 4, 2, 4:

    tu quantum tribuendum nobis putes statuas ipse, et, ut spero, statues ex nostra dignitate,

    id. ib. 5, 8, 4:

    vix statui posse utrum quae pro se, an quae contra fratrem petiturus esset ab senatu magis impetrabilia forent,

    Liv. 45, 19, 6:

    quam satis statuerat, utram foveret partem,

    id. 42, 29, 11:

    posse ipsam Liviam statuere, nubendum post Drusum, an, etc.,

    Tac. A. 4, 40:

    statue quem poenae extrahas,

    Sen. Troad. 661.—So with apud animum, to make up one's mind:

    vix statuere apud animum meum possum atrum pejor ipsa res an pejore exemplo agatur,

    Liv. 34, 2, 4:

    proinde ipsi primum statuerent apud animos quid vellent,

    id. 6, 39, 11.—Rarely with neutr, pron. as object:

    quidquid nos de communi sententia statuerimus,

    Cic. Fam. 4, 1, 2:

    sic statue, quidquid statuis, ut causam famamque tuam in arto stare scias,

    Sen. Herc. Fur. 1306.—
    D.
    To decree, order, prescribe.
    1.
    With ut or ne: statuunt ut decem milia hominum in oppidum submittantur, [p. 1754] Caes. B. G. 7, 21:

    eos (Siculos) statuisse ut hoc quod dico postularet,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 42, § 103:

    statuunt illi atque decernunt ut eae litterae... removerentur,

    id. ib. 2, 2, 71, §

    173: statuit iste ut arator... vadimonium promitteret,

    id. ib. 2, 3, 15, §

    38: orare patres ut statuerent ne absentium nomina reciperentur,

    id. ib. 2, 2, 42, §

    103: statuitur ne post M. Brutum proconsulem sit Creta provincia,

    id. Phil. 2, 38, 97:

    (Tiberius) auxit patrum honorem statuendo ut qui ad senatum provocavissent, etc.,

    Tac. A. 14, 28:

    statuiturque (a senatu) ut... in servitute haberentur,

    id. ib. 12, 53.—So of a decree, determination, or agreement by several persons or parties to be carried out by each of them:

    statutum esse (inter plebem et Poenos) ut... impedimenta diriperent,

    Liv. 23, 16, 6:

    Athenienses cum statuerent, ut urbe relicta naves conscenderent,

    Cic. Off. 3, 11, 48:

    statuunt ut fallere custodes tentent,

    Ov. M. 4, 84.—
    2.
    With acc. (post-Aug.):

    remedium statuere,

    to prescribe a remedy against public abuses, Tac. A. 3, 28; 6, 4:

    Caesar ducentesimam (vectigalis) in posterum statuit,

    decreed that one half of one per cent. be the tax, id. ib. 2, 42.—So with sic (= hoc):

    sic, di, statuistis,

    Ov. M. 4, 661.—
    3.
    With dat. and acc. (not ante-Aug.):

    eis (Vestalibus) stipendium de publico statuit,

    decreed, allowed a salary, Liv. 1, 20, 3:

    Aurelio quoque annuam pecuniam statuit princeps,

    decreed, granted, Tac. A. 13, 34:

    biduum criminibus obiciendis statuitur,

    are allowed, id. ib. 3, 13:

    itaque et alimenta pueris statuta... et patribus praemia statuta,

    Just. 12, 4, 8:

    ceu Aeolus insanis statuat certamina ventis,

    Stat. Th. 6, 300:

    non hoc statui sub tempore rebus occasum Aeoniis,

    id. ib. 7, 219:

    statuere alicui munera,

    Val. Fl. 2, 566.—
    4.
    With dat. and interrog.-clause:

    cur his quoque statuisti quantum ex hoc genere frumenti darent,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 5, 21, § 53:

    ordo iis quo quisque die supplicarent, statutus,

    Liv. 7, 28, 8.—
    5.
    In partic., of punishment, etc., to decree, measure out, inflict.
    (α).
    With poenam, etc., with or without in and acc. pers. (mostly post-Aug.):

    considerando... in utra (lege) major poena statuatur,

    Cic. Inv. 2, 49, 145:

    poenam statui par fuisse,

    Tac. A. 14, 49:

    qui non judicium, sed poenam statui videbant,

    id. ib. 11, 6:

    eadem poena in Catum Firmium statuitur,

    id. ib. 6, 31:

    senatu universo in socios facinoris ultimam statuente poenam,

    Suet. Caes. 14;

    so with mercedem (= poenam): debuisse gravissimam temeritatis mercedem statui,

    Liv. 39, 55, 3; cf.

    also: Thrasea, non quidquid nocens reus pati mereretur, id egregio sub principe statuendum disseruit,

    Tac. A. 14, 48.— Absol.:

    non debere eripi patribus vim statuendi (sc. poenas),

    Tac. A. 3, 70.—
    (β).
    With indef. obj., generally with in and acc.: aliquid gravius in aliquem, to proceed severely against:

    obsecrare coepit, ne quid gravius in fratrem statueret,

    Caes. B. G. 1, 20:

    fac aliquid gravius in Hejum statuisse Mamertinos,

    Cic. Verr. 2, 4, 9, § 19:

    res monet cavere ab illis magis quam quid in illos statuamus consultare,

    Sall. C. 52, 3:

    qui cum triste aliquid statuit, fit tristis et ipse,

    Ov. P. 2, 2, 119:

    si quid ob eam rem de se crudelius statuerent,

    Just. 2, 15, 10.—
    (γ).
    With a word expressing the kind of punishment (post-Aug.):

    in Pompeiam Sabinam exilium statuitur,

    Tac. A. 6, 24 (18).—
    (δ).
    De capite, to pass sentence of death:

    legem illam praeclaram quae de capite civis Romani nisi comitiis centuriatis statui vetaret,

    Cic. Rep. 2, 36, 61.—
    E.
    Referring to one's own acts, to resolve, determine, purpose, to propose, with inf. (first in Cic.;

    freq. and class.): statuit ab initio et in eo perseveravit, jus publicano non dicere,

    Cic. Prov. Cons. 5, 10:

    P. Clodius cum statuisset omni scelere in praetura vexare rem publicam,

    id. Mil. 9, 24:

    statuerat excusare,

    to decline the office, id. Lig. 7, 21:

    cum statuissem scribere ad te aliquid,

    id. Off. 1, 2, 4:

    quod iste certe statuerat et deliberaverat non adesse,

    id. Verr. 2, 1, 1, § 1:

    se statuisse animum advertere in omnes nauarchos,

    id. ib. 2, 5, 40, §

    105: nam statueram in perpetuum tacere,

    id. Fam. 4, 4, 4:

    statueram... nihil de illo dicere,

    id. Fragm. Clod. 1, 1:

    statueram recta Appia Romam (i. e. venire),

    id. Att. 16, 10, 1:

    Pompeius statuerat bello decertare,

    Caes. B. C. 3, 86: si cedere hinc statuisset, Liv. 44, 39, 7:

    triumphare mense Januario statuerat,

    id. 39, 15:

    immemor sim propositi quo statui non ultra attingere externa nisi qua Romanis cohaererent rebus,

    id. 39, 48:

    rex quamquam dissimulare statuerat,

    id. 42, 21:

    opperiri ibi hostium adventum statuit,

    id. 42, 54, 9:

    ut statuisse non pugnare consules cognitum est,

    id. 2, 45, 9:

    exaugurare fana statuit,

    id. 1, 55, 2:

    Delphos mittere statuit,

    id. 1, 56, 5:

    eos deducere in agros statuerunt,

    id. 40, 38, 2:

    tradere se, ait, moenia statuisse,

    id. 8, 25, 10:

    Samnitium exercitus certamine ultimo fortunam experiri statuit,

    id. 7, 37, 4:

    statuit sic adfectos hosti non obicere,

    id. 44, 36, 2:

    sub idem tempus statuit senatus Carthaginem excidere,

    Vell. 1, 12, 2:

    statui pauca disserere,

    Tac. H. 4, 73:

    amoliri juvenem specie honoris statuit,

    id. A. 2, 42:

    statuerat urbem novam condere,

    Curt. 4, 8, 1:

    statuerat parcere urbi conditae a Cyro,

    id. 7, 6, 20:

    rex statuerat inde abire,

    id. 7, 11, 4:

    Alexander statuerat ex Syria petere Africam,

    id. 10, 1, 17; 10, 5, 24; 5, 27 (9), 13; so,

    statutum habere cum animo ac deliberatum,

    to have firmly and deliberately resolved, Cic. Verr. 2, 3, 41, § 95.—With sic:

    caedis initium fecisset a me, sic enim statuerat,

    id. Phil. 3, 7, 29.—
    F.
    To judge, declare as a judgment, be of opinion, hold (especially of legal opinions), think, consider (always implying the establishment of a principle, or a decided conviction; cf.: existimo, puto, etc.).
    1.
    With acc. and inf.
    a.
    In gen.:

    senatus consulta falsa delata ab eo judicavimus... leges statuimus per vim et contra auspicia latas,

    Cic. Phil. 12, 5, 12:

    statuit senatus hoc ne illi quidem esse licitum cui concesserat omnia,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 35, § 81:

    quin is tamen (judex) statuat fieri non posse ut de isto non severissime judicetur,

    id. ib. 2, 3, 62, §

    144: hujusce rei vos (recuperatores) statuetis nullam esse actionem qui obstiterit armatis hominibus?

    id. Caecin. 13, 39, ut quisquam juris numeretur peritus, qui id statuit esse jus quod non oporteat judicari, who holds that to be the law, id. ib. 24, 68:

    is (Pompeius) se in publico statuit esse non posse,

    id. Pis. 13, 29:

    tu unquam tantam plagam tacitus accipere potuisses, nisi hoc ita statuisses, quidquid dixisses te deterius esse facturum?

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 58, § 133:

    si causa cum causa contenderet, nos nostram perfacile cuivis probaturos statuebamus,

    we were sure, id. Quint. 30, 92:

    non statuit sibi quidquam licere quod non patrem suum facere vidisset,

    id. Verr. 2, 3, 90, § 211:

    hi sibi nullam societatem communis utilitatis causa statuunt esse cum civibus,

    assume, id. Off. 3, 6, 28:

    cum igitur statuisset opus esse ad eam rem constituendam pecunia,

    had become convinced, id. ib. 2, 23, 82:

    quo cive neminem ego statuo in hac re publica esse fortiorem,

    id. Planc. 21, 51:

    quam quidem laudem sapientiae statuo esse maximam,

    id. Fam. 5, 13, 1:

    hoc anno statuit temporis esse satis,

    Ov. F. 1, 34:

    nolim statuas me mente maligna id facere,

    Cat. 67, 37.— So with sic:

    velim sic statuas tuas mihi litteras longissimas quasque gratissimas fore,

    Cic. Fam. 7, 33 fin.:

    ego sic statuo a me in hac causa pietatis potius quam defensionis partes esse susceptas,

    I hold, lay down as the principle of my defence, id. Sest. 2, 3:

    quod sic statuit omnino consularem legem nullam putare,

    id. ib. 64, 135:

    sic statuo et judico, neminem tot et tanta habuisse ornamenta dicendi,

    id. Or. 2, 28, 122. —Hence, statui, I have judged, i. e. I know, and statueram, I had judged, i. e. I knew:

    ut ego qui in te satis consilii statuerim esse, mallem Peducaeum tibi consilium dare quam me, ironically,

    Cic. Att. 1, 5, 4:

    qui saepe audissent, nihil esse pulchrius quam Syracusarum moenia, statuerant se, si ea Verre praetore non vidissent, numquam esse visuros,

    id. Verr. 2, 5, 36, § 95.—With neutr. pron.:

    si dicam non recte aliquid statuere eos qui consulantur,

    that they hold an erroneous opinion, Cic. Caecin. 24, 68; cf.:

    quis hoc statuit umquam, aut cui concedi potest, ut eum jure potuerit occidere a quo, etc.,

    id. Tull. 24, 56; Quint. 5, 13, 21.—
    b.
    Particularly of a conclusion drawn from circumstances, to judge, infer, conclude; declare (as an inference):

    cum tuto senatum haberi non posse judicavistis, tum statuiistis, etiam intra muros Antonii scelus versari,

    Cic. Phil. 3, 5, 13: quod si aliter statuetis, videte ne hoc vos statuatis, qui vivus decesserit, ei vim non esse factam, id. Caecin. 16, 46:

    quid? si tu ipse statuisti, bona P. Quinctii ex edicto possessa non esse?

    id. Quint. 24, 76:

    ergo ad fidem bonam statuit pertinere notum esse emptori vitium quod nosset venditor,

    id. Off. 3, 16, 67:

    Juppiter esse pium statuit quodcumque juvaret,

    Ov. H. 4, 133.—With neutr. pron.:

    hoc (i. e. litteris Gabinii credendum non esse) statuit senatus cum frequens supplicationem Gabinio denegavit,

    Cic. Prov. Cons. 6, 14:

    quod si tum statuit opus esse, quid cum ille decessisset, Flacco existimatis statuendum et faciendum fuisse?

    id. Fl. 12, 29; cf. id. Caecin. 16, 46, supra; so,

    hoc si ita statuetis,

    id. ib. 16, 47.—
    c.
    Esp. with gerund.-clause.
    (α).
    To hold, judge, think, consider, acknowledge, that something must be done, or should have been done:

    tu cum tuos amicos in provinciam quasi in praedam invitabas... non statuebas tibi de illorum factis rationem esse reddendam?

    did you not consider, did it not strike you? Cic. Verr. 2, 2, 11, § 29: statuit, si hoc crimen extenuari vellet, nauarchos omnes vita esse privandos, he thought it necessary to deprive, etc., id. ib. 2, 5, 40, §

    103: ut statuas mihi non modo non cedendum, sed etiam tuo auxilio utendum fuisse,

    id. Fam. 5, 2, 10:

    statuebam sic, boni nihil ab illis nugis expectandum,

    id. Sest. 10, 24:

    Antigonus statuit aliquid sibi consilii novi esse capiendum,

    Nep. Eum. 8, 4. —So with opus fuisse:

    ut hoc statuatis oratione longa nihil opus fuisse,

    acknowledge, Cic. Verr. 1, 18, 56: causam sibi dicendam esse statuerat jam ante quam hoc usu venit, knew (cf. a. supra), id. ib. 2, 5, 39, § 101. —
    (β).
    To think that one must do something, to resolve, propose, usu. with dat. pers.:

    manendum mihi statuebam quasi in vigilia quadam consulari ac senatoria,

    Cic. Phil. 1, 1, 1: quae vobis fit injuria si statuimus, vestro nobis judicio standum esse, if we conclude, purpose, to abide, etc., id. Fl. 27, 65:

    ut ea quae statuisses tibi in senatu dicenda, reticeres,

    id. Fam. 5, 2, 1:

    statuit tamen nihil sibi in tantis injuriis gravius faciendum,

    id. Clu. 6, 16:

    Caesar statuit exspectandam classem,

    Caes. B. G. 3, 14:

    non expectandum sibi statuit dum, etc.,

    id. ib. 1, 11:

    quod eo tempore statuerat non esse faciendum,

    id. B. C. 3, 44:

    statuit sibi nihil agitandum,

    Sall. J. 39, 5:

    Metellus statuit alio more bellum gerendum,

    id. ib. 54, 5:

    Laco statuit accuratius sibi agendum cum Pharnabazo,

    Nep. Alcib. 10, 2:

    sororis filios tollendos statuit,

    Just. 38, 1.—
    2.
    With ut:

    si, ut Manilius statuebat, sic est judicatum (= ut judicandum esse statuebat),

    Cic. Caecin. 24, 69:

    ut veteres statuerunt poetae (ut = quod ita esse),

    id. Arat. 267 (33): quae majora auribus accepta sunt quam oculis noscuntur, ut statuit, as he thought, i. e. that those things were greater, etc., Liv. 45, 27:

    cum esset, ut ego mihi statuo, talis qualem te esse video,

    Cic. Mur. 14, 32.—
    3.
    With two acc. (= duco, existimo):

    omnes qui libere de re publica sensimus, statuit ille quidem non inimicos, sed hostes,

    regarded not as adversaries, but as foes, Cic. Phil. 11, 1, 3:

    Anaximenes aera deum statuit,

    id. N. D. 10, 26:

    voluptatem summum bonum statuens,

    id. Off. 1, 2, 5:

    video Lentulum cujus ego parentem deum ac patronum statuo fortunae ac nominis mei,

    id. Sest. 69, 144:

    si rectum statuerimus concedere amicis quidquid velint,

    id. Lael. 11, 38:

    Hieronymus summum bonum statuit non dolere,

    id. Fin. 2, 6, 19:

    noster vero Plato Titanum e genere statuit eos qui... adversentur magistratibus,

    id. Leg. 3, 2, 5:

    decretum postulat, quo justae inter patruos fratrumque filias nuptiae statuerentur,

    Tac. A. 12, 7:

    optimum in praesentia statuit reponere odium,

    id. Agr. 39.— P. a.: stătūtus, a, um, i. e. baculo, propped, leaning on a stick (dub. v. I. C. supra):

    vidistis senem... statutum, ventriosum?

    Plaut. Rud. 2, 2, 11.—Hence, subst.: stătūtum, i, n., a law, decision, determination, statute (late Lat.):

    Dei,

    Lact. 2, 16, 14:

    Parcarum leges ac statuta,

    id. 1, 11, 14:

    statuta Dei et placita,

    id. 7, 25, 8.

    Lewis & Short latin dictionary > statuo

  • 16 go

    Ⅰ.
    go1 [gəʊ]
    (game) jeu m de go
    Ⅱ.
    go2 [gəʊ]
    aller ⇒ 1A (a)-(c), 1A (e), 1A (f), 1E (a)-(c), 1G (a), 2 (a) s'en aller ⇒ 1A (d) être ⇒ 1B (a) devenir ⇒ 1B (b) tomber en panne ⇒ 1B (c) s'user ⇒ 1B (d) se détériorer ⇒ 1B (e) commencer ⇒ 1C (a) aller (+ infinitif) ⇒ 1C (b), 1C (c) marcher ⇒ 1C (d) disparaître ⇒ 1D (a), 1D (c) se passer ⇒ 1E (d) s'écouler ⇒ 1E (e) s'appliquer ⇒ 1F (b) se vendre ⇒ 1F (e) contribuer ⇒ 1G (c) aller ensemble ⇒ 1H (a) tenir le coup ⇒ 1H (c) faire ⇒ 2 (b), 2 (c) coup ⇒ 3 (a) essai ⇒ 3 (a) tour ⇒ 3 (b) dynamisme ⇒ 3 (c)
    (pl goes [gəʊz], 3rd pres sing goes [gəʊz], pt went [went], pp gone [gɒn])
    A.
    (a) (move, travel → person) aller; (→ vehicle) aller, rouler;
    ∎ we're going to Paris/Japan/Spain nous allons à Paris/au Japon/en Espagne;
    ∎ he went to the office/a friend's house il est allé au bureau/chez un ami;
    ∎ I want to go home je veux rentrer;
    ∎ the salesman went from house to house le vendeur est allé de maison en maison;
    ∎ we went by car/on foot nous y sommes allés en voiture/à pied;
    ∎ there goes the train! voilà le train (qui passe)!;
    ∎ the bus goes by way of or through Dover le bus passe par Douvres;
    ∎ does this train go to Glasgow? ce train va-t-il à Glasgow?;
    ∎ the truck was going at 150 kilometres an hour le camion roulait à ou faisait du 150 kilomètres (à l')heure;
    ∎ go behind those bushes va derrière ces arbustes;
    ∎ where do we go from here? où va-t-on maintenant?; figurative qu'est-ce qu'on fait maintenant?;
    ∎ to go to the doctor aller voir ou aller chez le médecin;
    ∎ he went straight to the director il est allé directement voir ou trouver le directeur;
    ∎ to go to prison aller en prison;
    ∎ to go to the toilet aller aux toilettes;
    ∎ to go to sb for advice aller demander conseil à qn;
    ∎ let the children go first laissez les enfants passer devant, laissez passer les enfants d'abord;
    ∎ I'll go next c'est à moi après;
    ∎ who goes next? (in game) c'est à qui (le tour)?;
    ∎ Military who goes there? qui va là?, qui vive?;
    ∎ here we go again! ça y est, ça recommence!;
    ∎ there he goes! le voilà!;
    ∎ there he goes again! (there he is again) le revoilà!; (he's doing it again) ça y est, il est reparti!
    ∎ to go shopping aller faire des courses;
    ∎ to go fishing/hunting aller à la pêche/à la chasse;
    ∎ to go riding aller faire du cheval;
    ∎ let's go for a walk/bike ride/swim allons nous promener/faire un tour à vélo/nous baigner;
    ∎ they went on a trip ils sont partis en voyage;
    ∎ British go and buy the paper, American go buy the paper va acheter le journal;
    ∎ I'll go to see her or American go see her tomorrow j'irai la voir demain;
    ∎ don't go and tell him!, don't go telling him! ne va pas le lui dire!, ne le lui dis pas!;
    ∎ don't go bothering your sister ne va pas embêter ta sœur;
    ∎ you had to go and tell him! il a fallu que tu le lui dises!;
    ∎ he's gone and locked us out! il est parti et nous a laissé à la porte!;
    ∎ you've gone and done it now! vraiment, tu as tout gâché!
    ∎ he'll go as high as £300 il ira jusqu'à 300 livres;
    ∎ the temperature went as high as 36° C la température est montée jusqu'à 36° C;
    ∎ he went so far as to say it was her fault il est allé jusqu'à dire que c'était de sa faute à elle;
    ∎ now you've gone too far! là tu as dépassé les bornes!;
    ∎ I'll go further and say he should resign j'irai plus loin et je dirai qu'il ou j'irai jusqu'à dire qu'il devrait démissionner;
    ∎ the temperature sometimes goes below zero la température descend ou tombe parfois au-dessous de zéro;
    ∎ her attitude went beyond mere impertinence son comportement était plus qu'impertinent
    (d) (depart, leave) s'en aller, partir;
    ∎ I must be going il faut que je m'en aille ou que je parte;
    ∎ they went early ils sont partis tôt;
    ∎ you may go vous pouvez partir;
    ∎ what time does the train go? à quelle heure part le train?;
    ∎ familiar get going! vas-y!, file!;
    ∎ archaic be gone! allez-vous-en!;
    ∎ either he goes or I go l'un de nous deux doit partir
    ∎ to go to church/school aller à l'église/l'école;
    ∎ to go to a meeting aller ou assister à une réunion;
    ∎ that road goes to the market square cette route va ou mène à la place du marché
    B.
    ∎ to go barefoot/naked se promener pieds nus/tout nu;
    ∎ to go armed porter une arme;
    ∎ her family goes in rags sa famille est en haillons;
    ∎ the job went unfilled le poste est resté vacant;
    ∎ to go unnoticed passer inaperçu;
    ∎ such crimes must not go unpunished de tels crimes ne doivent pas rester impunis
    (b) (become) devenir;
    ∎ my father is going grey mon père grisonne;
    ∎ she went white with rage elle a blêmi de colère;
    ∎ my hands went clammy mes mains sont devenues moites;
    ∎ the tea's gone cold le thé a refroidi;
    ∎ have you gone mad? tu es devenu fou?;
    ∎ to go bankrupt faire faillite;
    ∎ the country has gone Republican le pays est maintenant républicain
    (c) (stop working → engine) tomber en panne; (→ fuse) sauter; (→ bulb, lamp) sauter, griller;
    ∎ the battery's going la pile commence à être usée
    (d) (wear out) s'user; (split) craquer; (break) (se) casser;
    ∎ his trousers are going at the knees son pantalon s'use aux genoux;
    ∎ the jacket went at the seams la veste a craqué aux coutures
    (e) (deteriorate, fail → health) se détériorer; (→ hearing, sight) baisser;
    ∎ all his strength went and he fell to the floor il a perdu toutes ses forces et il est tombé par terre;
    ∎ his voice is going il devient aphone;
    ∎ his voice is gone il est aphone, il a une extinction de voix;
    ∎ her mind has started to go elle n'a plus toute sa tête ou toutes ses facultés
    C.
    ∎ what are we waiting for? let's go! qu'est-ce qu'on attend? allons-y!;
    ∎ familiar here goes!, here we go! allez!, on y va!;
    ∎ go! partez!;
    ∎ you'd better get going on or with that report! tu ferais bien de te mettre à ou de t'attaquer à ce rapport!;
    ∎ it won't be so hard once you get going ça ne sera pas si difficile une fois que tu seras lancé;
    ∎ familiar go to it! (get to work) au boulot!; (in encouragement) allez-y!
    ∎ to be going to do sth (be about to) aller faire qch, être sur le point de faire qch; (intend to) avoir l'intention de faire qch;
    ∎ you were just going to tell me about it vous étiez sur le point de ou vous alliez m'en parler;
    ∎ I was going to visit her yesterday but her mother arrived j'avais l'intention de ou j'allais lui rendre visite hier mais sa mère est arrivée
    ∎ are you going to be at home tonight? est-ce que vous serez chez vous ce soir?;
    ∎ we're going to do exactly as we please nous ferons ce que nous voulons;
    ∎ she's going to be a doctor elle va être médecin;
    ∎ there's going to be a storm il va y avoir un orage;
    ∎ he's going to have to work really hard il va falloir qu'il travaille très dur
    (d) (function → clock, machine) marcher, fonctionner; (start functioning) démarrer;
    ∎ is the fan going? est-ce que le ventilateur est en marche ou marche?;
    ∎ the car won't go la voiture ne veut pas démarrer;
    ∎ he had the television and the radio going il avait mis la télévision et la radio en marche;
    ∎ the washing machine is still going la machine à laver tourne encore, la lessive n'est pas terminée;
    ∎ to get sth going (car, machine) mettre qch en marche; (business, project) lancer qch;
    ∎ her daughter kept the business going sa fille a continué à faire marcher l'affaire;
    ∎ to keep a conversation/fire going entretenir une conversation/un feu
    (e) (sound → alarm clock, bell) sonner; (→ alarm, siren) retentir
    ∎ she went like this with her eyebrows elle a fait comme ça avec ses sourcils
    ∎ to go on radio/television passer à la radio/à la télévision
    D.
    (a) (disappear) disparaître;
    ∎ the snow has gone la neige a fondu ou disparu;
    ∎ all the sugar's gone il n'y a plus de sucre;
    ∎ my coat has gone mon manteau n'est plus là ou a disparu;
    ∎ all our money has gone (spent) nous avons dépensé tout notre argent; (lost) nous avons perdu tout notre argent; (stolen) on a volé tout notre argent;
    ∎ I don't know where the money goes these days l'argent disparaît à une vitesse incroyable ces temps-ci;
    ∎ gone are the days when he took her dancing elle est bien loin, l'époque où il l'emmenait danser
    ∎ the last paragraph must go il faut supprimer le dernier paragraphe;
    ∎ I've decided that car has to go j'ai décidé de me débarrasser de cette voiture;
    ∎ that new secretary has got to go il va falloir se débarrasser de la nouvelle secrétaire
    (c) euphemism (die) disparaître, s'éteindre;
    ∎ he is (dead and) gone il nous a quittés;
    ∎ his wife went first sa femme est partie avant lui;
    ∎ after I go... quand je ne serai plus là...
    E.
    (a) (extend, reach) aller, s'étendre;
    ∎ our property goes as far as the forest notre propriété va ou s'étend jusqu'au bois;
    ∎ the path goes right down to the beach le chemin descend jusqu'à la mer;
    ∎ figurative her thinking didn't go that far elle n'a pas poussé le raisonnement aussi loin;
    ∎ my salary doesn't go very far je ne vais pas loin avec mon salaire;
    ∎ money doesn't go very far these days l'argent part vite à notre époque;
    ∎ their difference of opinion goes deeper than I thought leur différend est plus profond que je ne pensais
    (b) (belong) aller, se mettre, se ranger;
    ∎ the dictionaries go on that shelf les dictionnaires se rangent ou vont sur cette étagère;
    ∎ where do the towels go? où est-ce qu'on met les serviettes?;
    ∎ that painting goes here ce tableau se met ou va là
    (c) (be contained in, fit) aller;
    ∎ this last sweater won't go in the suitcase ce dernier pull n'ira pas ou n'entrera pas dans la valise;
    ∎ the piano barely goes through the door le piano entre ou passe de justesse par la porte;
    ∎ this belt just goes round my waist cette ceinture est juste assez longue pour faire le tour de ma taille;
    ∎ the lid goes on easily enough le couvercle se met assez facilement
    (d) (develop, turn out) se passer;
    ∎ how did your interview go? comment s'est passé ton entretien?;
    ∎ I'll see how things go je vais voir comment ça se passe;
    ∎ we can't tell how things will go on ne sait pas comment ça se passera;
    ∎ everything went well tout s'est bien passé;
    ∎ if all goes well si tout va bien;
    ∎ the meeting went badly/well la réunion s'est mal/bien passée;
    ∎ the negotiations are going well les négociations sont en bonne voie;
    ∎ the vote went against them/in their favour le vote leur a été défavorable/favorable;
    ∎ everything was going fine until she showed up tout allait ou se passait très bien jusqu'à ce qu'elle arrive;
    ∎ everything went wrong ça a mal tourné;
    ∎ familiar how's it going?, how are things going? (comment) ça va?;
    ∎ the way things are going, we might both be out of a job soon au train où vont ou vu comment vont les choses, nous allons bientôt nous retrouver tous les deux au chômage
    (e) (time → elapse) s'écouler, passer; (→ last) durer;
    ∎ the journey went quickly je n'ai pas vu le temps passer pendant le voyage;
    ∎ there were only five minutes to go before… il ne restait que cinq minutes avant…;
    ∎ time goes so slowly when you're not here le temps me paraît tellement long quand tu n'es pas là;
    ∎ how's the time going? combien de temps reste-t-il?
    F.
    ∎ what your mother says goes! fais ce que dit ta mère!;
    ∎ whatever the boss says goes c'est le patron qui fait la loi;
    ∎ anything goes on fait ce qu'on veut
    (b) (be valid, hold true) s'appliquer;
    ∎ that rule goes for everyone cette règle s'applique à tout le monde;
    ∎ that goes for us too (that applies to us) ça s'applique à nous aussi; (we agree with that) nous sommes aussi de cet avis
    (c) (be expressed, run → report, story)
    ∎ the story or rumour goes that she left him le bruit court qu'elle l'a quitté;
    ∎ so the story goes du moins c'est ce que l'on dit ou d'après les on-dit;
    ∎ how does the story go? comment c'est cette histoire?;
    ∎ I forget how the poem goes now j'ai oublié le poème maintenant;
    ∎ how does the tune go? c'est quoi ou c'est comment, l'air?;
    ∎ her theory goes something like this sa théorie est plus ou moins la suivante
    ∎ to go by or under the name of répondre au nom de;
    ∎ he now goes by or under another name il se fait appeler autrement maintenant
    (e) (be sold) se vendre;
    ∎ flats are going cheap at the moment les appartements ne se vendent pas très cher en ce moment;
    ∎ the necklace went for £350 le collier s'est vendu 350 livres;
    ∎ going, going, gone! (at auction) une fois, deux fois, adjugé!
    G.
    (a) (be given → award, prize) aller, être donné; (→ inheritance, property) passer;
    ∎ the contract is to go to a private firm le contrat ira à une entreprise privée;
    ∎ credit should go to the teachers le mérite en revient aux enseignants;
    ∎ every penny will go to charity tout l'argent va ou est destiné à une œuvre de bienfaisance
    ∎ a small portion of the budget went on education une petite part du budget a été consacrée ou est allée à l'éducation;
    ∎ all his money goes on drink tout son argent part dans la boisson
    (c) (contribute) contribuer, servir;
    ∎ all that just goes to prove my point tout ça confirme bien ce que j'ai dit;
    ∎ it has all the qualities that go to make a good film ça a toutes les qualités d'un bon film
    (d) (have recourse) avoir recours, recourir;
    ∎ to go to arbitration recourir à l'arbitrage
    H.
    (a) (be compatible → colours, flavours) aller ensemble;
    ∎ orange and mauve don't really go l'orange et le mauve ne vont pas vraiment ensemble
    ∎ let me know if you hear of any jobs going faites-moi savoir si vous entendez parler d'un emploi;
    ∎ are there any flats going for rent in this building? y a-t-il des appartements à louer dans cet immeuble?;
    ∎ familiar any whisky going? tu as un whisky à m'offrir?□
    (c) (endure) tenir le coup;
    ∎ we can't go much longer without water nous ne pourrons pas tenir beaucoup plus longtemps sans eau
    ∎ we'll only stop if you're really desperate to go on ne s'arrête que si tu ne tiens vraiment plus;
    ∎ I went before I came j'ai fait avant de venir
    ∎ 5 into 60 goes 12 60 divisé par 5 égale 12;
    ∎ 6 into 5 won't go 5 n'est pas divisible par 6
    ∎ she isn't bad, as teachers go elle n'est pas mal comme enseignante;
    ∎ as houses go, it's pretty cheap ce n'est pas cher pour une maison;
    ∎ as things go today par les temps qui courent;
    ∎ there goes my chance of winning a prize je peux abandonner tout espoir de gagner un prix;
    ∎ there you go again, always blaming other people ça y est, toujours à rejeter la responsabilité sur les autres;
    ∎ there you go! (here you are) tiens!; (I told you so) voilà!;
    ∎ there you go, two hamburgers and a coke et voici, deux hamburgers et un Coca;
    ∎ there you go, what did I tell you? voilà ou tiens, qu'est-ce que je t'avais dit!
    (a) (follow, proceed along) aller, suivre;
    ∎ if we go this way, we'll get there much more quickly si nous passons par là, nous arriverons bien plus vite
    (b) (travel) faire, voyager;
    ∎ we've only gone 5 kilometres nous n'avons fait que 5 kilomètres;
    ∎ she went the whole length of the street before coming back elle a descendu toute la rue avant de revenir
    ∎ ducks go "quack" les canards font "coin-coin";
    ∎ the clock goes "tick tock" l'horloge fait "tic tac";
    ∎ the gun went bang et pan! le coup est parti;
    ∎ familiar then he goes "hand it over" puis il fait "donne-le-moi"
    ∎ to go 10 risquer 10;
    ∎ Cards to go no/two trumps annoncer sans/deux atout(s);
    ∎ figurative to go one better (than sb) surenchérir (sur qn)
    ∎ I could really go a beer je me paierais bien une bière
    ∎ to go it (go fast) filer; (behave wildly) se défoncer;
    ∎ familiar how goes it? ça marche?
    3 noun
    (a) British (attempt, try) coup m, essai m;
    ∎ to have a go at sth/doing sth essayer qch/de faire qch;
    ∎ he had another go il a fait une nouvelle tentative, il a ressayé;
    ∎ let's have a go! essayons!; familiar (let me try) laisse-moi essayer!□ ;
    ∎ have another go! encore un coup!;
    ∎ I've never tried it but I'll give it a go je n'ai encore jamais fait l'expérience mais je vais essayer;
    ∎ she passed her exams first go elle a eu ses examens du premier coup;
    ∎ he knocked down all the skittles at one go il a renversé toutes les quilles d'un coup;
    ∎ £1 a go (at fair etc) une livre la partie ou le tour;
    ∎ to have a go on the dodgems faire un tour d'autos tamponneuses;
    ∎ he wouldn't let me have or give me a go (on his bicycle etc) il ne voulait pas me laisser l'essayer
    (b) British (in games → turn) tour m;
    ∎ it's your go c'est ton tour ou c'est à toi (de jouer);
    ∎ whose go is it? à qui de jouer?, à qui le tour?
    (c) familiar (energy, vitality) dynamisme□ m, entrain□ m;
    ∎ to be full of go avoir plein d'énergie, être très dynamique;
    ∎ she's got plenty of go elle est pleine d'entrain;
    ∎ the new man has no go in him le nouveau manque d'entrain
    (d) familiar (success) succès□ m, réussite□ f;
    ∎ he's made a go of the business il a réussi à faire marcher l'affaire;
    ∎ to make a go of a marriage réussir un mariage;
    ∎ I tried to persuade her but it was no go j'ai essayé de la convaincre mais il n'y avait rien à faire
    (e) (fashion) mode f;
    ∎ short hair is all the go les cheveux courts sont le dernier cri ou font fureur
    ∎ to have a go at sb (physically) rentrer dans qn; (verbally) passer un savon à qn;
    ∎ they had a real go at one another! qu'est-ce qu'ils se sont mis!;
    ∎ she had a go at her boyfriend elle a passé un de ces savons à son copain;
    ∎ British police have warned the public not to have a go, the fugitive may be armed la police a prévenu la population de ne pas s'en prendre au fugitif car il pourrait être armé;
    ∎ it's all go ça n'arrête pas!;
    ∎ all systems go! c'est parti!;
    ∎ the shuttle is go for landing la navette est bonne ou est parée ou a le feu vert pour l'atterrissage
    ∎ he must be going on fifty il doit approcher de la ou aller sur la cinquantaine;
    ∎ it was going on (for) midnight by the time we finished quand on a terminé, il était près de minuit
    ∎ I've been on the go all day je n'ai pas arrêté de toute la journée□ ;
    ∎ to be always on the go être toujours à trotter ou à courir, avoir la bougeotte;
    ∎ to keep sb on the go faire trimer qn
    ∎ I have several projects on the go at present j'ai plusieurs projets en route en ce moment□
    à faire;
    ∎ there are only three weeks/five miles to go il ne reste plus que trois semaines/cinq miles;
    ∎ five done, three to go cinq de faits, trois à faire
    esp American (to take out) two hamburgers to go deux hamburgers à emporter!
    (a) (move) circuler; (of rumour) courir;
    ∎ policemen usually go about in pairs en général, les policiers circulent par deux;
    ∎ you can't go about saying things like that! il ne faut pas raconter des choses pareilles!
    (b) Nautical (change tack) virer de bord
    (a) (get on with) s'occuper de;
    ∎ to go about one's business vaquer à ses occupations
    (b) (set about) se mettre à;
    ∎ she showed me how to go about it elle m'a montré comment faire ou comment m'y prendre;
    ∎ how do you go about applying for the job? comment doit-on s'y prendre ou faire pour postuler l'emploi?
    (c) (country) parcourir
    ∎ her son goes about with an older crowd son fils fréquente des gens plus âgés que lui;
    ∎ he's going about with Rachel these days il sort avec Rachel en ce moment
    traverser
    traverser;
    ∎ your brother has just gone across to the shop ton frère est allé faire un saut au magasin en face
    (a) (follow) suivre
    (b) (pursue, seek → criminal) poursuivre; (→ prey) chasser; (→ job, prize) essayer d'obtenir;
    ∎ he goes after all the women il court après toutes les femmes;
    ∎ I'm going after that job je vais essayer d'obtenir cet emploi
    (a) (disregard) aller contre, aller à l'encontre de;
    ∎ she went against my advice elle n'a pas suivi mon conseil;
    ∎ I went against my mother's wishes je suis allé contre ou j'ai contrarié les désirs de ma mère
    (b) (conflict with) contredire;
    ∎ that goes against what he told me c'est en contradiction avec ou ça contredit ce qu'il m'a dit;
    ∎ the decision went against public opinion la décision est allée à l'encontre de ou a heurté l'opinion publique;
    ∎ it goes against my principles c'est contre mes principes
    (c) (be unfavourable to → of luck, situation) être contraire à; (→ of opinion) être défavorable à; (→ of behaviour, evidence) nuire à, être préjudiciable à;
    ∎ the verdict went against the defendant le verdict a été défavorable à l'accusé ou a été prononcé contre l'accusé;
    ∎ if luck should go against him si la chance lui était contraire;
    ∎ her divorce may go against her winning the election son divorce pourrait nuire à ses chances de gagner les élections
    (a) (precede) passer devant;
    ∎ he went ahead of us il est parti avant nous;
    ∎ I let him go ahead of me in the queue je l'ai fait passer devant moi dans la queue
    (b) (proceed) aller de l'avant;
    ∎ go ahead! tell me! vas-y! dis-le-moi!;
    ∎ the mayor allowed the demonstrations to go ahead le maire a permis aux manifestations d'avoir lieu;
    ∎ the move had gone ahead as planned le déménagement s'était déroulé comme prévu;
    ∎ to go ahead with sth démarrer qch;
    ∎ they're going ahead with the project after all ils ont finalement décidé de mener le projet à bien;
    ∎ he went ahead and did it (without hesitating) il l'a fait sans l'ombre d'une hésitation; (despite warnings) rien ne l'a arrêté
    (c) (advance, progress) progresser, faire des progrès
    ∎ go along and ask your mother va demander à ta mère;
    ∎ she went along with them to the fair elle les a accompagnés ou elle est allée avec eux à la foire;
    ∎ we can talk it over as we go along nous pouvons en discuter en chemin ou en cours de route;
    ∎ I just make it up as I go along j'invente au fur et à mesure
    (b) (progress) se dérouler, se passer;
    ∎ things were going along nicely tout allait ou se passait bien
    (c) (go to meeting, party etc) aller
    (decision, order) accepter, s'incliner devant; (rule) observer, respecter;
    ∎ that's what they decided and I went along with it c'est la décision qu'ils ont prise et je l'ai acceptée;
    ∎ I go along with the committee on that point je suis d'accord avec ou je soutiens le comité sur ce point;
    ∎ I can't go along with you on that je ne suis pas d'accord avec vous là-dessus;
    ∎ he went along with his father's wishes il s'est conformé aux ou a respecté les désirs de son père
    (a) (habitually) passer son temps à;
    ∎ he goes around mumbling to himself il passe son temps à radoter;
    ∎ she just goes around annoying everyone elle passe son temps à énerver tout le monde;
    ∎ he goes around in black leather il se promène toujours en ou il est toujours habillé en cuir noir
    (b) (document, illness) circuler; (gossip, rumour) courir, circuler
    ∎ will that belt go around your waist? est-ce que cette ceinture sera assez grande pour toi?
    familiar (attack → food) attaquer, se jeter sur; (→ job, task) s'attaquer à; (→ person) attaquer;
    ∎ they were still going at it the next day ils y étaient encore le lendemain;
    ∎ she went at the cleaning with a will elle s'est attaquée au nettoyage avec ardeur
    partir, s'en aller;
    ∎ go away! va-t'en!;
    ∎ I'm going away for a few days je pars pour quelques jours;
    ∎ she's gone away to think about it elle est partie réfléchir
    (a) (return) revenir, retourner;
    ∎ she went back to bed elle est retournée au lit, elle s'est recouchée;
    ∎ to go back to sleep se rendormir;
    ∎ they went back home ils sont rentrés chez eux ou à la maison;
    ∎ I went back downstairs/upstairs je suis redescendu/remonté;
    ∎ to go back to work (continue task) se remettre au travail; (return to place of work) retourner travailler; (return to employment) reprendre le travail;
    ∎ to go back on one's steps rebrousser chemin, revenir sur ses pas;
    ∎ let's go back to chapter two revenons ou retournons au deuxième chapitre;
    ∎ we went back to the beginning nous avons recommencé;
    ∎ let's go back to why you said that revenons à la question de savoir pourquoi vous avez dit ça;
    ∎ the clocks go back one hour today on retarde les pendules d'une heure aujourd'hui
    (b) (retreat) reculer;
    ∎ go back! recule!
    (c) (revert) revenir;
    ∎ we went back to the old system nous sommes revenus à l'ancien système;
    ∎ he went back to his old habits il a repris ses anciennes habitudes;
    ∎ the conversation kept going back to the same subject la conversation revenait sans cesse sur le même sujet;
    ∎ men are going back to wearing their hair long les hommes reviennent aux cheveux longs ou se laissent à nouveau pousser les cheveux
    (d) (in time) remonter;
    ∎ our records go back to 1850 nos archives remontent à 1850;
    ∎ this building goes back to the Revolution ce bâtiment date de ou remonte à la Révolution;
    ∎ familiar we go back a long way, Brad and me ça remonte à loin, Brad et moi
    (e) (extend, reach) s'étendre;
    ∎ the garden goes back 150 metres le jardin s'étend sur 150 mètres
    (fail to keep → agreement) rompre, violer; (→ promise) manquer à, revenir sur;
    ∎ they went back on their decision ils sont revenus sur leur décision;
    ∎ he won't go back on his word il ne manquera pas à sa parole
    (precede) passer devant; (happen before) précéder;
    ∎ that question has nothing to do with what went before cette question n'a rien à voir avec ce qui précède ou avec ce qui a été dit avant;
    ∎ the election was like nothing that had gone before l'élection ne ressemblait en rien aux précédentes;
    ∎ euphemism those who have gone before (the dead) ceux qui nous ont précédés
    (a) (precede) précéder;
    ∎ we are indebted to those who have gone before us nous devons beaucoup à ceux qui nous ont précédés
    ∎ your suggestion will go before the committee votre suggestion sera soumise au comité;
    ∎ to go before a judge/jury passer devant un juge/un jury;
    ∎ the matter went before the court l'affaire est allée devant les tribunaux
    Nautical descendre dans l'entrepont
    ➲ go by
    (pass → car, person) passer; (→ time) passer, s'écouler;
    ∎ as the years go by avec les années, à mesure que les années passent;
    ∎ in days or in times or in years gone by autrefois, jadis;
    ∎ to let an opportunity go by laisser passer une occasion
    (a) (act in accordance with, be guided by) suivre, se baser sur;
    ∎ don't go by the map ne vous fiez pas à la carte;
    ∎ I'll go by what the boss says je me baserai sur ce que dit le patron;
    ∎ he goes by the rules il suit le règlement
    (b) (judge by) juger d'après;
    ∎ going by her accent, I'd say she's from New York si j'en juge d'après son accent, je dirais qu'elle vient de New York;
    ∎ you can't go by appearances on ne peut pas juger d'après ou sur les apparences
    ∎ to go by a different/false name être connu sous un nom différent/un faux nom;
    ∎ the product goes by the name of "Bango" in France ce produit est vendu sous le nom de "Bango" en France
    ➲ go down
    (a) (descend, move to lower level) descendre;
    ∎ he went down on all fours or on his hands and knees il s'est mis à quatre pattes;
    ∎ going down! (in lift) on descend!, pour descendre!
    (b) (proceed, travel) aller;
    ∎ we're going down to Tours/the country/the shop nous allons à Tours/à la campagne/au magasin
    (c) (set → moon, sun) se coucher, tomber
    (d) (sink → ship) couler, sombrer; (→ person) couler, disparaître (sous l'eau)
    (e) (decrease, decline → level, price, quality) baisser; (→ amount, numbers) diminuer; (→ rate, temperature) baisser, s'abaisser; (→ fever) baisser, tomber; (→ tide) descendre;
    ∎ the dollar is going down in value le dollar perd de sa valeur, le dollar est en baisse;
    ∎ eggs are going down (in price) le prix des œufs baisse;
    ∎ my weight has gone down j'ai perdu du poids;
    ∎ he's gone down in my estimation il a baissé dans mon estime;
    ∎ the neighbourhood's really gone down since then le quartier ne s'est vraiment pas arrangé depuis;
    ∎ to have gone down in the world avoir connu des jours meilleurs
    (f) (become less swollen → swelling) désenfler, dégonfler; (→ balloon, tyre) se dégonfler
    (g) (food, medicine) descendre;
    ∎ this wine goes down very smoothly ce vin se laisse boire (comme du petit-lait)
    ∎ a cup of coffee would go down nicely une tasse de café serait la bienvenue;
    ∎ his speech went down badly/well son discours a été mal/bien reçu;
    ∎ how will the proposal go down with the students? comment les étudiants vont-ils prendre la proposition?;
    ∎ that kind of talk doesn't go down well with me je n'apprécie pas du tout ce genre de propos
    (i) (lose) être battu;
    ∎ Mexico went down to Germany le Mexique s'est incliné devant l'Allemagne;
    ∎ Madrid went down to Milan by three points Milan a battu Madrid de trois points;
    ∎ I'm not going to go down without a fight je me battrai jusqu'à la fin
    (j) (be relegated) descendre;
    ∎ our team has gone down to the second division notre équipe est descendue en deuxième division
    (k) (be noted, recorded) être noté; (in writing) être pris ou couché par écrit;
    ∎ this day will go down in history ce jour restera une date historique;
    ∎ she will go down in history as a woman of great courage elle entrera dans l'histoire grâce à son grand courage
    (l) (reach as far as) descendre, s'étendre;
    ∎ this path goes down to the beach ce sentier va ou descend à la plage
    (m) (continue as far as) aller, continuer;
    ∎ go down to the end of the street allez ou continuez jusqu'en bas de la rue
    (n) British University entrer dans la période des vacances
    (p) Computing tomber en panne; (of computer network) planter;
    ∎ the computer's gone down l'ordinateur est en panne
    (q) Music (lower pitch) descendre
    ∎ how long do you think he'll go down for? il écopera de combien, à ton avis?;
    ∎ he went down for three years il a écopé de trois ans
    (s) American familiar (happen) se passer□
    (hill, stairs, ladder, street) descendre;
    ∎ my food went down the wrong way j'ai avalé de travers;
    ∎ Music the pianist went down an octave le pianiste a joué une octave plus bas ou a descendu d'une octave;
    ∎ British School to go down a class descendre d'une classe;
    ∎ figurative I don't want to go down that road je ne veux pas m'engager là-dedans
    vulgar (fellate) sucer, tailler ou faire une pipe à; (perform cunnilingus on) sucer, brouter le cresson à
    tomber malade de;
    ∎ he went down with pneumonia/the flu il a attrapé une pneumonie/la grippe
    (a) (fetch) aller chercher;
    ∎ he went for a doctor il est allé ou parti chercher un médecin
    (b) (try to obtain) essayer d'obtenir, viser;
    ∎ she's going for his job elle va essayer d'obtenir son poste;
    ∎ familiar go for it! vas-y!;
    ∎ I'd go for it if I were you! à ta place, je n'hésiterais pas!;
    ∎ she was really going for it elle donnait vraiment son maximum
    (c) (attack → physically) tomber sur, s'élancer sur; (→ verbally) s'en prendre à;
    ∎ dogs usually go for the throat en général, les chiens attaquent à la gorge;
    ∎ they went for each other (physically) ils se sont jetés l'un sur l'autre; (verbally) ils s'en sont pris l'un à l'autre;
    ∎ the newspapers really went for the senator les journaux s'en sont pris au sénateur sans retenue;
    ∎ go for him! (to dog) attaque!
    (d) familiar (like) aimer□, adorer□ ;
    ∎ I don't really go for that idea l'idée ne me dit pas grand-chose;
    ∎ he really goes for her in a big way il est vraiment fou d'elle
    (e) (choose, prefer) choisir, préférer
    (f) (apply to, concern) concerner, s'appliquer à;
    ∎ what I said goes for both of you ce que j'ai dit vaut pour ou s'applique à vous deux;
    ∎ pollution is a real problem in Paris - that goes for Rome too la pollution pose un énorme problème à Paris - c'est la même chose à Rome;
    ∎ and the same goes for me et moi aussi
    (g) (have as result) servir à;
    ∎ his twenty years of service went for nothing ses vingt ans de service n'ont servi à rien
    ∎ she has a lot going for her elle a beaucoup d'atouts;
    ∎ that idea hasn't got much going for it frankly cette idée n'est franchement pas très convaincante
    (a) (leave) sortir;
    ∎ the army went forth into battle l'armée s'est mise en route pour la bataille;
    ∎ Bible go forth and multiply croissez et multipliez-vous
    (b) (be pronounced) être prononcé; (be published) paraître;
    ∎ the command went forth that… il fut décrété que…
    (s')avancer;
    ∎ the clocks go forward tomorrow on avance les pendules demain;
    ∎ if this scheme goes forward… si ce projet est accepté…
    (a) (enter) entrer, rentrer;
    ∎ it's cold - let's go in il fait froid - entrons;
    ∎ it's too big, it won't go in c'est trop grand, ça ne rentrera pas
    (b) (disappear → moon, sun) se cacher
    (c) Sport (in cricket) prendre son tour au guichet
    (d) Military (attack) attaquer
    (a) (engage in → activity, hobby, sport) pratiquer, faire; (→ occupation) se consacrer à; (→ politics) s'occuper de, faire;
    ∎ she went in for company law elle s'est lancée dans le droit commercial;
    ∎ he thought about going in for teaching il a pensé devenir enseignant
    (b) familiar (be interested in) s'intéresser à□ ; (like) aimer□ ;
    ∎ I don't go in much for opera je n'aime pas trop l'opéra, l'opéra ne me dit rien;
    ∎ he goes in for special effects in a big way il est très branché effets spéciaux;
    ∎ we don't go in for that kind of film nous n'aimons pas ce genre de film;
    ∎ this publisher doesn't really go in for fiction cet éditeur ne fait pas tellement dans le roman
    ∎ they don't go in for injections so much nowadays ils ne sont pas tellement pour les piqûres de nos jours;
    ∎ why do scientists go in for all that jargon? pourquoi est-ce que les scientifiques utilisent tout ce jargon?
    (d) (take part in → competition, race) prendre part à; (→ examination) se présenter à
    (e) (apply for → job, position) poser sa candidature à, postuler
    (a) (enter → building, house) entrer dans; (→ activity, profession) entrer à ou dans; (→ politics, business) se lancer dans;
    ∎ she's gone into hospital elle est (r)entrée à l'hôpital;
    ∎ to go into the army (as profession) devenir militaire de carrière; (as conscript) partir au service;
    ∎ he went into medicine il a choisi la médecine
    (b) (be invested → of effort, money, time)
    ∎ a lot of care had gone into making her feel at home on s'était donné beaucoup de peine pour la mettre à l'aise;
    ∎ two months of research went into our report nous avons mis ou investi deux mois de recherche dans notre rapport
    (c) (embark on → action) commencer à; (→ explanation, speech) se lancer ou s'embarquer dans, (se mettre à) donner; (→ problem) aborder;
    ∎ I'll go into the problem of your taxes later j'aborderai le problème de vos impôts plus tard;
    ∎ the car went into a skid la voiture a commencé à déraper;
    ∎ to go into hysterics avoir une crise de nerfs;
    ∎ to go into fits of laughter être pris d'un fou rire
    (d) (examine, investigate) examiner, étudier;
    ∎ you need to go into the question more deeply vous devez examiner le problème de plus près;
    ∎ the matter is being gone into l'affaire est à l'étude
    (e) (explain in depth) entrer dans;
    ∎ the essay goes into the moral aspects of the question l'essai aborde les aspects moraux de la question;
    ∎ I won't go into details je ne vais pas entrer dans les détails;
    ∎ let's not go into that ne parlons pas de ça
    (f) (begin to wear) se mettre à porter;
    ∎ to go into mourning prendre le deuil
    (g) (hit, run into) entrer dans;
    ∎ a car went into him une voiture lui est rentrée dedans
    (h) Computing (file, program) aller dans;
    ∎ to go into a file aller dans un fichier
    ➲ go off
    (a) (leave) partir, s'en aller;
    ∎ she went off to work elle est partie travailler;
    ∎ her husband has gone off and left her son mari l'a quittée;
    ∎ Theatre the actors went off les acteurs ont quitté la scène
    (b) (stop operating → light, radio) s'éteindre; (→ heating) s'éteindre, s'arrêter; (→ pain) partir, s'arrêter;
    ∎ the electricity went off l'électricité a été coupée
    (c) (become activated → bomb, firework) exploser; (→ gun) partir; (→ alarm, alarm clock) sonner;
    ∎ the grenade went off in her hand la grenade a explosé dans sa main;
    ∎ the gun didn't go off le coup n'est pas parti;
    ∎ figurative to go off into fits of laughter être pris d'un fou rire
    ∎ the interview went off badly/well l'entretien s'est mal/bien passé;
    ∎ her speech went off well son discours a été bien reçu
    (e) (fall asleep) s'endormir
    (f) British (deteriorate → food) s'avarier, se gâter; (→ milk) tourner; (→ butter) rancir; (→ athlete, sportsperson) perdre sa forme;
    ∎ the play goes off in the second half la pièce se gâte pendant la seconde partie
    British familiar (stop liking) perdre le goût de□ ;
    ∎ he's gone off classical music/smoking il n'aime plus la musique classique/fumer, la musique classique/fumer ne l'intéresse plus;
    ∎ I've gone off the idea cette idée ne me dit plus rien;
    ∎ she's gone off her boyfriend son copain ne l'intéresse plus;
    ∎ funny how you can go off people c'est drôle comme on se lasse des gens parfois
    (a) (leave with) partir avec;
    ∎ he went off with the woman next door il est parti avec la voisine
    (b) (make off with) partir avec;
    ∎ someone has gone off with his keys quelqu'un est parti avec ses clés;
    ∎ he went off with the jewels il s'est enfui avec les bijoux
    ➲ go on
    (a) (move, proceed) aller; (without stopping) poursuivre son chemin; (after stopping) repartir, se remettre en route;
    ∎ you go on, I'll catch up allez-y, je vous rattraperai (en chemin);
    ∎ they went on without us ils sont partis sans nous;
    ∎ after dinner they went on to Susan's house après le dîner, ils sont allés chez Susan;
    ∎ we went on home nous sommes rentrés
    (b) (continue action) continuer;
    ∎ she went on (with her) reading elle a continué à ou de lire;
    ∎ the chairman went on speaking le président a continué son discours;
    ∎ "and that's not all", he went on "et ce n'est pas tout", a-t-il poursuivi;
    ∎ you can't go on being a student for ever! tu ne peux pas être étudiant toute ta vie!;
    ∎ go on looking! cherchez encore!;
    ∎ go on, ask her vas-y, demande-lui;
    ∎ familiar go on, be a devil vas-y, laisse-toi tenter!;
    ∎ go on, I'm listening continuez, je vous écoute;
    ∎ I can't go on like this! je ne peux plus continuer comme ça!;
    ∎ if he goes on like this, he'll get fired s'il continue comme ça, il va se faire renvoyer;
    ∎ their affair has been going on for years leur liaison dure depuis des années;
    ∎ the party went on into the small hours la soirée s'est prolongée jusqu'à très tôt le matin;
    ∎ life goes on la vie continue ou va son train;
    ∎ British familiar go on (with you)! allons, arrête de me faire marcher!;
    ∎ they have enough (work) to be going on with ils ont du pain sur la planche ou de quoi faire pour le moment;
    ∎ here's £25 to be going on with voilà 25 livres pour te dépanner
    ∎ he went on to explain why il a ensuite expliqué pourquoi;
    ∎ to go on to another question passer à une autre question;
    ∎ she went on to become a doctor elle est ensuite devenue médecin
    (d) (be placed, fit) aller;
    ∎ the lid goes on this way le couvercle se met comme ça;
    ∎ I can't get the lid to go on je n'arrive pas à mettre le couvercle;
    ∎ the cap goes on the other end le bouchon se met ou va sur l'autre bout
    (e) (happen, take place) se passer;
    ∎ what's going on here? qu'est-ce qui se passe ici?;
    ∎ there was a fight going on il y avait une bagarre;
    ∎ a lot of cheating goes on during the exams on triche beaucoup pendant les examens;
    ∎ several conversations were going on at once il y avait plusieurs conversations à la fois;
    ∎ while the war was going on pendant la guerre
    (f) (elapse) passer, s'écouler;
    ∎ as the week went on au fur et à mesure que la semaine passait;
    ∎ as time goes on avec le temps, à mesure que le temps passe
    (g) familiar (chatter, talk) parler□, jacasser□ ;
    ∎ she does go on! elle n'arrête pas de parler!, c'est un vrai moulin à paroles!;
    ∎ he goes on and on about politics il parle politique sans cesse;
    ∎ don't go on about it! ça va, on a compris!;
    ∎ I don't want to go on about it, but... je ne voudrais pas avoir l'air d'insister, mais...;
    ∎ what are you going on about now? qu'est-ce que vous racontez?
    (h) familiar (act, behave) se conduire□, se comporter□ ;
    ∎ what a way to go on! en voilà des manières!
    (i) (start operating → light, radio, television) s'allumer; (→ heating, motor, power) s'allumer, se mettre en marche
    (j) Sport (player) prendre sa place, entrer en jeu
    (k) Theatre (actor) entrer en scène
    ∎ he's going on for forty il va sur ses quarante ans
    (a) (enter → boat, train) monter dans
    ∎ to go on a journey/a holiday partir en voyage/en vacances;
    ∎ to go on a diet se mettre au régime
    (c) (be guided by) se laisser guider par, se fonder ou se baser sur;
    ∎ the detective didn't have much to go on le détective n'avait pas grand-chose sur quoi s'appuyer ou qui puisse le guider;
    ∎ she goes a lot on instinct elle se fie beaucoup à ou se fonde beaucoup sur son instinct
    ∎ he's going on forty-five il va sur ses quarante-cinq ans;
    ∎ humorous she's fifteen going on forty-five (wise) elle a quinze ans mais elle est déjà très mûre; (old beyond her years) elle a quinze ans mais elle est vieille avant l'âge
    (e) British familiar (usu neg) (appreciate, like) aimer□ ;
    ∎ I don't go much on abstract art l'art abstrait ne me dit pas grand-chose
    familiar (criticize) critiquer□ ; (nag) s'en prendre à□ ;
    ∎ the boss went on and on at her at the meeting le patron n'a pas cessé de s'en prendre à elle pendant la réunion;
    ∎ he's always going on at his wife about money il est toujours sur le dos de sa femme avec les questions d'argent;
    ∎ I went on at my mother to go and see the doctor j'ai embêté ma mère pour qu'elle aille voir le médecin;
    ∎ don't go on at me! laisse-moi tranquille!
    (a) (leave) sortir;
    ∎ my parents made us go out of the room mes parents nous ont fait sortir de la pièce ou quitter la pièce;
    ∎ to go out for a meal aller au restaurant;
    ∎ to go out to dinner sortir dîner;
    ∎ to go out for a walk aller se promener, aller faire une promenade;
    ∎ she's gone out to get a paper elle est sortie (pour) acheter un journal;
    ∎ they went out to the country ils sont allés ou ils ont fait une sortie à la campagne;
    ∎ she goes out to work elle travaille en dehors de la maison ou hors de chez elle;
    ∎ he went out of her life il est sorti de sa vie;
    ∎ she was dressed to go out (ready to leave) elle était prête à sortir; (dressed up) elle était très habillée
    (b) (travel) partir; (emigrate) émigrer;
    ∎ they went out to Africa (travelled) ils sont partis en Afrique; (emigrated) ils sont partis vivre ou ils ont émigré en Afrique
    (c) (date) sortir;
    ∎ to go out with sb sortir avec qn;
    ∎ we've been going out together for a month ça fait un mois que nous sortons ensemble
    (d) (fire, light) s'éteindre
    (e) (disappear) disparaître;
    ∎ the joy went out of her eyes la joie a disparu de son regard;
    ∎ the spring went out of his step il a perdu sa démarche légère;
    ∎ all the heart went out of her elle a perdu courage
    (f) (cease to be fashionable) passer de mode, se démoder;
    ∎ to go out of style/fashion ne plus être le bon style/à la mode;
    ∎ familiar that hairstyle went out with the ark cette coiffure remonte au déluge
    (g) (tide) descendre, se retirer;
    ∎ the tide has gone out la marée est descendue, la mer s'est retirée;
    ∎ the tide goes out 6 kilometres la mer se retire sur 6 kilomètres
    ∎ I went out to see for myself j'ai décidé de voir par moi-même;
    ∎ we have to go out and do something about this il faut que nous prenions des mesures ou que nous fassions quelque chose
    (i) (be sent → letter) être envoyé; (be published → brochure, pamphlet) être distribué; (be broadcast → radio or television programme) être diffusé
    (j) (feelings, sympathies) aller;
    ∎ our thoughts go out to all those who suffer nos pensées vont vers tous ceux qui souffrent;
    ∎ my heart goes out to her je suis de tout cœur avec elle dans son chagrin
    (k) Sport (be eliminated) être éliminé;
    ∎ Agassi went out to Henman Agassi s'est fait sortir par Henman
    (l) Cards terminer
    ∎ she went all out to help us elle a fait tout son possible pour nous aider□
    ➲ go over
    ∎ I just saw a plane go over je viens de voir passer un avion
    ∎ I went over to see her je suis allé la voir;
    ∎ they went over to talk to her ils sont allés lui parler;
    ∎ to go over to Europe aller en Europe
    (c) (turn upside down) se retourner; (capsize → boat) chavirer, capoter
    (d) (change, switch) changer;
    ∎ I've gone over to another brand of washing powder je viens de changer de marque de lessive;
    ∎ when will we go over to the metric system? quand est-ce qu'on va passer au système métrique?
    (e) (change allegiance) passer, se joindre;
    ∎ he's gone over to the Socialists il est passé dans le camp des socialistes;
    ∎ she went over to the enemy elle est passée à l'ennemi
    (f) (be received) passer;
    ∎ the speech went over badly/well le discours a mal/bien passé
    (a) (move, travel over) passer par-dessus;
    ∎ the horse went over the fence le cheval a sauté (par-dessus) la barrière;
    ∎ we went over a bump on a pris une bosse
    (b) (examine → argument, problem) examiner, considérer; (→ accounts, report) examiner, vérifier;
    ∎ would you go over my report? voulez-vous regarder mon rapport?
    (c) (repeat) répéter; (review → notes, speech) réviser, revoir; (→ facts) récapituler, revoir; School réviser;
    ∎ she went over the interview in her mind elle a repassé l'entretien dans son esprit;
    ∎ I kept going over everything leading up to the accident je continuais de repenser à tous les détails qui avaient conduit à l'accident;
    ∎ let's go over it again reprenons, récapitulons;
    ∎ he goes over and over the same stories il rabâche les mêmes histoires
    (d) (rehearse) refaire; (bars of music) rejouer; (sing) rechanter
    ∎ let's go over now to our Birmingham studios passons l'antenne à notre studio de Birmingham;
    ∎ we're going over live now to Paris nous allons maintenant à Paris où nous sommes en direct
    (move in front of) passer devant; (move beyond) dépasser
    ∎ is there enough cake to go round? est-ce qu'il y a assez de gâteau pour tout le monde?;
    ∎ to make the food go round ménager la nourriture
    (b) (visit) aller;
    ∎ we went round to his house nous sommes allés chez lui;
    ∎ I'm going round there later on j'y vais plus tard
    (c) (circulate → rumour) circuler, courir; (→ bottle, cold, flu) circuler
    (d) (be continuously present → idea, tune)
    ∎ that song keeps going round in my head j'ai cette chanson dans la tête
    (e) (spin → wheel) tourner;
    ∎ figurative my head's going round j'ai la tête qui tourne
    (f) (make a detour) faire un détour;
    ∎ to go round the long way faire un long détour
    (tour → museum) faire le tour de;
    ∎ I hate going round the shops j'ai horreur de faire les boutiques
    (a) (crowd, tunnel) traverser;
    ∎ figurative a shiver went through her un frisson l'a parcourue ou traversée
    (b) (endure, experience) subir, souffrir;
    ∎ he's going through hell c'est l'enfer pour lui;
    ∎ we all have to go through it sometime on doit tous y passer un jour ou l'autre;
    ∎ I can't face going through all that again je ne supporterais pas de passer par là une deuxième fois;
    ∎ after everything she's gone through après tout ce qu'elle a subi ou enduré;
    ∎ we've gone through a lot together nous avons vécu beaucoup de choses ensemble
    (c) (consume, use up → supplies) épuiser; (→ money) dépenser; (→ food) consommer; (wear out) user;
    ∎ she goes through a pair of tights a week elle use une paire de collants par semaine;
    ∎ I've gone through the toes of my socks j'ai usé ou troué mes chaussettes au bout;
    ∎ humorous how many assistants has he gone through now? combien d'assistants a-t-il déjà eus?;
    ∎ his novel has gone through six editions il y a déjà eu six éditions de son roman
    (d) (examine → accounts, document) examiner, vérifier; (→ list, proposal) éplucher; (→ mail) dépouiller; (→ drawer, pockets) fouiller (dans); (→ files) chercher dans; (sort) trier;
    ∎ we went through the contract together nous avons regardé ou examiné le contrat ensemble;
    ∎ did customs go through your suitcase? est-ce qu'ils ont fouillé votre valise à la douane?;
    ∎ he went through her pockets il a fouillé ses poches
    (e) (of bill, law) être voté;
    ∎ the bill went through Parliament last week le projet de loi a été voté la semaine dernière au Parlement
    (f) (carry out, perform → movement, work) faire; (→ formalities) remplir, accomplir;
    ∎ Music let's go through the introduction again reprenons l'introduction;
    ∎ we had to go through the whole business of applying for a visa nous avons dû nous farcir toutes les démarches pour obtenir un visa
    (g) (participate in → course of study) étudier; (→ ceremony) participer à
    (h) (practise → lesson, poem) réciter; (→ role, scene) répéter;
    ∎ let's go through it again from the beginning reprenons dès le début
    (a) (travel through, penetrate) passer, traverser
    (b) (offer, proposal) être accepté; (business deal) être conclu, se faire; (bill, law) passer, être voté; (divorce) être prononcé;
    ∎ the adoption finally went through l'adoption s'est faite finalement
    ∎ to go through with sth aller jusqu'au bout de qch, exécuter qch;
    ∎ he'll never go through with it il n'ira jamais jusqu'au bout;
    ∎ they went through with their threat ils ont exécuté leur menace
    (a) (colours, flavours) aller bien ensemble; (characteristics, ideas) aller de pair;
    ∎ the two things often go together les deux choses vont souvent de pair
    (b) American (people) sortir ensemble
    (a) (move towards) aller vers
    (b) (effort, money) être consacré à;
    ∎ all her energy went towards fighting illiteracy elle a dépensé toute son énergie à combattre l'analphabétisme
    (a) (go down → ship) couler, sombrer; (→ person) couler, disparaître (sous l'eau)
    (b) figurative (fail → business) couler, faire faillite; (→ project) couler, échouer; (→ person) échouer, sombrer
    (a) (move, travel underneath) passer par-dessous
    ∎ to go under a false/different name utiliser ou prendre un faux nom/un nom différent;
    ∎ a glue that goes under the name of Stikit une colle qui s'appelle Stikit
    ➲ go up
    (a) (ascend, climb → person) monter, aller en haut; (→ lift) monter;
    ∎ to go up to town aller en ville;
    ∎ I'm going up to bed je monte me coucher;
    ∎ have you ever gone up in an aeroplane? êtes-vous déjà monté en avion?;
    ∎ going up! (in lift) on monte!;
    ∎ to go up in the world faire son chemin
    (b) (increase → amount, numbers) augmenter, croître; (→ price) monter, augmenter; (→ temperature) monter, s'élever;
    ∎ rents are going up les loyers sont en hausse;
    ∎ meat is going up (in price) (le prix de) la viande augmente;
    ∎ to go up in sb's estimation monter dans l'estime de qn
    (c) (sudden noise) s'élever;
    ∎ a shout went up un cri s'éleva
    (d) (appear → notices, posters) apparaître; (be built) être construit;
    ∎ new buildings are going up all over town de nouveaux immeubles surgissent dans toute la ville
    (e) (explode, be destroyed) sauter, exploser
    (g) Theatre (curtain) se lever;
    ∎ before the curtain goes up avant le lever du rideau
    (h) British University entrer à l'université;
    ∎ she went up to Oxford in 1950 elle est entrée à Oxford en 1950
    ∎ he went up for murder il a fait de la taule pour meurtre
    ∎ they look set to go up to the First Division ils ont l'air prêts à entrer en première division
    monter;
    ∎ to go up a hill/ladder monter une colline/sur une échelle;
    ∎ Music the pianist went up an octave le pianiste a monté d'une octave;
    ∎ British School to go up a class monter d'une classe
    ∎ to go up to sb/sth se diriger vers qn/qch;
    ∎ the path goes up to the front door le chemin mène à la porte d'entrée
    ∎ the book only goes up to the end of the war le livre ne va que jusqu'à la fin de la guerre;
    ∎ I will go up to £100 je veux bien aller jusqu'à 100 livres
    (a) (accompany, escort) accompagner, aller avec;
    ∎ figurative to go with the crowd suivre la foule ou le mouvement;
    ∎ you have to go with the times il faut vivre avec son temps
    (b) (be compatible → colours, flavours) aller avec;
    ∎ that hat doesn't go with your suit ce chapeau ne va pas avec ton ensemble;
    ∎ a white Burgundy goes well with snails le bourgogne blanc se marie bien ou va bien avec les escargots
    (c) (be part of) aller avec;
    ∎ the flat goes with the job l'appartement va avec le poste;
    ∎ the sense of satisfaction that goes with having done a good job le sentiment de satisfaction qu'apporte le travail bien fait;
    ∎ mathematical ability usually goes with skill at chess des capacités en mathématiques vont souvent de pair avec un don pour les échecs
    (d) familiar (spend time with) sortir avec□ ;
    ∎ euphemism he's been going with other women (having sex) il a été avec d'autres femmes
    se passer de, se priver de;
    ∎ he went without sleep or without sleeping for two days il n'a pas dormi pendant deux jours
    s'en passer;
    ∎ we'll just have to go without il faudra s'en passer, c'est tout
    ⓘ Do not pass go, (do not collect £200/$200) Au Monopoly les joueurs tirent parfois une carte qui les envoie sur la case "prison". Sur cette carte sont inscrits les mots do not pass go, do not collect £200 (ou bien do not collect $200 s'il s'agit de la version américaine). Cette phrase, dont la version française est "ne passez pas par la case départ, ne recevez pas 20 000 francs", est utilisée de façon allusive et sur le mode humoristique dans différents contextes: on dira par exemple you do that again and you're going straight to jail, Bill. Do not pass go, do not collect $200 ("refais ça, Bill, et je t'assure que tu iras droit en prison). On peut également utiliser cette expression lorsque quelqu'un essaie de mener un projet à bien mais rencontre des obstacles: the country is trying hard to get back on its feet but because of the civil war it has not even been allowed to pass go, let alone collect £200 ("le pays fait de son mieux pour se rétablir mais la guerre civile n'arrange rien, bien au contraire").
    ⓘ Go ahead, make my day C'est la formule prononcée par l'inspecteur Harry Callahan (incarné par Clint Eastwood) dans le film Sudden Impact (1983) lorsqu'il se trouve confronté à un gangster. Il s'agit d'une façon d'encourager le bandit à se servir de son arme afin de pouvoir l'abattre en état de légitime défense: "allez, vas-y, fais-moi plaisir". On utilise cette formule par allusion au film et en réaction à une personne qui vient de proférer des menaces. Ainsi, le président Reagan s'en servit en s'adressant à des travailleurs qui menaçaient de se mettre en grève.

    Un panorama unique de l'anglais et du français > go

  • 17 Leonardo da Vinci

    [br]
    b. 15 April 1452 Vinci, near Florence, Italy,
    d. 2 May 1519 St Cloux, near Amboise, France.
    [br]
    Italian scientist, engineer, inventor and artist.
    [br]
    Leonardo was the illegitimate son of a Florentine lawyer. His first sixteen years were spent with the lawyer's family in the rural surroundings of Vinci, which aroused in him a lifelong love of nature and an insatiable curiosity in it. He received little formal education but extended his knowledge through private reading. That gave him only a smattering of Latin, a deficiency that was to be a hindrance throughout his active life. At sixteen he was apprenticed in the studio of Andrea del Verrochio in Florence, where he received a training not only in art but in a wide variety of crafts and technical arts.
    In 1482 Leonardo went to Milan, where he sought and obtained employment with Ludovico Sforza, later Duke of Milan, partly to sculpt a massive equestrian statue of Ludovico but the work never progressed beyond the full-scale model stage. He did, however, complete the painting which became known as the Virgin of the Rocks and in 1497 his greatest artistic achievement, The Last Supper, commissioned jointly by Ludovico and the friars of Santa Maria della Grazie and painted on the wall of the monastery's refectory. Leonardo was responsible for the court pageants and also devised a system of irrigation to supply water to the plains of Lombardy. In 1499 the French army entered Milan and deposed Leonardo's employer. Leonardo departed and, after a brief visit to Mantua, returned to Florence, where for a time he was employed as architect and engineer to Cesare Borgia, Duke of Romagna. Around 1504 he completed another celebrated work, the Mona Lisa.
    In 1506 Leonardo began his second sojourn in Milan, this time in the service of King Louis XII of France, who appointed him "painter and engineer". In 1513 Leonardo left for Rome in the company of his pupil Francesco Melzi, but his time there was unproductive and he found himself out of touch with the younger artists active there, Michelangelo above all. In 1516 he accepted with relief an invitation from King François I of France to reside at the small château of St Cloux in the royal domain of Amboise. With the pension granted by François, Leonardo lived out his remaining years in tranquility at St Cloux.
    Leonardo's career can hardly be regarded as a success or worthy of such a towering genius. For centuries he was known only for the handful of artistic works that he managed to complete and have survived more or less intact. His main activity remained hidden until the nineteenth and twentieth centuries, during which the contents of his notebooks were gradually revealed. It became evident that Leonardo was one of the greatest scientific investigators and inventors in the history of civilization. Throughout his working life he extended a searching curiosity over an extraordinarily wide range of subjects. The notes show careful investigation of questions of mechanical and civil engineering, such as power transmission by means of pulleys and also a form of chain belting. The notebooks record many devices, such as machines for grinding and polishing lenses, a lathe operated by treadle-crank, a rolling mill with conical rollers and a spinning machine with pinion and yard divider. Leonardo made an exhaustive study of the flight of birds, with a view to designing a flying machine, which obsessed him for many years.
    Leonardo recorded his observations and conclusions, together with many ingenious inventions, on thousands of pages of manuscript notes, sketches and drawings. There are occasional indications that he had in mind the publication of portions of the notes in a coherent form, but he never diverted his energy into putting them in order; instead, he went on making notes. As a result, Leonardo's impact on the development of science and technology was virtually nil. Even if his notebooks had been copied and circulated, there were daunting impediments to their understanding. Leonardo was left-handed and wrote in mirror-writing: that is, in reverse from right to left. He also used his own abbreviations and no punctuation.
    At his death Leonardo bequeathed his entire output of notes to his friend and companion Francesco Melzi, who kept them safe until his own death in 1570. Melzi left the collection in turn to his son Orazio, whose lack of interest in the arts and sciences resulted in a sad period of dispersal which endangered their survival, but in 1636 the bulk of them, in thirteen volumes, were assembled and donated to the Ambrosian Library in Milan. These include a large volume of notes and drawings compiled from the various portions of the notebooks and is now known as the Codex Atlanticus. There they stayed, forgotten and ignored, until 1796, when Napoleon's marauding army overran Italy and art and literary works, including the thirteen volumes of Leonardo's notebooks, were pillaged and taken to Paris. After the war in 1815, the French government agreed to return them but only the Codex Atlanticus found its way back to Milan; the rest remained in Paris. The appendix to one notebook, dealing with the flight of birds, was later regarded as of sufficient importance to stand on its own. Four small collections reached Britain at various times during the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries; of these, the volume in the Royal Collection at Windsor Castle is notable for its magnificent series of anatomical drawings. Other collections include the Codex Leicester and Codex Arundel in the British Museum in London, and the Madrid Codices in Spain.
    Towards the end of the nineteenth century, Leonardo's true stature as scientist, engineer and inventor began to emerge, particularly with the publication of transcriptions and translations of his notebooks. The volumes in Paris appeared in 1881–97 and the Codex Atlanticus was published in Milan between 1894 and 1904.
    [br]
    Principal Honours and Distinctions
    "Premier peintre, architecte et mécanicien du Roi" to King François I of France, 1516.
    Further Reading
    E.MacCurdy, 1939, The Notebooks of Leonardo da Vinci, 2 vols, London; 2nd edn, 1956, London (the most extensive selection of the notes, with an English translation).
    G.Vasari (trans. G.Bull), 1965, Lives of the Artists, London: Penguin, pp. 255–271.
    C.Gibbs-Smith, 1978, The Inventions of Leonardo da Vinci, Oxford: Phaidon. L.H.Heydenreich, Dibner and L. Reti, 1981, Leonardo the Inventor, London: Hutchinson.
    I.B.Hart, 1961, The World of Leonardo da Vinci, London: Macdonald.
    LRD / IMcN

    Biographical history of technology > Leonardo da Vinci

  • 18 Sebastião I, king

    (1554-1578)
       The king of Portugal whose disappearance and death in battle in Morocco in 1578 led to a succession crisis and to Spain's annexation of Portugal in 1580. He is the person after whom the cult and mythology of Sebastianism is named. Sebastião succeeded to the throne of Portugal at the tender age of three, upon the death of his father King João III in 1557. With his great-uncle Cardinal Henrique, he was the only other surviving legitimate male member of the Aviz dynasty. The Spanish menace loomed on Portugal's eastern horizons, as Phillip II of Spain gathered more reasons to make good his own strong claims to the Portuguese throne. A headstrong youth, Sebastião dreamed of glory in battle against the Muslims and was certainly influenced by the example of the feats of Phillip II's half-brother Don Juan of Austria and the naval victory against the Turks at Lepanto in 1571.
       Sebastião's great project was a victory in Africa, and he ordered a major effort to raise a fleet and army to attack Morocco. His forces landed at Tangier and Arzila and marched to meet the Muslim armies. In early August 1578, at the battle of Alcácer- Quivir, Portugal's army was destroyed by Muslim forces, and the king himself was lost. Although he was undoubtedly killed, his body was never found. The result of this foolhardy enterprise changed the course of Portugal's history and gave rise to the cult and myth that Sebastião survived and would return one foggy morning to make Portugal great once again.

    Historical dictionary of Portugal > Sebastião I, king

  • 19 lead

    ̈ɪled I
    1. сущ.
    1) хим. свинец
    2) а) мор. лот to heave the lead, cast the lead ≈ бросать лот;
    измерять глубину лотом б) грузило, отвес
    3) пломба
    4) сл. пуля hail of lead ≈ град пуль to get the lead ≈ быть застреленным
    5) мн. свинцовые полосы для покрытия крыши;
    покрытая свинцом крыша;
    плоская крыша
    6) грифель
    7) мн.;
    полигр. шпоны
    2. гл.
    1) тех. освинцовывать, покрывать свинцом
    2) полигр. разделять шпонами
    3. прил. свинцовый II
    1. сущ.
    1) а) лидерство;
    руководство;
    инициатива to assume the lead, take the lead ≈ взять на себя инициативу, выступить инициатором;
    руководить (in) to build up, increase one's lead ≈ усиливать лидерство to follow smb.'s lead ≈ следовать чьей-л. инициативе to give up, lose, relinquish the lead ≈ уступать лидерство to hold, maintain the lead ≈ держать лидерство The black horse took the lead. ≈ Черная лошадь вышла вперед. Your candidate has a slight lead. ≈ Ваш кандидат лишь ненамного впереди. commanding lead ≈ руководящая инициатива Syn: precedence, precedency, advance, first place
    2) пример, образец;
    директива, указание Most of the legislators followed the lead of the governor. ≈ Большинство законодателей последовали примеру губернатора. Syn: guidance, model, example, direction, indication, leadership
    3) ключ, решение;
    указатель, намек to run down, track down a lead ≈ найти решение The police haven't a single lead. ≈ У полиции не было ни малейшей намека. Syn: clue, hint, guide
    4) а) первое место, ведущее место в состязании to gain the lead, have the lead ≈ занять первое место б) театр.;
    кино главная роль;
    исполнитель( ница) главной роли to play the lead ≈ играть главную роль female lead ≈ главная женская роль male lead ≈ главная мужская роль Syn: leading role, star part
    5) спорт разрыв между лидером и бегуном, идущим за ним
    6) а) первый ход( в игре) б) карт. ход
    7) краткое введение к газетной статье;
    вводная часть
    8) поводок, привязь
    9) разводье( во льдах)
    10) трубопровод;
    канал
    11) электр. подводящий провод
    12) тех. опережение, предварение( впуска пара и т. п.)
    13) тех. шаг( спирали, винта), ход (поршня)
    14) тех. стрела, укосина
    15) геол. жила;
    золотоносный песок
    16) воен. упреждение, приведение огня( по движущейся цели) ∙ blind lead ≈ тупик
    2. гл.;
    прош. вр. и прич. прош. вр. - led
    1) вести, быть проводником, приводить to lead troops against the enemy ≈ вести войска против врага to lead a horse by the bridle ≈ вести лошадь под уздцы The path leads down to the river. ≈ Тропинка ведет к реке. She led the group from the bus to the auditorium. ≈ Она вела группу из автобуса в аудиторию. The prisoners were led into the courtroom. ≈ Заключенных вывели в зал суда. Syn: guide, show the way, steer, draw, direct, head, pilot
    2) возглавлять, руководить, стоять во главе, управлять, командовать;
    председательствовать The vice-chairman will lead the meeting. ≈ Собрание будет вести заместитель председателя. The quarterback leads the football team. ≈ Защитник возглавляет свою команду. Syn: direct, moderate, conduct, manage, preside over, control, head, command, domineer
    3) приводить, склонять, убеждать, заставлять The candidate's integrity and strength led the voters to support him. ≈ Честность и сила кандидата склонили избирателей оказать ему поддержку. Syn: influence, persuade, incline, induce
    4) быть, идти первым, опережать( в состязании) ;
    превосходить
    5) вести, проводить He leads a full, active life. ≈ Он живет полной насыщенной жизнью. to lead a depraved life, lead a loose life, lead a dissolute life ≈ развратничать, распутничать Syn: pass, conduct, pursue, experience, live
    6) спорт направлять удар( в боксе)
    7) охот. целиться в летящую птицу
    8) карт. ходить
    9) тех. опережать ∙ lead away lead back lead down lead into lead off lead on lead out of lead to lead up to( химическое) свинец - * ore свинцовая руда - * plate свинцовая пластинка - * plating освинцовывание - * spar, * vitriol свинцовый купорос, англезит - red * свинцовый сурик - white * свинцовые белила - sheet * листовой свинец - as heavy as * очень тяжелый грузило, отвес (морское) лот - to cast /to heave/ the * бросать лот, мерять глубину лотом (сленг) пуля, пули;
    девять граммов свинца - * poison смерть от пули - a hail of * град свинца - to get the * быть застреленным, погибнуть от пули свинцовые полосы для покрытия крыши покрытая свинцом крыша;
    плоская крыша - under the *s на чердаке, под крышей графит;
    карандашный грифель (полиграфия) свинец, гарт (тж. hard *) (полиграфия) шпоны (разговорное) котелок, котел( из свинца) > to swing the * (морское) (военное) (жаргон) увиливать от работы, симулируя болезнь и т. п. > * balloon (американизм) (сленг) неудача;
    провал > the joke was a * balloon эта острота не дошла (до публики) > to have * in one's pants( американизм) (сленг) двигаться как черепаха;
    работать лениво;
    быть тугодумом > get the * out of your pants! шевелись!, пошевеливайся!, поторапливайся! (техническое) освинцовывать, покрывать свинцом (полиграфия) разделять шпонами, прокладывать шпоны;
    набирать на шпоны руководство, инициатива - to take the * брать на себя руководство, проявлять инициативу пример - to follow the * of smb. следовать чьему-л. примеру - to give smb. a * in smth. показать кому-л. пример в чем-л.;
    увлечь кого-л. своим примером указание, директива ключ ( к решению чего-л) ;
    намек развернутый подзаголовок, аннотация (перед статьей) вводная часть первое предложение или первый абзац информационной статьи газетная информация, помещенная на видное место первенство, первое место - in the * во главе( процессии и т. п.) - to have /to gain/ the * in a race занять первое место в состязании преим (спортивное) преимущество, перевес - to have a * of several metres опередить на несколько метров - to have an enormоus * in conventional weapons иметь огромный перевес в обычных видах оружия поводок;
    привязь - the dog was on the * собака шла на поводке (театроведение) (кинематографический) главная роль (театроведение) (кинематографический) исполнитель или исполнительница главной роли (карточное) ход;
    первый ход - whose * is it? чей ход? - it is your * ваш ход;
    вам начинать( карточное) карта, масть (с которой начинают) - to return one's partner's ходить в масть;
    поддерживать чью-либо инициативу (разговорное) дорожка, тропинка - blind * тупик искусственное русло( ведущее к мельнице) разводье (во льдах) ;
    проход (среди дрейфующих льдов) (электротехника) подводящий провод ошиновка, электропроводка трубопровод;
    канал (техническое) шаг или ход (винта или червяка) (техническое) отводной блок( спортивное) удар - * for the body удар в туловище( бокс) (техническое) центрирующая фаска( техническое) опережение, предварение (впуска пара и т. п.) (военное) учреждение, приведение огня ( по движущейся цели) - * element( военное) головное подразделение (геология) жила, жильное месторождение( геология) золотоносный песок( техническое) стрела;
    укосина вести;
    показывать путь - to * by the hand вести за руку - to * a blind man вести слепого человека - to * a horse вести лошадь в поводу - to * the way показывать путь;
    вести за собой;
    сделать первый шаг;
    проявить инициативу - to * for landing (авиация) идти на посадку руководить, возглавлять;
    управлять - to * an army командовать армией - to * an expedition руководить экспедицией - to * a mutiny стоять во главе мятежа - to * a choir управлять хором - to * the fashion быть законодателем мод - to * for the prosecution (юридическое) возглавлять обвинение - to * the Concervatives быть лидером консервативной партии занимать первое место;
    быть впереди - to * the advance (военное) двигаться в голове наступающих войск - a brass band led the regiment впереди полка шел духовой оркестр( спортивное) идти первым (в состязании) ;
    вести (бег) ;
    лидировать - the big chestnut was *ing by three lenghts большая гнедая лошадь опередила других на три корпуса (спортивное) вести по очкам;
    иметь, набрать больше очков превосходить - as an actor he certainly *s как актер он, несомненно, не имеет себе равных вести (какой-л. образ жизни) - to * a good life вести правильный /примерный/ образ жизни - to * a miserable existence влачить жалкое существование - to * a double life вести двойную жизнь вести;
    приводить - where does this road * ? куда ведет эта дорога? - chance led him to London случай привел его в Лондон( out of) выходить, сообщаться( о комнате) - a bathroom *s out of the bedroom ванная примыкает к спальне вести, служить проводом или каналом приводить (к чему-л.) ;
    вызвать( что-л.) ;
    быть причиной( чего-л.) ;
    иметь результатом - to * nowhere ни к чему не привести, оказаться безрезультатным - to * to illness кончиться болезнью - to * to a poor result дать незначительные результаты - fear led him to tell lies страх заставил его лгать - this led to disaster это привело к катастрофе;
    это было причиной бедствия - this has led me to expect( smth.) это дало мне основание ожидать( что-л.) убедить, склонить( к чему-л.) ;
    заставить, повлиять - he may be led but he won't be coerced его можно убедить, но нельзя принудить - what led you to think so? что заставило вас так думать? - I am led from all I hear to agree with you по всему, что я слышал /узнал/, я склонен с вами согласиться - what you say *s me to refuse то, что вы говорите, заставляет меня отказаться( into) вовлекать( во что-л.) - and * us not into temptation( библеизм) и не введи нас в искушение( юридическое) задавать наводящие вопросы( свидетелю) (карточное) ходить - to * hearts ходить с червей( техническое) опережать (военное) упреждать( шотландское) (юридическое) свидетельствовать;
    представлять( доказательства и т. п.) > to * smb. a fine /pretty/ dance заставить кого-л. (поплясать), поманежить кого-л > to * smb. by the nose вести кого-л. на поводу;
    держать кого-л. в полном подчинении > all roads * to Rome все дороги ведут в Рим > to * almost exclusively with one's left (спортивное) действовать почти исключительно левой рукой > to * smb. up the garden path обманывать кого-л.;
    водить кого-л. за нос all roads ~ to Rome все дороги ведут в Рим lead быть, идти первым, опережать (в состязании) ;
    превосходить;
    he leads all orators он лучший оратор;
    as a teacher he leads он лучше всех других учителей ~ свинец;
    as heavy as lead очень тяжелый ~ воен. упреждение, приведение огня (по движущейся цели) ;
    blind lead тупик chance led him to London случай привел его в Лондон curiosity led me to look again любопытство заставило меня взглянуть снова ~ пример, указания, директива;
    to follow the lead( of smb.) следовать (чьему-л.) примеру ~ первое место, ведущее место в состязании;
    to gain (или to have) the lead занять первое место ~ attr. свинцовый;
    hail of lead град пуль;
    to get the lead быть застреленным to give (smb.) a (или the) ~ поощрить, подбодрить( кого-л.) примером ~ attr. свинцовый;
    hail of lead град пуль;
    to get the lead быть застреленным to have a ~ of three metres (five seconds) опередить на три метра( на пять секунд) lead быть, идти первым, опережать (в состязании) ;
    превосходить;
    he leads all orators он лучший оратор;
    as a teacher he leads он лучше всех других учителей ~ мор. лот;
    to heave (или to cast) the lead мор. бросать лот;
    измерять глубину лотом helix ~ ход винтовой линии ~ первый ход (в игре) ;
    it is your lead вам начинать lead быть, идти первым, опережать (в состязании) ;
    превосходить;
    he leads all orators он лучший оратор;
    as a teacher he leads он лучше всех других учителей ~ ввод ~ вести, проводить;
    to lead a quiet life вести спокойную жизнь ~ (led) вести, приводить;
    to lead a child by the hand вести ребенка за руку ~ вести ~ возглавлять ~ вывод ~ выводить ~ театр., кино главная роль или ее исполнитель(ница) ~ грифель ~ грузило, отвес ~ директива ~ геол. жила;
    золотоносный песок to ~ (smb. to do smth.) заставить (кого-л. сделать что-л.) ;
    what led you to think so? что заставило вас так думать? ~ заставлять ~ инициатива ~ контакт ~ краткое введение к газетной статье;
    вводная часть ~ мор. лот;
    to heave (или to cast) the lead мор. бросать лот;
    измерять глубину лотом ~ спорт. направлять удар (в боксе) ~ тех. опережать;
    lead away увлечь, увести ~ тех. опережение, предварение (впуска пара и т. п.) ~ опережение ~ тех. освинцовывать, покрывать свинцом ~ первенство ~ первое место, ведущее место в состязании;
    to gain (или to have) the lead занять первое место ~ первый ход (в игре) ;
    it is your lead вам начинать ~ пломба ~ поводок, привязь ~ эл. подводящий провод ~ приводить, склонять (к чему-л.), заставлять ~ пример, указания, директива;
    to follow the lead (of smb.) следовать (чьему-л.) примеру ~ провод ~ проводник ~ разводье (во льдах) ~ полигр. разделять шпонами ~ спорт. разрыв между лидером и бегуном, идущим за ним ~ руководить, управлять, командовать, возглавлять;
    to lead an army командовать армией ~ руководить ~ руководство;
    инициатива;
    to take the lead взять на себя инициативу, выступить инициатором;
    руководить ~ руководство, инициатива ~ руководство ~ свинец;
    as heavy as lead очень тяжелый ~ свинец ~ pl свинцовые полосы для покрытия крыши;
    покрытая свинцом крыша;
    плоская крыша ~ тех. стрела, укосина ~ трубопровод;
    канал ~ указание ~ управлять ~ воен. упреждение, приведение огня (по движущейся цели) ;
    blind lead тупик ~ карт. ход ~ карт. ходить;
    to lead hearts (spades etc.) ходить с червей (с пик и т. д.) ~ охот. целиться в летящую птицу ~ тех. шаг (спирали, винта), ход (поршня) ~ pl полигр. шпоны ~ (led) вести, приводить;
    to lead a child by the hand вести ребенка за руку ~ вести, проводить;
    to lead a quiet life вести спокойную жизнь life: ~ образ жизни;
    to lead a quiet life вести спокойную жизнь;
    stirring life деятельная жизнь, занятость;
    life of movement жизнь на колесах ~ руководить, управлять, командовать, возглавлять;
    to lead an army командовать армией to ~ an orchestra руководить оркестром ~ attr. свинцовый;
    hail of lead град пуль;
    to get the lead быть застреленным ~ тех. опережать;
    lead away увлечь, увести to ~ by the nose водить на поводу;
    держать в подчинении;
    to lead (smb.) a (pretty) dance заставить (кого-л.) помучиться;
    поводить за нос, поманежить (кого-л.) to ~ for the prosecution (defence) юр. возглавлять обвинение (защиту) ~ карт. ходить;
    to lead hearts (spades etc.) ходить с червей (с пик и т. д.) to ~ nowhere ни к чему не приводить ~ off начинать, класть начало;
    открывать (прения, бал) ~ on завлекать, увлекать ~ out of выходить, сообщаться (о комнатах) ~ to вести к ~ to приводить (к каким-л. результатам) ~ up подготовка, введение to ~ (smb.) up the garden (path) вводить в заблуждение;
    завлекать ~ up to наводить разговор (на что-л.) ~ up to постепенно подготовлять the path leads to the house дорога ведет к дому red ~ свинцовый сурик to return (smb.'s) ~ поддерживать (чью-л.) инициативу to return (smb.'s) ~ ходить в масть ~ руководство;
    инициатива;
    to take the lead взять на себя инициативу, выступить инициатором;
    руководить to ~ (smb. to do smth.) заставить (кого-л. сделать что-л.) ;
    what led you to think so? что заставило вас так думать? white ~ свинцовые белила

    Большой англо-русский и русско-английский словарь > lead

  • 20 ערךְ

    עֵרֶךְm. (b. h.; preced.) 1) order, arrangement. Ned.22b שעֶרְכָּהּ של ארץ ישראל הוא because it (the Book of Joshua) contains the arrangement of the Land of Israel.Pl. עֲרָכִים, constr. עֶרְכֵי. Cant. R. to VI, 4; Pesik. Vayhi, p. 7a> sq. שש ע׳ המשנה, v. מִשְׁנָה.ע׳ המלהמה order of battle, arrangements proclaimed before the battle (v. מַעַרְכִים). Y.Sot.VIII, beg.22b (ref. to Mish. ib. 6) אבל בע׳ המ׳ מספקיןוכ׳ but in connection with the proclamation of the regulations of battle (the Mishnah says only), ‘they have to supply water Ib. אף בע׳ המ׳ כן the same is the case with ordinances of battle (they must be proclaimed in Hebrew). Bab. ib. 43b אין חוזרין עליו מע׳ המ׳ they are not entitled to leave the army on that account. Ib. 44b; Men.36a; a. e. 2) valuation, assessment, value of a person or animal dedicated to the sanctuary; vow of value. Arakh.7b ואמר עֶרְכִּי עלי if he says, I vow my own value. Ib. IV, 1 הע׳ בזמן הע׳ the valuation is regulated by the time of the vow (irrespective of the value at the time of paying the vow); ib. 4 נותן כזמן הע׳ he pays according to the value at the time of the vow. Ib. נותן ע׳ זקן he pays the value of an old man (Lev. 27:7); ע׳ ילד the value of a child (ib. 6); a. fr.Pl. עֲרָכִים, עֲרָכִין. Ib. II, 1 אין בע׳וכ׳ (Var. נֶעֱרָכִין, v. עָרַךְ) in vows of value nothing is valued at less than a Selʿa ; ib. 7b כל ע׳ שאתה מעריךוכ׳ all values which you assess shall be no less than Ib. IV, 1 והע׳ בנערך the vows of value are regulated by the condition of the person whose value is vowed. Ib. III, 1 יש בע׳ להקלוכ׳ in the laws regulating the dedication of values there is a lenient and a rigorous side. Ib. 2a, a. e. כל שישנו בדמים ישנו בע׳ … אינו בע׳ he whose person has a value, can vow the value of a person or an animal, but he whose person has no value cannot. Kerith. 13b דמין וע׳, v. דָּמִים. Tanḥ. Bḥuck. 6 פרשת ע׳ the section treating of vows of value. Ib. בזכות הע׳ אני מצילוכ׳ as a reward for your offerings of values, I will save you ; a. fr. ʿĂrakhin, name of a treatise of Mishnah, Tosefta and Talmud Babli, of the Order of Kodashim. ערכין, Gitt.44a Ar., v. עַרְכִי.

    Jewish literature > ערךְ

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • You and Whose Army? — Song infobox Name = You and Whose Army? Artist = Radiohead Album = Amnesiac Released = 4 June 2001 track no = 4 Recorded = Genre = Rock, Art rock Length = 3:11 Writer = Label = EMI, Parlophone, Capitol Producer = Nigel Godrich, Radiohead Tracks …   Wikipedia

  • You and Whose Army — You and Whose Army? You and Whose Army Chanson par Radiohead extrait de l’album Amnesiac Pays Angleterre Sortie 2001 Genre(s) Rock Auteur(s) …   Wikipédia en Français

  • You and Whose Army? — You and Whose Army Chanson par Radiohead extrait de l’album Amnesiac Pays Angleterre Sortie 2001 Genre Rock Parolier …   Wikipédia en Français

  • you and whose army? — informal used as an expression of disbelief in someone s ability to carry out a threat One word to him and I ll nail you. You and whose army? …   Useful english dictionary

  • Imperial and Royal Army during the Napoleonic Wars — The Imperial and Royal Army ( de. Kaiserlich königliche Armee) was that of the Austrian Empire, formed on 11 August 1804 preceding the dissolution of the Holy Roman Empire ruled by the Habsburgs, under Emperor Francis II (Emperor Francis I of… …   Wikipedia

  • Spiritual Israel Church and Its Army — The Spiritual Israel Church and Its Army (SICIA) is a spiritual church that emerged from the Church of God in David, a denomination that was founded in the mid 1920s in Alabama (and later moved to Michigan) by Bishop Derks Field. Upon Field s… …   Wikipedia

  • Army Modeling & Simulation Office — (AMSO) is a US Army organization within the Office of the Deputy Chief of Staff G 8 of the United States Army, Center for Army Analysis (CAA). Previously, AMSO transitioned from the Office of the Deputy Chief of Staff G 3/5/7. Contents 1 Mission… …   Wikipedia

  • Army of the Tennessee — This article is about the Union army named after the Tennessee River. For the Confederate army named for the State of Tennessee, see Army of Tennessee. Army of West Tennessee redirects here. For the army led by Maj. Gen. Earl Van Dorn, see… …   Wikipedia

  • Army of Tennessee — This article is about the Confederate army named after the State of Tennessee. For the Union army named for the Tennessee River, see Army of the Tennessee. Army of Tennessee 1864 standa …   Wikipedia

  • Army of Freshmen — Infobox musical artist Name = Army of Freshmen Img capt = Img size = Landscape = Background = group or band Origin = Ventura, California, U.S. Genre = Pop punk Power pop Rock Subgenre = Years active = 1997–present Label = U.S.: Blue Hand Records… …   Wikipedia

  • Army ant — The name army ant (or legionary ant or Marabunta ) is applied to over 200 ant species, in different lineages, due to their aggressive predatory foraging groups, known as raids , in which huge numbers of ants all forage simultaneously over a… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»